MATHEMATI

Grade 10


‫رﻳﺎﺿﯽ‬
‫‪請‬ﻨﻒ‬
‫دﻫﻢ‬
‫‪1390‬‬
‫ﻫـ ‪ .‬ﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬
 ‫ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺎن‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻫﻨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﻴﺪﺍﷲ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭژﺓ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺩﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻫﻨﺪﻭﻯ ﺧﺎﻟﻘﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺯﻛﻮﻫﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻫﻨﻤﻞ ﻃﻼﺑﺎﺯ ﺣﺒﻴﺐ ﺯﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻜﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺒﻴﺐ ﺍﷲ ﺭﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻳﺎﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺳﺮﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻜﻰ ﺩﻳﭙﺎﺭﺗﻤﻨﺖ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ -‬ﭘﻮﻫﻨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﻴﺪﺍﷲ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭژﺓ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻟﻴﻨﺎ ﺻﺎﻓﻰ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻜﻰ ﺩﻳﭙﺎﺭﺗﻤﻨﺖ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪﻳﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﻳﻤﻨﺎﺭﻯ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻜﻰ ﺩﻳﭙﺎﺭﺗﻤﻨﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻰ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮕﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﷲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﺭﺷﺪ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻧﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺒﻴﺐ ﺍﷲ ﺭﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻳﺎﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺁﺻﻒ ﻛﻮﭼﻰ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺩﻳﭙﺎﺭﺗﻤﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺘﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺪﺍﷲ ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺎﻳﻨﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻳﻔﻰ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﭘﺮﻭژﺓ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﺳﺮﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﻠﺴﺘﺎﻧﻰ ﺭﺋﻴﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺩﺭﺳﻰ‬
‫ﻃﺮاﺣﯽ و دﻳﺰاﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻤﺪ اﺷﺮف اﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺝ‬
 ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻠﻰ‬
‫دا ﻋﺰت د ﻫـــﺮ اﻓﻐـــﺎن دى‬ ‫دا وﻃﻦ اﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘـــﺎن دى‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﭽﯽ ﻳ‪ ３‬ﻗﻬــﺮﻣـــﺎن دى‬ ‫ﮐﻮر د ﺳﻮﻟ‪ ３‬ﮐﻮر د ﺗﻮرې‬
‫د ﺑــــــﻠﻮ＇ــــﻮ د ازﺑﮑـــــﻮ‬ ‫دا وﻃﻦ د ！ﻮﻟﻮ ﮐـﻮر دى‬
‫د ﺗــــــﺮﮐﻤﻨــــﻮ د ﺗﺎﺟﮑــــﻮ‬ ‫د ﭘ‪＋‬ﺘــــﻮن او ﻫﺰاره وو‬
‫ﭘﺎﻣﻴــﺮﻳــﺎن‪ ،‬ﻧﻮرﺳﺘﺎﻧﻴــــﺎن‬ ‫ورﺳﺮه ﻋﺮب‪－ ،‬ﻮﺟــﺮ دي‬
‫ﻫﻢ اﻳﻤـــﺎق‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﭘﺸـــﻪ ‪４‬ﺎن‬ ‫ﺑﺮاﻫﻮي دي‪ ،‬ﻗﺰﻟﺒﺎش دي‬
‫ﻟﮑــﻪ ﻟﻤــﺮ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻨﻪ آﺳﻤـــﺎن‬ ‫دا ﻫﻴـــﻮاد ﺑﻪ ﺗﻞ ‪＄‬ﻠﻴ‪８‬ي‬
‫ﻟﮑـــﻪ زړه وي ﺟـــﺎوﻳﺪان‬ ‫ﭘﻪ ﺳﻴﻨــﻪ ﮐ‪ ３‬د آﺳﻴـــﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫واﻳﻮ اﷲ اﮐﺒﺮ واﻳﻮ اﷲ اﮐﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮم د ﺣﻖ ﻣﻮ دى رﻫﺒـــﺮ‬
‫ﺩ‬
 ‫ﺑﺴﻢ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻭﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﻋﺰﻳﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻯﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻯﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗ ََﻄ ﱡﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻰﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻰ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﭘﻼﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻼﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺎﻯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺩﺧﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺯﻭﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺑﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺎﺩﻗﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺩﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻰﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺲ ﻭﻃﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣُﺒﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺖﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺎﻯ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﻨﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺩﺭﺳﻰ ﻳﺎﺭﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﻬﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ ﻣﻠﻰ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻧﺼﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺐ ﺩﺭﺳﻰ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﻯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﻨﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺩﺍﻧﻰ ﻣﻰﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﺩگ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻯ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻰ ﺍﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫـ‬
‫‪請‬ﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‪3 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﮔﺎﻧﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪53 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪69.................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻃﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ )ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ( ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ )ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‪149..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o o‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ 270 ,180 ,90 ,0‬ﻭ ‪360o‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﺍﻳﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ‪223.............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻭ‬
 ‫‪請‬ﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺳﻪ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ )ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺮﻭﻥ(‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪277...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻰ‪305...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﻪ‪359..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻗﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮگ ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻗﭽﻪ ﻳﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﺔ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻧﺎﺭﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﻳﺎﻧﺲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻄﻖ )ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ(‪391..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﺩﺭﻙ ﺷﻬﻮﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻰ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﻳﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﺺ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻫﺎﻥ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺯ‬
 ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
(Polynome)‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
(Polynomial) ‫ﻳﺎ‬
 ‫اﻓﺎده ﻫﺎی اﻟﺠﺒﺮی‬
‫)‪(Algebraic Expressions‬‬
‫ﺁﻳــﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ‬
‫‪y y2‬‬ ‫‪x 4−1‬‬
‫‪x3 +‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪ y2 +1 ، 2‬ﻭ ‪+ y3‬‬
‫‪x2 x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ)‪ :(variable and constant‬ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ x ≤ 10‬ﻭ ‪A = {x / x ∈ IN‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ‪ A‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ‪ 10‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ x .‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ)‪ (Variable‬ﻣﻴﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻰ ‪ z , y , x‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 4‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪ 5‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 3‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Constants‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ a , b c ...‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ)‪ :(Algebraic Expression‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺁﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 12 ، − 12 ، x ، x 2 − x + 1 ، 3x ، 4x + 5 + 2 ، 5 x‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪−‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ‪ 3x 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ )‪ (Coefficient‬ﻣﻴﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ‪y‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ −‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ‪ x‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ − 3x 5 y 5 ،‬ﻭ ‪ 15x 5 y 5‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪ (Liketerms‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ)‪:(Polynomial algebraic expressions‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 12 ، x − 1 ، 2 x 2 + x − 1 ، x 3 − x + 1‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪+ x ، x −2 + x − 1‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪ x 3 + x +‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪x2‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪d ) x 2 , c‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪b) 2 x‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪, a ) 2 x‬‬
‫‪y2 x3‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪i)6a 2 − 4a‬‬ ‫‪, h )88‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪g )9 x 2 −‬‬ ‫‪f )8p 2 + p 2 .2 , e) x −3 + x 2‬‬
‫‪x2‬‬
‫‪ a , h‬ﻭ ‪ i‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ f , e , d , c , b‬ﻭ ‪ g‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‪،‬‬
‫‪y y‬‬
‫‪ x 3 +‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪+ + y 3 :‬‬
‫‪x2 x‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ 12 = 12x‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪−3‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ 5 x‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ‪ 5 x = 5 x 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3 = 5 x −3‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ P‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪4‬‬
 ‫ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ( ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪P( x ) = a n x n + a n −1x n −1 + a n − 2 x n − 2 + ... + a 1x + a 0‬‬
‫‪n‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ‪ a1 , a 2 ,...a n −1 , an‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ an ≠ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛‬
‫ﭘﺲ ‪ n‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ‪ 2x 3 − x 2 , x , 1 , 8x 3 , − 8x 2 , − 8‬ﻭ ‪ 8 x‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪، a2 = 1 ، a n = −5 ، n = 3 ، P( x ) = −5x 3 + x 2 − x + 12‬‬
‫‪ a1 = −1‬ﻭ ‪ a 0 = 12‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ ، a1 = 0 ، a n = 11 ، n = 2 ، 11x 2 − 1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ a0 = −1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ )‪ :(Rational algebraic expression‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (q ≠ 0‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪ q‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ x 2 −‬ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫‪x2‬‬
‫‪x4 −1‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪x2‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ )‪ ( x 2 − 1‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫‪x2 −1‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪= x 2 − 1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ)‪ :(Irrational algebraic expression‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪، xy :‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪y2 +1‬‬
‫‪x2 + 5‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪xy‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪m+3‬‬ ‫‪3x 2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 3x 2 +‬ﻭ ‪13‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x+‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x−‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪1 3‬‬ ‫‪xy‬‬
‫‪3x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x −x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪− 20a 3b + 28ab 4 ,‬‬ ‫‪3x 2 +‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1 x2‬‬
‫‪8x 8 ,‬‬ ‫‪− 0.03‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪3x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪8 x −8‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪8 x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬
‫‪x 5‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ a1 , a2 , a3 , an ، Px 4 − ax 3 + bx 2 + cx + d‬ﻭ ‪ a0‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x3‬‬
‫= )‪ a1 , a 2 , a3 ، P( x‬ﻭ ‪ a0‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪− 2 x 2 − 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺁﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ 12 y 5 x 3 + x 4 y 3، 12x 3، − x 2 − x‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ 3x‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 16x‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ )‪(Monomial‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ x − 4‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ab − y‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺪﻩ)‪ (Binome‬ﻳﺎ )‪ (Binomial‬ﻭ ‪ 2 x 3 − x − 1‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺪﻩ )‪ (Trinomial‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ‪2 x − + 1‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫)‪ (Multinomial‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ 2x 3 − 8x 2 + 7 x + 11‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 2 x 3 − 3 y‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ x + y + z‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﻨﻮﻡ )ﺳﻪ ﺣﺪﻩ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﻨﻮﻡ )ﺩﻭ ﺣﺪﻩ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ )ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪﻩ(‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪3x 2 + 2 x − 4‬‬ ‫‪5y2 + 3y‬‬ ‫‪5x 3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪6 x 2 + 5x − 3 y 2‬‬ ‫‪7x2 − 4 y3‬‬ ‫‪7x2 y‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪3a 2b 2 + 6c 2 − z 5a‬‬ ‫‪8a 2b + 4c‬‬ ‫‪4xyz 2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻪ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ‪ − 3x ، 15 ، 2 x − y ، ax 2 + bx + c‬ﻭ ‪ 4 x 2 − 4 y‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺮﻳﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ)‪ :(Degree of a Polynome‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ − x 3 + 2 x + 1 + x 5‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 2x 2 y − 5xy5 + x 3 y‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ ( 1 + 5 = 6‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ x‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺧﻄﻰ )‪ (Liner Polynome‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ )‪ (Quadratic Polynome‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ )‪ (Cubic Polynomial‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ‪ 3x 2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ‪ 3x 2 y 3‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ‪ 12‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ‪. 12 = 12x 0‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ (2m − 4) x 2 + (5 − n ) x + 13‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪n‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2m − 4 = 0‬‬ ‫‪5−n = 0‬‬
‫‪2m = 4‬‬ ‫‪n =5‬‬
‫‪m=2‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺻﻔﺮﻯ)‪ :(Zero Polynome‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺻﻔﺮﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺻﻔﺮﻯ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ، P( x) = 0 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺻﻔﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ a‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ (b − 4) x 3 − (2c + 6) x + (a − b + c‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺻﻔﺮﻯ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪b−4=0‬‬ ‫‪2c + 6 = 0‬‬ ‫‪a−b+c =0‬‬
‫‪b= 4‬‬ ‫‪2c = −6‬‬ ‫‪a −4−3 = 0‬‬
‫‪c = −3‬‬ ‫‪a=7‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ g( x ) = 2xy 2 − x 2 y 3 ، P( x) = x 2 − 1 + 3x 5‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ h( x) = 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ g (x‬ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ (n = 5) ، 5‬ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ h(x‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 2 − x 3 + 2 x + 5x 5 ,‬‬ ‫‪x −1 ,‬‬ ‫‪15 ,‬‬ ‫‪2m 3n 2 − 3mn3 − mn‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x − 1 , x 3 + 1 + 2 x − x 2‬ﻭ ‪ 51‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x 2 − 1‬ﻭ ‪ x 3 + x + 1‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ؛ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ x 2 − 1 = x 2 + 0.x − 1 :‬ﻭ‬
‫‪x3 + x − 1 = x3 + 0.x 2 + x − 1‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪2 x 3 − 3 x 2 + 4 x − 1‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ − 11 + 12x + 13x 2 − x 3‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪3x 4 − x + 1 + x 3 + x 2‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ 3x 4 + x 3 + x 2 − x + 1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 1 − x + x 2 + x3 + 3x 4‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
 ‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﻭ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻯ‬
‫)‪:(Descending and ascending Polynomes‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻯ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ x + 3x + x + x + 1‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﻭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪1 + x + x 2 + 3x 2 + x 4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻯ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪x 3 y + 3x 2 y 2 + 2 xy3 − 5 y 4‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ x‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 x − 5 + 6 x 2 + 8 x 3 , 2 y 2 − 4 y + 3 − 3 y 4 + y 3 , 2a 3 − 5 + 4a 4 + a 5 + 3a 2 + a‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( y) = 4xy 4 − 3x 3 y 2 + 2x 2 y 3 + x 4 + y 5‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻯ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪P( y) = x 4 − 3x 3 y 2 + 2x 2 y3 + 4xy 4 + y5‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ x 2 + 3x + 2‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ m( x − 1) 2 + n ( x − 1) + P‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ n , m‬ﻭ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪m( x 2 − 2 x + 1) + nx − n + p = x 2 + 3x + 2‬‬
‫‪mx 2 − 2mx + m + nx − n + p = x 2 + 3x + 2‬‬
‫‪mx 2 + (−2m + n ) x + (m − n + p) = 1x 2 + 3x + 2‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
 ‫‪m =1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪− 2m + n = 3‬‬ ‫‪⇒n =5‬‬
‫‪m−n+p = 2‬‬ ‫‪⇒p=6‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ) ‪ :(Hemogence Polynoms‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؛ ﻃﻮﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪2 x 2 + y 2 − z 2 :‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :6‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 3x 2 y + 5 x m z − 7 y n −3 z 2‬ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪ n‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪m +1 = 2 +1‬‬ ‫‪n − 3 + 2 = m +1‬‬
‫‪m=2‬‬ ‫‪n −1 = m +1‬‬
‫‪n −1 = 2 +1‬‬
‫‪n=4‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ( ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻳﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺩﺩﺭ ﺍﺍﻓﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 2 5‬‬
‫‪x y‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x2 − y + 4‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x −1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪x − x2 − x3‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪12x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪− 12‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x +1 ,‬‬ ‫‪x 2 −1 ,‬‬
‫‪2x 2 − 2x − 2‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x3 + x −1‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 x − 5 + 6 x 2 + 8x 3‬‬
‫‪2 y 2 − 4 y + 3 − 3y 4 + y 3‬‬
‫‪1 − x 3 + x 2 + 2x 4 − x 5 + x‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P( x − 1) 2 + n ( x + 3) + c = 2x 2 − x + 22‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ n , p‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ b , a‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ‪P( x) = 7 x 4 − (2a − 3) x 3 + 5 x − (c − 3) :‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ Q( x) = (3b + 4) x 4 + 2 x 3 + 5 x‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪x = −1‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪P( x) = x 3 − x 2 − x − 1‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻰ ? = )‪ P(−1‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 2‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x) = 3x + 2‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ P(2) = 3 ⋅ 2 + 2 = 8‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ P(−1) ، P(5) :1‬ﻭ )‪ P(0‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x) = 2 x 2 − 7 x + 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪P(5) = 2 ⋅ 52 − 7(5) + 1 = 50 − 35 + 1 = 51 − 35 = 16‬‬
‫‪P ( 0) = 1‬‬
‫‪P(−1) = 2(−1) 2 − 7(−1) + 1 = 2 + 7 + 1 = 10‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫)‪ P(−1) ، P(0‬ﻭ )‪ P(1‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x) = x 5 − x 3 − x − 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P( x ) = 16x 3 − 8x 2 +‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ P(−‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪P(− ) = 16(− ) 3 − 8(− ) 2 + = 16(− ) − 8( ) +‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪16 4‬‬
‫‪1 1 3 −1− 2 + 3 − 3 + 3 0‬‬
‫= ‪=− − +‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= =0‬‬
‫‪4 2 4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪(Circumference‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ‪ C = 2π r‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫= ‪ π‬ﻭ ‪ r‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ r = 3 1 cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪ (C‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪22 7‬‬
‫‪C = 2 π r = 2.‬‬ ‫‪. cm = 22cm‬‬
‫‪7 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b, a‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ‪ p‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫‪a+b+c‬‬
‫= ‪ p‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ )‪ S = p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ b = 12cm , a = 9cm‬ﻭ ‪ c = 15cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪a + b + c 9 + 12 + 15 36‬‬
‫=‪p‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 18cm‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪S = p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c) = 18(18 − 9)(18 − 12)(18 − 15‬‬
‫‪= 18 ⋅ 9 ⋅ 6 ⋅ 3 = 2 ⋅ 9 ⋅ 9 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 3 = 2 2 ⋅ 32 ⋅ 9 2 = 2 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 9 = 54cm 2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ‪ V = π r 2 h‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ V‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ‪ r ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ‪ h‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ r = 5cm‬ﻭ ‪ h = 21cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪p( x ) = a n x n + a n −1x n −1 + ... + a 1x + a 0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ an + an −1 + ... + a1 + a0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :5‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ p( x) = 2 x3 + 5 x 2 − 3x + 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‪ p (1) :‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ‪P(1) = 2 ⋅13 + 5 ⋅12 − 3 ⋅1 + 1 = 2 + 5 − 3 + 1 = 5 :‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﺪﺩ)‪ (1‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ‪x 4 + 4 x 3 y + 6 x 2 y 2 + 4 xy 3 + y 4‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪14 + 4 ⋅13 ⋅1 + 6 ⋅12 ⋅12 + 4 ⋅1⋅13 + 14 = 1 + 4 + 6 + 4 + 1 = 16‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :6‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ‪ ( x − 3 y ) 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪(1 − 3 ⋅1) 4 = (1 − 3) 4 = (−2) 4 = 16‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ‪ (7 x 2 − 5x − 1) 600 (2x 3 − 1)17 ( x + 2) 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪(7 ⋅12 − 5 ⋅1 − 1) 600 (2 ⋅13 − 1)17 (1 + 2) 4 = (1) 600 (1)17 (3) 4 = 81‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :8‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮپ ‪ 6cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮپ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫=‪V‬‬ ‫‪πr 3 = π(6cm) 3 = π(216cm 3 ) = 288πcm 3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ)‪ P(x‬ﻋﻮﺽ ‪ x‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ( ﻋﺪﺩ )ﻳﻚ( ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ p( x) = − x 4 − x 3 − x 2 − x − 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ p(−1‬ﻭ ) (‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ p( x ) = kx 3 − x 2 + 3x − 1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ p(2) = 17‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ‪ mx2 − 2x + 1‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 18‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ x = −‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ p( x) = x 2 − x −‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪C = − x + 3x 4 − 6 x 3 ، B = −4 x 3 + 10 x 2 ، A = x 2 − 4 x + 4‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ D = x 2 + 4 x − 4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 4‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 100‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪a) C‬‬ ‫‪b) D‬‬ ‫‪c) A‬‬ ‫‪d) B‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 5‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪a ) x 2 − 2x + 6‬‬
‫‪b) 3x 4 + 6 x + 12‬‬
‫‪c) − x 3 − 40 x − 300‬‬
‫‪d ) x 5 − 120 x 4 + 10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ p( x) = x 4 − x 3 − x 2 − x − 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ p( ) ، p(0) ، p(−1) ،‬ﻭ ) ‪ p(− 1‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﻧﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪ 3w − 4‬ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ‪ w + 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ A = 8 x 2 − 2 x + 3‬ﻭ ‪B = 9 x − 5‬‬
‫‪3W-4‬‬ ‫‪W+2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A + B‬ﻭ ‪ A − B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ )‪ (Like terms‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ A = −3cd 2 − 2cd + 5‬ﻭ ‪ B = 9cd − 7cd 2 − 5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A + B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫)‪A + B = (−3cd 2 − 2cd + 5) + (9cd − 7cd 2 − 5‬‬
‫‪= −3cd 2 − 2cd + 5 + 9cd − 7cd 2 − 5 = −10cd 2 + 7cd‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ B = 2ab 2 + 3a − 2 , A = ab 2 + 3a‬ﻭ ‪ C = 2a + 4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪(A + B + C = ?) .‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ A + B + C :2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ B = 3x − 5 − 2x 2 , A = 1 + 2x + 3x 2‬ﻭ ‪ C = x 2 − 5 x + 4‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ B = a 3b 2 − 2a 2 b 3 + 4b − 4 , A = a 4 b − 2a 3b 2 − 3a 2 b 3 − 4c − 2b‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ C = a 4 b + a 3b 2 − 2c‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
 ‫‪3x 2 + 2 x + 1‬‬ ‫‪a 4 b − 2 a 3b 2 − 3a 2 b 3 − 4c − 2b‬‬
‫‪− 2 x 2 + 3x − 5‬‬ ‫‪a 3 b 2 − 2a 2 b 3‬‬ ‫‪+ 4b − 4‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪x 2 − 5x + 4‬‬ ‫‪a 4 b + a 3b 2‬‬ ‫‪− 2c‬‬
‫‪2x 2‬‬ ‫‪2a 4 b‬‬ ‫‪− 5a 2 b 3 − 6c + 2b − 4‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺟﻤﻌﻰ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ B‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ A‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪A = − x 3 + x 2 + x − 7‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ B = − x 3 + x 2 + 4x + 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ A = 2b 2 − 2c 2 − 2d 2 − 2e 2‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ B = b 2 − 3c 2 − 3d 2 − 3e 2 − f 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪A = −x 3 + x 2 + x − 7‬‬ ‫‪A = 2b 2 − 2c 2 − 2d 2 − 2e 2‬‬
‫‪− B = m x 3 ± x 2 ± 4x ± 3‬‬ ‫‪B =− b2‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪3c 2‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪3d 2 m 3e 2 m f 2‬‬
‫=‪A−B‬‬ ‫‪− 3x − 10‬‬ ‫‪A − B = b2 + c2 + d 2 + e2 + f 2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫)‪− x 3 + x 2 + x − 7 − (− x 3 + x 2 + 4 x + 3‬‬
‫‪= − x 3 + x 2 + x − 7 + x 3 − x 2 − 4x − 3‬‬
‫‪= −3x − 10‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ)‪ (Like terms‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) x 2 + 6x 4 − 8 + 9x 2 + 2x 4 − 6x 2 = 8x 4 + 4x 2 − 8‬‬
‫‪b) 3x − x − 1 + 3 − 2x = 2‬‬
‫‪c) 2x 2 − x − x 2 − x − 2 = x 2 − 2x − 2‬‬
‫‪d) 6xy − xy − x − y + 2x = 5xy + x − y‬‬
‫‪e) mn − 4 + mn − 5 = 2mn − 9‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ)‪ (Like terms‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪− t + 5t 2 − 6t 2 + 6t − 3‬‬ ‫‪9rs − 2r 2s 2 + 4r 2s 2 + 3rs − 7‬‬
‫‪3p − 4p 2 + 6p + 10p 2‬‬ ‫‪2fg + f 2 g − fg 2 − 2fg + 3f 2 g + 5fg 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ a 4 + 2a 3 b − 3ab 3 + a 2 b 2‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫‪ 2a 4 − 3a 3 b − 3ab 3 − b 4 + a 2 b 2‬ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪2a 4 − 3a 3 b + a 2 b 2 − 3ab 3 − b 4‬‬
‫‪− a 4 ± 2a 3 b ± a 2 b 2 m 3ab 3‬‬
‫‪a 4 − 5a 3 b‬‬ ‫‪− b4‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ 4 x + 6 − 2 x 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3x 2 − x 3 − 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻬﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ x 3 + x 2 − 2 x‬ﻭ ‪ − 2 x 3 + 3x − 7‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪202x 4 y − 303x 3 y 2 − 101x 2 y 3 − 404xy 4 − 505y 5‬‬
‫‪- 101x 4 y m 303x 3 y 2 ± 101x 2 y 3 m 404xy 4 ± 505 y 5‬‬
‫‪101x 4 y‬‬ ‫‪− 202x 2 y 3‬‬ ‫‪− 1010y5‬‬
‫‪3ax − 5bx − 8cx − 11dx‬‬
‫‪− 3ax m 5bx m 8cx m 11dx‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ )‪ (Like terms‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪20 − k − k − 10 − 6 − k 2 = − k 2 − 2k + 4‬‬ ‫‪8 − 10 + x − 7 + x = 2x − 9‬‬
‫‪y 2 − 1 + y 2 − 1 = 2y 2 − 2‬‬ ‫‪ab + a − b − a = ab − b‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
 ‫‪4b 3 − 2b 2 − 2 + b − 4b 3 + b 2 + b 2 − b + 2 = 0‬‬
‫‪x 2 − 5x − 2x 2 + 5 = − x 2 − 5x + 5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Q, P‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ(‪P + Q = Q + P .......................‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ(‪P + (Q + R) = (P + Q) + R ......‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻰ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ(‪P(Q + R) = PQ + PR .............‬‬
‫‪(Q + R)P = QP + RP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻯ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺟﻤﻌﻰ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻰ ﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪xy‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ x 2 + 2 x − y 2‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 3x 4 + 5x 3 + 2x 2 − x + 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 4 x 4 + 2 x 2 + x 3 − x + 1‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ ، a 3 + 3a 2 b + 3ab 2 + b 3‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ a 3 − 3a 2 b + 3ab 2 − b 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ B = a + 2a + 5 , A = a + 2a − 6a + 7‬ﻭ ‪C = 2a 3 − a 2 + 2a − 8‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪( A + B + C = ? ) .‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ )‪ (ab 2 + 3a ) + (2ab 2 + 3a − 2) + (2a + 4‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a ) − 3ab2 + 8a + 2‬‬ ‫‪b)3ab2 + 8a‬‬ ‫‪c)3ab2 + 8a + 2‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(3a 2 b 2 + 2a 2 − 5ab) + (−3ab + a 2 − 2) + (1 + 6ab‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻳﻚ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻰ ‪ x 2 + 2 x + 400‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻰ ‪ 3x 2 − 50 x + 100‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
 ‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺁﻥ‬
‫)‪ ( x + 1‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x+1‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ‪ 3r 2 s 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ‪ 5r 4 s 5‬ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﺁﻥ ‪ (3r 2s 3 )(5r 4s 5 ) = 15r 6s8‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ) ‪ (− 1 x )(− x ) , (7 x 2 y)(−3x 4 yz8‬ﻭ )‪ (−30a 2 b)(−5ab‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪16 1 16‬‬
‫= ) () ( = ‪(4) 2 ( ) 2‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬ ‫‪(−5y a )(5y) = −25y a +1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4 4 16‬‬
‫‪(−2a)3 (−2a) 2 = −32a 5‬‬ ‫‪(−4s 2 t 2 )(2st 3 ) = −8s 3 t 5‬‬
‫‪x(x m ) = x m +1 = x1+ m‬‬ ‫‪− a 2x (−2a) = 2a 2x +1‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪125 3 3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪( mn)( mn)( mn‬‬ ‫‪mn‬‬ ‫‪(− a)(− a) = a 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪(−a b )(−a) = a b +1 = a1+ b‬‬ ‫‪(−0.1)( −0.1)( −0.1) = − 0.001‬‬
‫‪(0.01p)(0.01p) = 0.0001p 2‬‬ ‫‪(−mn)(−mn 2 ) = m 2 n 3‬‬
‫‪(0.1x 2 )(0.1x 2 ) = 0.01x 4‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 3 (x − x 2 y 4 ) = x 4 − x 5 y 4‬‬ ‫‪(2m 2 n 3 )(1 − 4mn 4 ) = 2m 2 n 3 − 8m 3 n 7‬‬
‫‪− 3b(5b4 − 8b + 12) = −15b5 + 24b 2 − 36b‬‬
‫‪− 4s 2 t 2 (5s 2 t + 6st − 2s 2 t 2 ) = −20s 4 t 3 − 24s3 t 3 + 8s 4 t 4‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ‪ ، 2 x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ‪ x‬ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ x + 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪(a) :3‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ ( x − 4)( x − 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪( x − 4)( x − 5) = x 2 − 5x − 4 x + 20 = x 2 − 9 x + 20 :‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪−4‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x 2 − 4x‬‬
‫‪− 5 − 5x 20‬‬
‫‪b) (a + b)(a + b)(a + b) = (a + b)(a 2 + 2ab + b 2 ) = a 3 + 3a 2 b + 3ab 2 + b 3‬‬
‫‪ :c‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P( x) = x3 + 2 x‬ﻭ ‪ Q( x) = 2 x 2 − x + 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪P( x ) ⋅ Q( x ) = ( x 3 + 2 x ) ⋅ (2 x 2 − x + 1‬‬
‫‪= x 3 ⋅ 2 x 2 + x 3 ⋅ (− x ) + x 3 ⋅1 + 2 x ⋅ 2 x 2 + 2 x ⋅ ( − x ) + 2 x ⋅1‬‬
‫‪= 2 x 5 − x 4 + x 3 + 4 x 3 − 2 x 2 + 2 x = 2 x 5 − x 4 + 5x 3 − 2 x 2 + 2 x‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ a 3 + b 3‬ﻭ ‪ a 3 − b 3‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫] ‪a ) ( x m + y n )( x 2 m − x m y n + y 2 n ) = ( x m + y n )[(x m ) 2 − ( x m )( y n ) + ( y n ) 2‬‬
‫‪= ( x m ) 3 + ( y n ) 3 = x 3m + y 3n‬‬
‫)‪b‬‬ ‫)‪( x − y )( x + y )( x + xy + y)( x − xy + y‬‬
‫)‪= ( x − y )( x + xy + y)( x + y )( x − xy + y‬‬
‫‪= [( x )3 − ( y )3 ][( x )3 + ( y )3 ] = [( x ) 3 ] 2 − [( y ) 3 ] 2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪= (x 2 ) 2 − ( y 2 ) 2 = x 3 − y3‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Q , P‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻰ ﺿﺮﺏ( ‪P ⋅ Q = Q ⋅ P‬‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻯ ﺿﺮﺏ( ‪P ⋅ (Q ⋅ R) = (P ⋅ Q) ⋅ R‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P( x ) = 2x 2 − x − 1‬ﻭ ‪ Q( x) = 4 x − 8‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ)‪ (Area‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻰ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ n 2 + n − 20‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ‪ ، n + 5‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ‪n − 4‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ‪ ، 3 y + 3‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ‪2 y − 1‬‬ ‫‪6 y 2 + 3y − 3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬ ‫‪ 3 5 b 2 + 2b − 5‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ‪ ، 2b − 5‬ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪b 2 + 2‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪ m 2 + 26m + 169‬ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺁﻥ ‪ ، m + 13‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺁﻥ ‪ 2 g − 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪4g 2 − 16g + 16‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ (9c 2 + 12c + 4)π‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 3c + 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪23‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ (a + b + c)(a 2 + b 2 + c 2 − ab − bc − ac‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﻤﻨﺖ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺽ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺍﻩ ‪ x‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ 50m‬ﻭ ‪ 25m‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻰ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺣﻮﺽ‬
‫‪A = (25 + 2 x )(50 + 2 x ) = 1250 + 150x + 4 x 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺣﻮﺽ‪(25m)(50m) = 1250m 2 :‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺭﺍﻩ‪1250 + 150x + 4 x 2 − 1250 = 4 x 2 + 150x :‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﺮﺏ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻰ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫)‪− 2 xy(2 x 2 + 2 y 2 − 2‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(4 x 2 y 2 z)(−5xy 3 z 2 ) :‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻜﺲ ‪ x‬ﺍﻧﭻ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ )‪ ( x + 1‬ﺍﻧﭻ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ‪ 2 x − 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻜﺲ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﭻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a ) 40 in 3‬‬ ‫‪b) 24 in 3‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫‪48 in 3‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬ ‫‪20 in 3‬‬
‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ‪ ( a−q ) p −q ( a− r ) q − r ( a− p ) r − p‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪a )1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮ )‪c‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫‪4m 2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪n ,‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪3mn 2‬‬ ‫‪− x2‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪− mn‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪14x 5 − n a‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪ b‬ﻭ‬
‫‪2x 2‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؛ )ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(؟‬
‫ﺷﻨﺪ(؟‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ)‪:(Dividing monomial by monomial‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪36a 5 b 5c 7‬‬ ‫‪6x 9 y3 3‬‬ ‫‪− a2‬‬ ‫‪− na‬‬
‫‪= 3ab4 c 4 ,‬‬ ‫‪= x3y ,‬‬ ‫‪= a 2− x ,‬‬ ‫‪= −n a −b‬‬
‫‪12a 4 bc3‬‬ ‫‪4x 6 y 2 2‬‬ ‫‪− ax‬‬ ‫‪nb‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪( x 4 + 5x 3 − 7 x 2 ) ÷ x 2‬‬
‫‪x 4 + 5x 3 − 7 x 2 x 4 5x 3 7 x 2‬‬
‫‪= 2 + 2 − 2 = x 2 + 5x − 7‬‬ ‫)‪( x 2 ≠ 0‬‬
‫‪x2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x 8 y 2 − x 4 y 6 − 4x 3 y9‬‬
‫‪= x 5 y − xy5 − 4 y8‬‬ ‫)‪( x 3 y ≠ 0‬‬
‫‪x3y‬‬
‫‪r 6 s 2 − r 5 s − 4 r 3s 4‬‬
‫‪= r 4s − r 3 − 4rs 3‬‬ ‫)‪(r 2s ≠ 0‬‬
‫‪r 2s‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ)ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪ(‬
‫‪27 x 6 y13 − 18x12 y8‬‬ ‫‪x2‬‬ ‫‪x2‬‬ ‫‪10b 3c 7‬‬
‫‪a:‬‬ ‫‪b:‬‬ ‫÷‬ ‫‪c:‬‬
‫‪9x 3 y8‬‬ ‫‪y2 −1 y −1‬‬ ‫‪6b 2 c 7‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ)‪ (Dividend‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )‪ (Divisor‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ) ‪ (13x + 2x 4 + 12 + 3x 3 − 4x 2 ) ÷ (3 + x 2 − 2x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2x 4 + 3x 3 − 4x 2 + 13x + 12‬‬ ‫‪x 2 − 2x + 3‬‬
‫‪- 2x 4 m 4x 3 ± 6x 2‬‬ ‫‪2x 2 + 7x + 4‬‬
‫‪7x 3 − 10 x 2 + 13x‬‬
‫‪_ 7x 3 −‬‬
‫‪+ 14x ± 21x‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4x 2 − 8x + 12‬‬
‫‪− 4x 2 m 8x ± 12‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ )‪ (a 5 + b 5 ) ÷ (a + b‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ )‪ ( x 3 − 19x − 30) ÷ ( x + 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x3‬‬ ‫‪− 19 x − 30‬‬ ‫‪x+3‬‬
‫‪_ x 3 ± 3x 2‬‬ ‫‪x 2 − 3x − 10‬‬
‫‪− 3x 2 − 19 x‬‬
‫‪m 3x 2 m 9 x‬‬
‫‪− 10 x − 30‬‬
‫‪m 10 x m 30‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :5‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 4x 3 − 10x 2 + 12x + 6‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮ ‪ 2 x + 1‬ﭘﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪4x 3 − 10x 2 + 12x + 6‬‬ ‫‪2x + 1‬‬
‫‪_4x 3 ± 2x 2‬‬ ‫‪2x 2 − 6x + 9‬‬
‫‪− 12x 2 + 12x‬‬
‫‪m 12x 2 m 6x‬‬
‫‪18x + 6‬‬
‫‪_ 18x ± 9‬‬
‫‪−3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )‪ (2 x + 1‬ﭘﻮﺭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 6 y 3 − 11y 2 + 6 y − 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ 3 y 2 − 4 y + 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :6‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 12x 4 + 3x 3 − 13x 2 + x + 5‬ﺑﺮ ‪ 3x 2 − 1‬ﭘﻮﺭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪12x 4 + 3x 3 − 13x 2 + x + 5‬‬ ‫‪3x 2 − 1‬‬
‫‪_12x 4‬‬ ‫‪m 4x 2‬‬ ‫‪4x 2 + x − 3‬‬
‫‪3x 3 − 9x 2 + x‬‬
‫‪_ 3x 3‬‬ ‫‪mx‬‬
‫‪− 9x 2 + 2x + 5‬‬ ‫‪2x + 2 = 0‬‬
‫‪m 9x 2‬‬ ‫‪±3‬‬ ‫‪2x = −2‬‬
‫‪2x + 2‬‬ ‫‪x = −1‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = −1‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮ ‪ 3x 2 − 1‬ﭘﻮﺭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‪ P‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 3x 3 − 7 x 2 − 9 x + p‬ﺑﺮ ‪ x − 13‬ﭘﻮﺭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(a 3 + b 3 + c3 − 3abc) ÷ (a + b + c‬‬
‫)‪( x 2 + x − 6) ÷ ( x − 2‬‬
‫)‪( x 5 − y 5 ) ÷ ( x − y‬‬
‫‪j5 k 2 − 3 j8 k 4‬‬
‫‪2 j4 k‬‬
‫‪12 x 5 + 9 x 4 + 15x 2‬‬
‫‪3x 3‬‬
‫‪27a 6 b13 − 18a 12 b8‬‬
‫‪9a 3 b8‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
 ‫ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫)‪(Remainder Theorem‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪x 3 − 6 x 2 − x − 6‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ‪ x − 4‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﯽ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺮ ‪ x − a‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎ ) ‪ P(a‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩﻳﺎ ) ‪R = P (a‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = 2x 2 + 3x + 4‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ) ‪ ( x + 3‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫)‪ (Remainder‬ﺑﺎ )‪ P(−3‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪P(−3) = 2(−3) 2 + 3(−3) + 4 = 13 :‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 x 2 + 3x + 4‬‬ ‫‪x +3‬‬
‫‪_ 2x 2 ± 6x‬‬ ‫‪2x − 3‬‬
‫‪− 3x + 4‬‬
‫‪m 3x m 9‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻗﻀﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ ( x − a‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ )‪ R = P(a‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺮ )‪ Q(x) ، ( x − a‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪P(x) = Q(x)(x − a) + R‬‬ ‫‪x −a = 0‬‬
‫‪P(a) = Q(a)(a − a) + R‬‬ ‫‪x=a‬‬
‫‪P(a) = R‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 2 x 3 − x 2 − 7‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ ( x − 2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪29‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪P(2) = 2(2) 3 − (2) 2 − 7 = 16 − 4 − 7 = 5‬‬
‫‪R =5‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x 3 − x 2 − 226 x + 1410‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ ( x + 17‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x 3 − 2x 2 + 3x + 5‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ ( x − 4‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x 3 + 18x 2 + 164x + 199‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ ( x + 8‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 5 x 2 + x − 9‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ) ‪ ( x +‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪P( − ) = 5( − ) 2 − − 9‬‬ ‫‪x+‬‬ ‫‪=0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬ ‫‪5 1‬‬ ‫‪5 − 2 − 36‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪= 5( ) − − 9 = − − 9‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬ ‫‪x=−‬‬
‫‪4 2‬‬ ‫‪4 2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( y) = 10 y 3 + 7 y 2 − y − 11‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ (2 y + 1‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪P( − ) = 10(− ) 3 + 7(− ) 2 − (− ) − 11‬‬ ‫‪2 y + 1 = 0 ⇒ 2 y = −1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪P(− ) = 10(− ) + 7( ) + − 11‬‬ ‫‪⇒y=−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪4 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪5 7 1‬‬ ‫‪− 5 + 7 + 2 − 44 − 40‬‬
‫= ‪= − + + − 11‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= −10‬‬
‫‪4 4 2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪R = −10‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 4x 4 + 12x 3 − 13x 2 − 33x + 18‬ﺑﺮ )‪ ( x + 4‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪P(−4) = 4(−4) 4 + 12(−4) 3 − 13(−4) 2 − 33(−4) + 18‬‬
‫‪= 1024 − 768 − 208 + 132 + 18 = 1174 − 976 = 198‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪4x 4 + 12x 3 − 13x 2 − 33x + 18‬‬ ‫‪x+4‬‬
‫‪- 4x 4 ± 16x 3‬‬ ‫‪4x 3 − 4x 2 + 3x − 45‬‬
‫‪− 4x 3 − 13x 2‬‬
‫‪m 4x 3 m 16x 2‬‬
‫‪+ 3x 2 − 33x‬‬
‫‪± 3x 2 ± 12x‬‬
‫‪− 45x + 18‬‬
‫‪m 45x m 180‬‬
‫‪198‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ ( x-a‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ)‪ (Remainder Theorem‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ)‪ (R‬ﺑﺎ )‪ P(a‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ)‪ (Remainder theorem‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪(5x 3 − x 2 + 4 x + 1) ÷ ( x − 3‬‬ ‫) ‪(6p 3 + 2p 2 − p + 20) ÷ (p −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪(6 x 2 + 15) ÷ (4 x + 9‬‬ ‫)‪(4 y 2 − y − 6) ÷ ( y − 1.6‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 5x 3 − k 2 x 2 + 3k x − 6‬ﺑﺮ ‪ x + 2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ‪ − 44‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 2k 2 y 4 − ky 2 + 1‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ) ‪ ( y −‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ m 2 x 4 − 10x 2 + 2‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ )‪ ( x − 1‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‪ m‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ‪ 17‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪32‬‬
 ‫ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫)‪( x 5 + 1) ÷ ( x + 1‬‬ ‫)‪(The Factor Theorem‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ )‪ ( x − 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫]‪P(− 1) =[(−15 )+ 1‬‬ ‫‪ P( x) = x 3 − 4 x 2 + x + 2‬ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪= −1 + 1 = 0‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(a) = 0 ، P(x‬ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭘﺲ ‪ x − a‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ) ‪ R = P (a‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P (x‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ) ‪( x − a‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺁﻥ )‪ Q(x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪ P(x) = Q(x)(x − a) + R :‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ R = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪P(x) = Q(x)(x − a) :‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ )‪ ( x − a‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x − a‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ ‪ P(a) = 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ )‪ ( x − 2‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ P( x ) = x 3 + 3x 2 + 4x − 28‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪P(x) = x 3 + 3x 2 + 4x − 28‬‬ ‫‪x−2=0‬‬
‫‪P(2) = 23 + 3(2) 2 + 4 ⋅ 2 − 28 = 8 + 3(4) + 8 − 28 = 0‬‬ ‫‪x=2‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ R‬ﻳﺎ ‪ P(2) = 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ )‪ ( x − 2‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ x − 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ P( x ) = 2x 3 − 13x 2 + 26x − 15‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ) ‪ ( x − 2‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ P( x ) = x 5 − 32‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
 ‫‪P(x) = x 5 − 32‬‬
‫‪P(2) = 25 − 32 = 32 − 32 = 0‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ R = P(2) = 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ )‪ ( x − 2‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ x 5 − 32‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺁﻳﺎ )‪ ( x + 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = 2x 3 + 5x 2 + 7 x + 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪P(−1) = 2(−1)3 + 5(−1)2 + 7(−1) + 4 = −2 + 5 − 7 + 4 = 0 :‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ R‬ﻳﺎ )‪ P(−1‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ )‪ ( x − 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ ( x − 1) ، k‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪P( x ) = 2 x 4 − 3x 3 − x − 2k‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪P(1) = 2(1) 4 − 3(1) 3 − 1 − 2k = 2 − 3 − 1 − 2k = −2 − 2k‬‬
‫‪− 2 − 2k = 0 ⇒ − 2k = 2 ⇒ k = −1‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ k = −1‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺤﻪ ‪ x − 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ )ﺑﺎﻳﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ( ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ؟‬
‫)‪(x − 6) : (x 6 − 36x 3 + 1296‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(y + 5) : (y3 + 125‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪(x + ) : (20x 3 + 7x + 6‬‬ ‫) ‪(x − ) : (x 3 −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫)‪(x − 0.1) : (10x 3 − 11x 2 + 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(x + 2) : (x 5 + 32‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ )‪:(Converse of Factor Theorem‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x − a‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪ P(a) = 0 :‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ a‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺟﺬﺭ)‪ (Root‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ‪ P( x) = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x − 2‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = x 3 − 6x 2 + 11x − 6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫‪34‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ P(2) = 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪x 3 − 6 x 2 + 11x − 6 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 3 − 6x 2 + 11x − 6 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪ ( x − 2) :‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ P(2) = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪P(2) = 23 − 6(2) 2 + 11(2) − 6 = 8 − 24 + 22 − 6 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ -2‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 3 + 4x 2 + kx + 8 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪(−2) 3 + 4(−2) 2 + k (−2) + 8 = 0‬‬
‫‪− 8 + 16 + k (−2) + 8 = 0‬‬
‫‪− 2k = −8 + 8 − 16‬‬
‫‪k =8‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ‪ x 3 − 6x 2 + 5x + 12 = 0‬ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪(3) 3 − 6(3) 2 + 5(3) + 12 = 0‬‬
‫‪27 − 54 + 15 + 12 = 0‬‬
‫‪54 − 54 = 0‬‬
‫‪0=0‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 3 − 4x 2 + 5x − 2 = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :4‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪2 x 4 − 6 x 3 − 7 x 2 + kx − 15 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪2(3) 4 − 6(3)3 − 7(3) 2 + 3k − 15 = 2(81) − 6(27) − 7(9) + 3k − 15 = 0‬‬
‫‪162 − 162 − 63 + 3k − 15 = 0‬‬
‫‪3k = 15 + 63 + 162 − 162 = 78‬‬
‫‪3k = 78‬‬
‫‪k = 26‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ (x-a‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‪ P(a)=0‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪, P(x‬‬
‫‪ P(a)=0‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪ (x-a) ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ ( x − 2) , k‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻛﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻪ‬
‫‪ P( x ) = 2x 4 − x 3 + kx 2 + kx − 12‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺁﻳﺎ )‪ ( x + 3‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = x 5 − x 3 + 27x 2 − 27‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ )‪ ( x + 7‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ P( x ) = x 3 + 8x 2 + 8x + 7‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ )‪ ( y − 7‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪2 y 3 − 6 y 2 − 14 y − 7‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ) ‪ (m +‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = 2m 2 + 4m − 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ x 3 + x 2 − 10 x + 8‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x − 1‬ﻭ )‪ ( x + 1‬ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = x 3 + ax 2 + bx + 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 8‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ ( x − 5) ، k‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪Q( x ) = x 3 − 5x 2 − 16x + k‬‬
‫ﻣﻰﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 9‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‪ k‬ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (−1‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ‪x 3 − 9 x 2 + 14 x + k = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪36‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ‬
‫)‪(Synthetic Division‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪P( x ) = 2 x + 3x 3 − x 2 − 5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ( x − 2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ، ( x − a‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ )‪(Horner's Method‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪. x‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪. P( x ) = 0‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = 4 x 4 + 12x 3 − 13x 2 − 33x + 18‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪( x + 4‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫)‪ (Quotient‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ )‪ (Remainder‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x+4=0‬‬
‫‪x = −4‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪− 13‬‬ ‫‪− 33‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪−4‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪− 16‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪− 12‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪− 4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪− 45‬‬ ‫‪198‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ 4 x 3 − 4 x 2 + 3x − 45‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ‪ 198‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪P( x ) = ( x + 4)(4 x 3 − 4 x 2 + 3x − 45) + 198‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ x‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 4‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
 ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭ )‪ (-4‬ﺿﺮﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ )‪ (-16‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ)‪ (-16‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪12‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 12‬ﻭ )‪ (-16‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ )‪ (-4‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (-4‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ )‪ (-4‬ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﻪ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ -13‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 16‬ﻭ )‪ (-13‬ﻛﻪ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ‪ 3‬ﻭ )‪ (-4‬ﻛﻪ )‪ (-12‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ -33‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ)‪ (-33‬ﻭ )‪ (-12‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ -45‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ)‪ (-45‬ﻭ )‪ (-4‬ﻛﻪ ‪ 180‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 18‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪ 180‬ﻭ ‪ 18‬ﻛﻪ ‪ 198‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ‪ 198 ،‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 4x 3 − 4x 2 + 3x − 45‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ R = 198‬ﻭ ‪Q( x ) = 4 x 3 − 4 x 2 + 3x − 45‬‬
‫‪P( x ) = (4 x 3 − 4 x 2 + 3x − 45)(x + 4) + 198‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ‪) +‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ(‪) x‬ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(= ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ )‪ (4x 4 − 5x 2 + 2x − 3) ÷ ( x − 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻳﻜﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−5‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪4x 4‬‬ ‫‪− 5x 2 + 2x − 3‬‬ ‫‪x−2‬‬
‫‪− 4x 4 m 8x 3‬‬ ‫‪4x 3 + 8x 2 + 11x + 24‬‬
‫‪8x 3 − 5x 2‬‬
‫‪− 8x 3 m 16x 2‬‬
‫‪11x 2 + 2x‬‬
‫‪− 11x 2 m 22x‬‬
‫‪24x − 3‬‬
‫‪− 24x m 48‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪4 x 3 + 8x 2 + 11x + 24‬‬
‫‪45‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ‪ 45‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫)‪ ( x 5 − x 3 + 27 x 2 − 28) ÷ ( x + 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪x 5 − x 3 + 27 x 2 − 28 = x 5 − 0 ⋅ x 4 − x 3 + 27 x 2 + 0 ⋅ x − 28 :‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪− 28‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬
‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪− 24‬‬ ‫‪−9‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪x +3= 0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪−9‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪x = −3‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ x 4 − 3x 3 + 8x 2 + 3x − 9‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ )‪ (−1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :4‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(2 t 3 − 7 t 2 − 2 t + 14) ÷ (2 t − 3‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2 − 7 − 2 14‬‬ ‫‪2t − 3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪=t−‬‬
‫‪3 − 6 − 12‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2 − 4 −8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪t− =0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫=‪t‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
 ‫‪ 2t 2 − 4t − 8‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )‪ (t 2 − 2t − 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :5‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ )‪ (Synthetic division‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ)‪ (quotient‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ )‪ (remainder‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(4V 3 − 2V 2 + 5) ÷ (V − 5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪450‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪455‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ‪ Q( x ) = 4v 2 + 18v + 90‬ﻭ ‪ R = 455‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ( x-a‬ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻘﺴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(10x 2 + 2 x + 1) ÷ ( x + 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(2 x 3 − 7 x 2 − 2 x + 12) ÷ (2 x − 3‬‬
‫)‪(5x 3 − 3x + 7) ÷ ( x + 4‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(6 x 2 + 15) ÷ (4 x + 9‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪(6p 3 + 2p 2 − p + 20) ÷ (p −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪( y 5 − 17 y 3 − 9) ÷ ( y − 3‬‬
‫)‪(4 x 3 − 2 x 2 + 5) ÷ ( x − 5‬‬
‫)‪( x 3 + 8x 2 + 8x + 7) ÷ ( x + 7‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ )‪ ( x + 3‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ x 3 + 9x 2 + 27 x + 27‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ )‪ ( x − 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ P( x ) = 2x 4 − x 3 − x 2 + x − 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ R = 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ )‪ ( x − 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪2 x 4 − x 3 − x 2 + x − 1 = ( x − 1)(2 x 3 + x 2 + 1‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪P(1) = 2 ⋅14 − 13 − 12 + 1 − 1 = 2 − 1 − 1 + 1 − 1 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺁﻳﺎ )‪ ( x + 10‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ x 3 + 3x 2 − 150‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ؟‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪− 150 − 10‬‬
‫‪− 10‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪− 700‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪−7‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪− 850‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ R = −850‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ ، ( R ≠ 0‬ﭘﺲ )‪ ( x + 10‬ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪x 3 + 3 x 2 − 150‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = 3x 3 − 12x 2 + 25 + 5x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 2‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫‪41‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪P( x ) = 3x 3 − 12 x 2 + 5x + 25‬‬
‫‪3 − 12‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪25 2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪− 12 − 14‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪− 6 − 7 11‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ P(2) = 11‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = x 3 − x 2 + 10x + 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ x = 3‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ )‪ (r − 4‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ‪ r 4 − 256‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r 4 − 256 = r 4 + 0 ⋅ r 3 + 0 ⋅ r 2 + 0 ⋅ r − 256‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪r−4=0‬‬
‫‪r=4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪− 256‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪256‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Q( x ) = r 3 + 4r 2 + 16r + 64‬‬
‫‪R=0‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ )‪ (r − 4‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ‪ r 4 − 256‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (1‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 3 + 4 x 2 + x − 6 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪42‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪−6‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ x 2 + 5 x + 6‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪x 3 + 4 x 2 + x − 6 = ( x − 1)( x 2 + 5x + 6‬‬
‫‪x 2 + 5x + 6 = 0‬‬
‫‪( x + 3)( x + 2) = 0‬‬
‫‪x = −3‬‬ ‫‪x = −2‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ − 2‬ﻭ ‪ − 3‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ (x-a‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻭ )‪(R=0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ( x-a)،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (a‬ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ‪P(x)=0‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ) ‪ ( x +‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 20x 3 + 7 x + 6‬ﻭ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪ ( x + 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ x 4 − 2x 2 + x + 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻳﺎ )‪ ( x − 0,1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 10x 3 − 11x 2 + 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ 6 − y − 6 y 2 + y 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ y = 6‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (1‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 3 + x 2 − 10x + 8 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ) ‪ (-2‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 3 + 4x 2 + kx + 8 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
 ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ )‪(Like terms‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 3x 2‬ﻭ ‪ 5x 2‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 4 x 2 y 2‬ﻭ ‪ − 6 x 2 y 2‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ( ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ )‪ (Numerical Factor‬ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ 3x 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ x 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺻﻔﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺻﻌﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ )‪ (Like terms‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
 ‫)ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺟﻤﻌﻰ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺏ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻯ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻰ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺮﺏ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ) ‪ ( x − a‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﺑﺎ ) ‪P(a‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ( x − a‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ( x − a) ،‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻨﻴﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x − c‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ) ‪ M( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‬
‫‪ P(c) = 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ c‬ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ‪ M ( x) = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ( x − a‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺟﺬﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ‪ P( x) = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x + 5‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = x 3 + kx + 125‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :b‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x − 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ Q( x ) = 2x 4 − 3x 3 − x − 2k‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :c‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = x 3 + 2x 2 − 3kx − 10‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ( x + 3‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ )‪ (Quotients‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪ (Remainders‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪( x 5 + 4 x 4 + x 2 − 3x − 28) ÷ ( x + 4‬‬ ‫)‪, (5x 4 − 6 x 2 + 3x − 4) ÷ ( x + 4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪(30 x 3 − 20 x 2 − 100 x + 1000) ÷ ( x − 10) ,‬‬ ‫) ‪(10 x 2 − 31x + 24) ÷ ( x −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ )‪ ( x − 1‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ P( x ) = x 3 − 4x 2 + x + 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ) ‪ ( x −‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪P( x ) = x 3 −‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = −‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x) = 5 x 2 + x − 9‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 6‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ k ( x) = 2 x 3 − 3x 2 + 4 x + 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 7‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫‪ x 3 − 3x 2 + x − 3 = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 8‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ − 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪x 4 − 5 x 2 + 4 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 9‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ )‪ ( x + 3‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪46‬‬
 ‫‪ P( x ) = 3x 3 + kx 2 − 22x + 24‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 10‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(4 x 4 − 5x 2 + 2 x − 3) ÷ ( x − 2‬‬ ‫)‪( x 3 − x 2 − 14 x + 11) ÷ ( x − 4‬‬
‫)‪(7 x 4 + 41x 2 − 6) ÷ ( x + 6‬‬ ‫)‪(5x 3 − 3x + 7) ÷ ( x + 4‬‬
‫‪ - 11‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ b‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ P( x ) = x 4 + 6x 3 − 20x 2 + bx + c‬ﺑﺮ ‪ x 2 − 3x + 2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 12‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪k ( x ) = 2 x 3 + 5x 2 − mx + 4‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ( x 2 + 2x − 1‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 13‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ k = 3a ( x − 1) 2 − a ( x − 1) − 4‬ﻭ ‪ L = 16 + b( x − 1) − 3b( x − 1) 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ Kb + La‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 14‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x 3 + y 3 + z 3 − 3xyz‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪x + y + z = 1‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ xy + yz + zx = 20‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 15‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x + y = 6‬ﻭ ‪ xy = 8‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x + y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 16‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = 12x 4 + 3x 3 − 13x 2 + x + 5‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ‬
‫)‪ (3x 2 − 1‬ﭘﻮﺭﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 17‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ P‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ K ( x ) = 3x 3 − 7 x 2 − 9x + P‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ( x − 13‬ﭘﻮﺭﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 18‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ‪ P( x ) = 2x 3 − x 2 + 3x − 1‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ (2 x + 1‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪a) − 3‬‬ ‫‪b) −‬‬ ‫‪c) 3‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 19‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x) = 5 x 2 + 6 x − 7‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫)‪ ( x + m‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ )‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪−4‬‬
‫‪a )2‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪c) − 4‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ - 20‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ P( x ) = x 3 + 3x 2 − 5x − 8‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ ( x + 3‬ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪47‬‬
 ‫ﺻﻔﺮ)‪a‬‬ ‫‪b) 13‬‬ ‫‪c) − 23‬‬ ‫‪d )7‬‬
‫‪ - 21‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ y = −3 , x = 4‬ﻭ ‪ z = 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a : x 2 yz + zxy 2 + 3xyz 2‬‬ ‫‪b : x 2 − y 2 + Z2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ - 22‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪x‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪P( x ) = 2 x 3 + 3x 2 − 2 x + 5‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x=2‬‬
‫‪P( x ) = 3x 3 + 4 x 2 − 5x + 6‬‬ ‫‪, x = −1‬‬
‫‪P ( x ) = 2 x 4 − 5x 3 + 4 x − 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x =1‬‬
‫‪P( x ) = 4 x 4 + 6 x 3 + x 2 + x − 3 , x = −2‬‬
‫‪ - 23‬ﻳﻚ‪،‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻰ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺁﻥ )‪ (3‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x 3 − 3x 2 + x − 3 = 0‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺁﻥ )‪ (-1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x 3 − 5x 2 + 7 x + 13 = 0‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺁﻥ )‪ (-1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x 4 − 5x 2 + 4 = 0‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺁﻥ )‪ (-1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x 4 − x 3 − 9 x 2 − 11x − 4 = 0‬‬
‫‪ - 24‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P( x) = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ )‪ P(x‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) -1‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮ)‪c‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪d‬‬
‫‪ - 25‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ )‪ ( x + 5‬ﻭ )‪ ( x + 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ )‪ ( x + 3‬ﻭ )‪ ( x + 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫()‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫()‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪ - 26‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪a+b+c‬‬
‫= ‪ p‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 27‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ( x − 1) 3‬ﻭ ‪ x 3 + ax 2 + bx + c‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ b‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) 3‬‬ ‫‪c) − 3‬‬ ‫‪d) − 1‬‬
‫‪a +1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫÷ ‪ (a‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪) (a −‬‬ ‫‪ - 28‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ )‬
‫‪a −1‬‬ ‫‪a −1‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
 ‫‪a−2‬‬ ‫‪a −1‬‬
‫)‪a ) a (a + 1‬‬ ‫)‪b) a (a − 2‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ - 29‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ ( x + y )( x − y )(x + y‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) x 2 − y2‬‬ ‫‪b) x 2 + y 2‬‬ ‫‪c) 2 x 2 − y‬‬ ‫‪d) x − y‬‬
‫‪ - 30‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ )‪ (Descending Order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪− 5x 2 + 3x 5 + 9‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪− x 2 + xy 2 z 3 − x 5‬‬ ‫‪c) 3‬‬
‫‪ - 31‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ‪ Q( x) = x 2 + 3x − 5‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ )‪ Q(−1‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) 7‬‬ ‫‪b) − 7‬‬ ‫‪c) 1‬‬ ‫‪d) − 1‬‬
‫‪ - 32‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P( x) = x 2 − 2 x + 3‬ﻭ ‪ Q( x) = 2 x 2 + 3 x − 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫) ‪P ( x ) − Q( x‬‬ ‫)‪P(0) + Q(0‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪P(1) − Q(−1) :‬‬
‫) ‪P( x ) − P( x‬‬ ‫) ‪[P( x ) + Q( x )] + p( x‬‬
‫‪ - 33‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 x 2 y − 3xy 2 + x 3 + y 3‬‬ ‫‪4 xy 3 − 3x 3 y + 2 x 2 y 2 + x 4 + y 4‬‬
‫‪ - 34‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪2x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3x 2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x−‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪y2 −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y2‬‬
‫‪ - 35‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ )‪ (1 + 2x + 3x 2 ) + (3x − 5 − 2x 2 ) + (− x 2 − 5x + 4‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪c) − 1‬‬ ‫‪d) 2‬‬
‫‪ - 36‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ) ‪ (a 3 + b 3 + c3 − 3abc‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫‪49‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ )‪ (a + b + c‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 37‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(12 x 4 + 3x 3 − 13x 2 + x + 5) ÷ (3x 2 − 1) ,‬‬ ‫) ‪(a 3 + b 3 ) ÷ (a + b‬‬
‫)‪(4 x 3 − 10 x 2 + 12 x + 6) ÷ (2 x + 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫) ‪(a 5 − b 5 ) ÷ (a − b‬‬
‫‪x a −2‬‬ ‫‪− ma‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪mb‬‬
‫‪ - 38‬ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪(a 2 x − 2)(a 2 x − 2‬‬ ‫) ‪( x + )( x +‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2 2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫)‪(e x + 1)(e x − 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫) ‪(m 2 − 2n 2 )(2m 2 − n 2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪(0.1x 2 )(0.1x 2 )(0.1x 2 ) ,‬‬ ‫)‪(2 mn)(2 mn)(2 mn‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 39‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(a − 1) + 1 − (a − 1) − 3‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪− (10mn − m) − (m 2 + m) + m 2‬‬
‫)‪( y 2 − 1) + ( y 2 − 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫])‪[− 4(a − b) − 5] + [(2a + b) − (a − b‬‬
‫‪10 [−{−( x 2 − 1) + 5} − x ( x − 2)] ,‬‬ ‫)‪10( x + 1) − ( x + 1) − 3( x + 2‬‬
‫‪mn − 4 + mn − 5‬‬
‫‪ - 40‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a + b = 9‬ﻭ ‪ ab = 20‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ a − b‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 41‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a + b = 7‬ﻭ ‪ a − b = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ 4ab ، a 2 + b 2‬ﻭ ) ‪8ab (a 2 + b 2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ دوم‬
‫راﺑﻄﻪ‬
s1 s1 (s1,s2 )
s2 s2 (s 2 ,s2 )
sn
x sn
= (s n ,sn )
s s R
 ‫ﺟﻮره ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺗﺐ و‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮی ﮐﺎرﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﯽ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗــﺐ )‪ (a,b‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ )‪ (c,d‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳــﺎ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗــﺐ )‪ (a,b‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬
‫)‪ (b,a‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a‬ﻭ‪ b‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ a‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ )‪ (a,b‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ )‪ (b,a‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ) ‪ (a , b) ≠ (b, a‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ )‪ (a,b‬ﻭ)‪(c,d‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ a=c‬ﻭ ‪ b=d‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x − 2 , y + 1) = (1,3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪y +1 = 3‬‬ ‫‪x − 2 =1‬‬
‫‪y=2‬‬ ‫‪x =3‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ (a + 1,2b − 3) = (0,−1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ)‪(Cartesian Plane‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ )‪ (Origin‬ﺑﻨﺎﻣﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ X'OX‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Y'OY‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺼﺔ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺑﻊ )‪(Quadrant‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )‪ (Anti clockwise‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ )‪ (x,y‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ x‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ y‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ ،x‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ x‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ x = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ )‪ (y<0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ y=0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ )‪ (Cartesian Coordinates‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ )‪P( x , y‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺎ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ )‪ (abscissa‬ﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ )‪(Ordinate‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (0,0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (x,y‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ N(5,0) , T(0,2) , K (−2,4) , P(−3,−5‬ﻭ )‪ M (−6,0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (2,0) , (2,1) , (−2,−1) , (−1,2) , (2,−1‬ﻭ )‪ (0,1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ C(−3,−3) , B(−3,3) , A(3,3‬ﻭ )‪D(3,−3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺁﻥ )‪ B(0,2) , A(2,0‬ﻭ )‪ C(0,0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ P3 (1,5) , P2 (−3,2) , P1 (2,−3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫)‪(1,5‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(−5,1‬‬
‫)‪(−4,−6‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(4,−5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪( − ,−2‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪( − ,2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫) ‪(2 ,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(2,0‬‬
‫‪2 4‬‬
‫)‪(0,−1‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A × B‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A{1,2,3‬ﻭ}‪ B={4,5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ A × B t‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ A × B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ A × B = B × A‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ A × A‬ﻭ ‪ B× B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ A × B‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫}‪A × B = {( x , y) x ∈ A ∧ y ∈ B‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ (A × B‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ )‪ (x,y‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ x‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ A ≠ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‬
‫‪ A × B ≠ B × A‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ‪ m‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ‪ n‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫‪ A × B‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ (m × n‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {0,1,2‬ﻭ }‪ B = {3,4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ B × A, A × B‬ﻭ ‪ A × A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫})‪A × B = {0,1,2} × {3,4} = {(0,3), (0,4), (1,3)(1,4), (2,3), (2,4‬‬
‫})‪B × A = {3,4} × {0,1,2} = {(3,0), (3,1), (3,2)(4,0), (4,1), (4,2‬‬
‫})‪A × A = {0,1,2} ×{0,1,2} = {(0,0), (0,1), (0,2)(1,0), (1,1), (1,2), (2,0), (2,1), (2,2‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {−4,−1,0‬ﻭ }‪ B = {1,4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × A , A × B‬ﻭ ‪ B× B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ I N = {1,2,3...‬ﻭ }‪ L = {0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ IN× L‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫}‪I N × L = {(1,0), (2,0), (3,0), (4,0)...} = {( x,0) / x ∈ IN‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ IN = {1,2,3...‬ﻭ }‪ W = {0,1,2,3...‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ W × IN‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫} ‪W × IN = {(0,1), (0,2), (0,3),..., (1,1), (1,2), (1,3),..., (2,1), (2,2),...,‬‬
‫}‪= {( x , y) / x ∈ w ∧ y ∈ IN‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ )‪(Graph of Cartesian Product‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2,3‬ﻭ }‪ B = {4,5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫})‪A × B = {(1,4), (1,5), (2,4), (2,5), (3,4), (3,5‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 1,2,3‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ‪2,1‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 3‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ‪ A × B‬ﺭﺍﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :5‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2‬ﻭ }‪ B = {2,3,4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × B‬ﻭ ‪ B × A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫})‪A × B = {1,2} × {2,3,4} = {(1,2), (1,3), (1,4), (2,2), (2,3), (2,4‬‬
‫})‪B × A = {2,3,4} × {1,2} = {( 2,1), (2,2), (3,1), (3,2), (4,1), (4,2‬‬
‫‪A×B‬‬ ‫‪B× A‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:6‬ﺍﮔﺮ }]‪ A = {x / x ∈ IR , 0 ≤ x ≤ 3 = [0,3‬ﻭ‬
‫}]‪ B = {y / y ∈ IR , 0 ≤ y ≤ 2 = [0,2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫}‪A × B = {( x , y) / 0 ≤ x ≤ 3 ∧ 0 ≤ y ≤ 2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2‬ﻭ }‪ B = {3,4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔ‬
‫‪59‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫)‪i‬‬ ‫}‪ A = {−1,1,3‬ﻭ }‪B = {2,4‬‬
‫)‪ii‬‬ ‫}‪ A = {−1,1‬ﻭ }‪B = {2,3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ B × A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2,3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {2,4,6‬ﻭ }‪ B = {1,3,5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × A , B × A , A × B‬ﻭ ‪ B× B‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
 ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ )‪(Relation‬‬
‫ﻋﻄﺎﺍﷲ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻋﺰﺕ ﺍﷲ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻄﺎﺍﷲ ‪ R‬ﻋﺰﺕ ﺍﷲ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﻰ )‪ (non empty sets‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ‪ A × B‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ (a , b) ∈ R‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎ ‪ b‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (aRb‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ R‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪ R ⊂ A × B‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ R‬ﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ A × A‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺩﺭ ‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {x, y‬ﻭ }‪ B = {1,2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A × B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫})‪A × B = {( x ,1), ( x ,2), ( y,1), ( y,2‬‬
‫})‪R 1 = {( x ,1), ( x ,2‬‬
‫})‪R 2 = {( y,1‬‬
‫})‪R 3 = {( y,2‬‬
‫})‪R 4 = {( x ,1), ( y,1‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ A × B‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ‪ A × B‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺯ‪A‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2 4 = 16‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪16‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,3,5,...19‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ A‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬
‫}‪ B = {2,4,6‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ B‬ﺳﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ‪ A × B‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪61‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ A × B‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10 × 3 = 30‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 230‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪ φ :‬ﻭ ‪ A × B‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2,3‬ﻭ }‪ B = {a , b‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫})‪A × B = {(1, a ), (1, b), (2, a ), (2, b), (3, a ), (3, b‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫})‪R 1 = {(1, a ), (1, b), (2, a ), (3, a ), (3, b‬‬
‫})‪R 2 = {(1, b), (2, a ), (3, a ), (3, b‬‬
‫}) ‪R 3 = {(2, a ), (2, b), (3, a‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ R = {( x, y) / x − y = 5‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ }‪ A = {1,2,3,4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :4‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ R = {( x, y) / x − y = 2‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ }‪ A = {1,2,3,4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ R = {(3,1), (4,2)} :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ )‪ (Range‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ R‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪ R ⊆ A × B‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ )‪ (x,y‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؛ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ‪ x ∈ A‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ y ∈ B‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ‪ R‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ‪ Dom R‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ )‪ (Range‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ R‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ‪ Range R‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2‬ﻭ }‪ B = {x, y‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ‪ R‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ) ‪ ( Dom R‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪ Range R‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫})‪R = {(1, x ), (2, x ), (1, y), (2, y‬‬
‫}‪ Rang R = {x , y‬ﻭ }‪Dom R = {1,2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ }‪ R = {(x, y) / x 2 + y 2 = 13‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ }‪ A = {−3,−2,1,2,3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ )‪ (R‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Dom‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ Rang‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫})‪R = {(−3,−2), (−3,2), (−2,−3), (−2,3), (2,−3), (2,3), (3,−2), (3,2‬‬
‫}‪Dom R = {−3,−2,2,3‬‬
‫}‪Range R = {−3,−2,2,3‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ R = {( x, y) / y = 2x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ R‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ }‪ {0,4,8‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ )‪(Inverse of a Relation‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ R‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ‪ R‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ R −1‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫}‪R −1 = {( y, x ) ( x , y) ∈ R‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪( x , y) ∈ R ⇔ ( y, x ) ∈ R −1‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ R‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ R −1‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ R −1‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ R‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ })‪ R = {(1,2)(2,3)(3,4‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻳﺎ ‪ R −1‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫})‪R −1 = {( 2,1)(3,2)(4,3‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ )‪ :(Equivalent Relation‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻰ )‪ :(Reflexive Property‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ x ∈ A‬ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬
‫‪ ( x , x ) ∈ R‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ‪∀x ∈ A ⇒ ( x , x ) ∈ R‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻯ )‪ :(Symmetric Property‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﻮﻟﻴﺖ )‪ (x,y‬ﺩﺭ ‪ R‬ﺟﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ )‪ (y,x‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ‪ R‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ‪∀( x , y) ∈ R ⇒ ( y, x ) ∈ R‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻰ)‪ :(Transitive Property‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ( x , y) ∈ R‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪( y, z) ∈ R‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ )‪ (x,z‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ‪( x , y) ∈ R ∧ ( y, z) ∈ R ⇒ ( x , z) ∈ R‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ‪ x‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ‪ x=x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪) 5=5‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻰ(‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x=y‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪ y=x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x=y‬ﻭ ‪ y=z‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪ x=z‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻰ(‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2‬ﻭ }‪ B = {0,4,6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ‪ A‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2,3,4‬ﻭ }‪ B = {1,3,5‬ﻭ }‪ R = {( x, y) y < x‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ } ‪ R = {( x, y) y + 1 = 2x 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ Range‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
 ‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪: (a , b) t‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ) ‪ (a , b) ≠ (b, a‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﻭ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ )‪ (a , b‬ﻭ ) ‪ (c, d‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ a=c :‬ﻭ ‪b = d‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ ) ﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻰ( ﺩﻭ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ A× B‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪A× B = {( x , y) x ∈ A ∧ y ∈ B} :‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ m‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ B‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ n‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ A× B‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ m × n‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺖ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (A × B) ،B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ‪ A× B‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ‪ R‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ R ⊂ A × B‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ R ⊂ A × A‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ R‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ n‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ‪ A‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪2 n‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ m‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ B‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ n‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2mxn‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ R‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ DomR‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺖ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ (Range ) ، R‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ‪ R‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ‪ R‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪R −1‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫}‪R.−1 = {( y, x ) ( x , y) ∈ R‬‬
‫‪( x , y) ∈ R ⇔ ( y, x ) ∈ R −1‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ R −1‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ R‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ R −1‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ R‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪ R :‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ‪ A‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,3,5‬ﻭ }‪ B = {2,4,6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ B × A, A × B‬ﻭ ‪ A× A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {1,2,3‬ﻭ }‪ B = {0,1‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ A× B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ ( x − 2 y,2x + y ) = (3,1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ }‪ A = {1,3,5‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {a , b‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ A2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ } ‪ R = {( x, y) y = x 2‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ}‪ R = {( x, y) y 2 = x‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ })‪ R = {(1,−1), (2,−2)(3,−3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ R −1‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﺍﮔﺮ })‪ R = {(1,2)(1,3)(1,4)(1,5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ R‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ R −1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {3,6,12‬ﻭ }‪ B = {− 1,0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -11‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ) ‪ (4a + 1,2b + a‬ﻭ ) ‪ (5,3a − 4b‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -12‬ﺍﮔﺮ }‪ A = {a , b, c‬ﻭ }‪ B = {x, y‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A× B‬ﻭ ‪ B × A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮم‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
 ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪(function‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﺎﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ ﺩﺍﻥ ﺟﺮﻣﻨﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻟﻴﺒﻨﺰ )‪(Leibniz‬‬
‫)‪ (1716 – 1646‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻰ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻏﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺎﺣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ )‪ (A‬ﺑﺎ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ )‪ (x‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻰ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‪ A = x 2 :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x 1 2 3 4 5 . . .‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪1 4 9 16 25 . . .‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻰ ) ‪A = f ( x‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻔﻮﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ )‪ (p‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ )‪ (t‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻔﻮﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ ) ‪( t‬‬ ‫‪1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000‬‬
‫‪ 1650 1750 1860 2070 2300 2560 3040 3710 4450 5280 6080‬ﻧﻔﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﻥ ) ‪( p‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻔﻮﺱ )‪ (Population‬ﻳﺎ ‪ P‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ )‪ (t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ) ‪p = f (t‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪ ،(A‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪ ،(r‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪( A = P r 2 ) .‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺮﺓ ) ‪ (V‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻛﺮﺓ )‪ (r‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪V = π r 3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺟﻮﺍﺯﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫)‪. (23 = 8 , 33 = 27‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ )‪ ،(A‬ﻧﻔﻮﺱ ‪ p‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‪ ،v‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ )‪ ،(x‬ﻭﻗﺖ )‪ (t‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻛﺮﺓ )‪ (r‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻔﻮﺱ ﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ‬
‫)‪ (dependentVariable‬ﻭ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻛﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (Independent Variable‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻨﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩ )‪Variable‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺎﻳﺎ ﻗﺎ ﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍ ﻄ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻚ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺎﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺑ ﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (domain‬ﻭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪ Range‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯﺳﺖ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ }) ‪ S = {(1, 4 )(2 , 3) (3 , 2 )(4 , 3 )(5 , 4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ S‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫}‪domain s = {1,2,3,4,5‬‬
‫}‪range s = {2,3,4‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ}) ‪ T = {(1, 4 ), (2 , 3), (3 , 2 ), (2 , 4 ), (1, 5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ T‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫)ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪(І‬‬ ‫)ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪( ІІ‬‬ ‫)ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪( ІІІ‬‬
‫‪Domain Range‬‬ ‫‪Domain Range‬‬ ‫‪Domain Range‬‬
‫)ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ( )ﻋﺪﺩ(‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ( )ﻋﺪﺩ(‬ ‫)ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ( )ﻋﺪﺩ(‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ І‬ﻭ ‪ ІІ‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ІІІ‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺎ )‪ (Domain‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﻳﺎ ‪ Range‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺁﻥ‬
‫)‪ (9 , − 3), (9 , 3), (0 , 0), (4 , − 2), (4 , 2), (1 , − 1), (1 , 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (Images‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﻠﻰ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻠﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﻡ )‪ (input‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Domain‬ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ )‪ (output‬ﻳﺎ )‪ f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Range‬ﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻰ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ Range ⊆ codomain :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ})‪ f = {(−5 , 3m) , (−5 , 2m − 10) , (1, 2‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ − 5 = −5‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 3m = 2m − 10‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ m = −10‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ‪ f‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪m = −10‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫)‪(a‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
 ‫)‪(b‬‬ ‫)‪(c‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ‪ c‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺖ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪X‬ﻳﺎ) ‪ (Domain‬ﻣﺤﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ‪ Y‬ﻳﺎ )‪ (Range‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺖ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫)‪ (Domain‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ )‪ (Range‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1−‬‬ ‫})‪{(2 , 4) , (3 , 6 ) , (4 , 8) , (5 ,10‬‬
‫‪2−‬‬ ‫})‪{(−1, 4) , (0 , 3) , (1, 2) , (2 ,1‬‬
‫‪3−‬‬ ‫})‪{(10 , − 10) , (5 , − 5 ) , (0 , 0 ) , (5 , 5) , (10 ,10‬‬
‫‪4−‬‬ ‫})‪{(−10 ,10) , (−5 , 5 ) , (0 , 0 ) , (5 , 5) , (10 ,10‬‬
‫‪5−‬‬ ‫})‪{(0 ,11) , (1,1) , (2 ,1) , (3 , 2) , (4 , 2) , (5 , 2‬‬
‫‪6−‬‬ ‫})‪{(1,1) , (2 ,1) , (3 ,1) , (1, 2) , (2 , 2) , (3 , 2‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪
t‬ﭼﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﭼﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺭﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ ﺩﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﻳﺴﻰ ﺍﻳﻮﻟﺮ )‪ (Euler) (1783 -1707‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ‪ y‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ x‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ)‪ y = f (x‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ)‪ f (x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ f‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ f(x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻰ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪f :A → B‬‬
‫)‪y = f (x‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ‪ x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (input‬ﻭ)‪ f(x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (output‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫‪ g , h , f‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺑﻪ ‪ 4‬ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻫﻰ )‪ (Verbally‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ )‪ (Numerically‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﻰ )‪ (Visually‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ )‪ (Algebraically‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ )ﻭﺍﺿﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ )‪ f(x‬ﻭ)‪ g(x‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﺓ ‪ x‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ (Range‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x − 4‬‬ ‫‪g ( x) = x 3 − 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪-1 -2 0‬‬ ‫‪2 4‬‬ ‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 -1 1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫? =)‪f(x‬‬ ‫? ?‬ ‫? ?‬ ‫? =)‪g(x‬‬ ‫? ?‬ ‫?‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 + 3x − 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ f (−3) , f (0) , f (2‬ﻭ )‪ f ((aa‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f ( x ) = x 2 + 3x − 2 (Rule‬ﺳﺎﺣﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪f (2) = 22 + 3 ⋅ 2 − 2 = 4 + 6 − 2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪f (0) = 02 + 3 ⋅ 0 − 2 = −2‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬
‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪f (−3) = (−3) 2 + 3(−3) − 2 = 9 − 9 − 2‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪f (a ) = a 2 + 3a − 2‬‬ ‫‪a 2 + 3a − 2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪f (2) = 8 , f (0) = −2 , f (−3) = −2 , f (a) = a 2 + 3a − 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x ) = x 2 + 3x + 5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ f ( x + 3) , f (− x‬ﻭ )‪ f (2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪f (2) = 2 2 + 3 ⋅ 2 + 5 = 4 + 6 + 5 = 15‬‬
‫‪f ( x + 3) = ( x + 3) 2 + 3( x + 3) + 5 = x 2 + 6 x + 9 + 3x + 9 + 5 = x 2 + 9 x + 23‬‬
‫‪f (− x ) = (− x ) 2 + 3(− x ) + 5 = x 2 − 3x + 5‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g ( x) = x 2 − 2 x + 7‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ g( x + 4) , g(− x ) .‬ﻭ )‪ g(−5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ h( x) = 3 − 2 x‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x) = 2 x + 6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ h (6) , f (−1) .‬ﻭ‬
‫)‪ f (−1) + f (3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪f (−1) = 2(−1) + 6 = −2 + 6 = 4‬‬
‫‪h (6) = 3 − 2 ⋅ 6 = 3 − 12 = −9‬‬
‫‪f (−1) + f (3) = 4 + 2 ⋅ 3 + 6 = 4 + 12 = 16‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x ) = ax 2 − bx + 1‬ﻭ ‪ f (3) = 10 , f (1) = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪10 = 9a − 3b + 1 ,‬‬ ‫‪0 = a − b +1‬‬
‫‪10 = 9a − 3b + 1‬‬
‫‪0 = _ 3a m 3b ± 3‬‬
‫‪10 = 6a − 2‬‬ ‫‪10 = 18 − 3b + 1‬‬
‫‪12 = 6a‬‬ ‫‪3b = 19 − 10‬‬
‫‪a=2‬‬ ‫‪3b = 9‬‬
‫‪b=3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫‪a:‬‬ ‫‪x2 + y = 4‬‬ ‫‪b : x2 + y2 = 4‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ‪ x‬ﻳﻚ ‪ y‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a:‬‬ ‫‪x2 + y = 4 ⇒ y = 4 − x2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‪ y‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪y = 4 − 12 = 3‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ‪ y = 4 − x 2‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪b:‬‬ ‫‪x2 + y2 = 4 ⇒ y = ± 4 − x2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﺩﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ‪ y‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ y = ± 3‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ‪ (1 , 3 )(1 , − 3‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ‪ y − x 2 = 1‬ﻭ ‪ x 3 − y = 2‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x y = 0‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ y = f (x) ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪x‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ‪ x‬ﻳﻚ ‪ y‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ –1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g ( x) = x 2 + x − 2‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x) = 2 x 2 + 3 x − 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫)‪f (0) ⋅ g (−2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ g(−2) , f (−3) , g(2) − g(−3‬ﻭ‬
‫)‪f (−3‬‬
‫‪ – 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − x‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x + 4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ g(0) , f (−2) .‬ﻭ )‪ f ( x − 1‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g ( x) = 3 x‬ﻭ ‪ h( x) = 1 + 4 x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ h (−3) , h (16‬ﻭ )‪ g (−4‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫= ) ‪ g ( x ) = l6 + 3x − x 2 , f ( x‬ﻭ ‪ h ( x ) = 25 − x 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪g (−7) , f (6‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬
‫‪x −3‬‬
‫ﻭ )‪ f (0) + g (4) − h(−3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g( x ) = x + 40 − 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ g(0) , g(4) , g(5) , g(12‬ﻭ )‪ g (−2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 6‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 2 + xy = 1‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ؟‬
‫‪76‬‬
 ‫ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﻦ ﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬ ‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺎ‬
‫‪t‬ﻛ ﺍ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪،‬‬
‫‪x−4‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g ( x) = 3 x‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ x = −4‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6x‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪h(x) = x 2 − 7x‬‬ ‫= )‪Κ (x‬‬
‫‪x −3‬‬ ‫‪x2 − 9‬‬
‫‪g( x ) = x‬‬ ‫‪R ( x ) = 3x + 12‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ) ‪ f ( x‬ﺩﺭ ‪ x = 3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 3‬ﭼﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x −3‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 3‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫}‪Dom f = {x ∈ IR / x ≠ 3‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g ( x) = x‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ )‪(Real number‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ x ≥ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ }‪ Dom g = {x ∈ IR / x ≥ 0‬ﻳﺎ )∞ ‪dom g = [0 ,‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﺭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ h( x) = x 2 − 7 x‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ h(x‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ‪ ) :‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ( )∞ ‪Dom h = IR = (−∞ ,‬‬
‫‪6x‬‬ ‫‪6x‬‬
‫= ) ‪ k ( x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ k ( x) = 2‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪( x − 3)(x + 3‬‬ ‫‪x −9‬‬
‫}‪Dom k ( x) = {x ∈ IR / x ≠ 3 , x ≠ −3‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﺭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ R ( x ) = 3x + 12‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 3x + 12 ≥ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪ x ≥ −4‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)∞ ‪Dom R = {x ∈ IR / x ≥ −4} = [−4,‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪5x‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = x 2 + 3x − 17 ,‬‬ ‫= ) ‪g( x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪h ( x ) = 9 x − 27‬‬
‫‪x 2 − 49‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x − 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x −3≥ 0‬‬ ‫‪⇒ x≥3‬‬
‫)∞ ‪Dom y = {x ∈ IR / x ≥ 3} = [3 ,‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x − 2‬‬ ‫)∞ ‪ [2 , +‬ﻳﺎ }‪Dom f = {x / x ≥ 2‬‬
‫‪2x + 3‬‬
‫= )‪g ( x‬‬ ‫)∞ ‪ (−∞ , 4) U (4 , +‬ﻳﺎ }‪dom g = IR − {4‬‬
‫‪x−4‬‬
‫}‪dom g = {x ∈ IR / x ≠ 4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪h ( x ) = x 2 − 2x − 3‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫)∞ ‪ (−∞ , − 1] U [3 ,‬ﻳﺎ } ‪ x ≥ 3‬ﻳﺎ‪Dom h = {x / x ≤ −1‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫)‪(Graph of a function and vertical line test‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ t‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ f(x‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f(x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺖ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ))‪( x, f ( x‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ)‪ y= f(x‬ﺻﺪﻕ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ YX‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ‬
‫}) ‪ { (x , y ) / y = f ( x‬ﻛﻪ )‪ x ∈ dom f (x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪79‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = f ( x) = 2 x + 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪input‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ‪output‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫) ‪2x + 1 y = f ( x‬‬ ‫)‪( x , y‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2(0) + 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫)‪(0,1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2(2) + 1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫)‪(2,5‬‬
‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪2(−2) + 1‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬ ‫)‪(−2,−3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 + 1‬ﻭ ‪ y = −1‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x 2 + 1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪− 3 − 2 −1 0 1 2 3‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) 10 5‬‬ ‫‪2 1 2 5 10‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(−3 ,10) , (−2 , 5) , (−1 , 2) , (0 ,1) , (1, 2) , (2 , 5) , (3 , 10‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (−3) = (−3) 2 + 1 = 9 + 1 = 10‬‬
‫‪f (−2) = (−2) 2 + 1 = 4 + 1 = 5‬‬
‫‪f (−1) = (−1) 2 + 1 = 1 + 1 = 2‬‬
‫‪f ( 0) = 0 2 + 1 = 0 + 1 = 1‬‬
‫‪f (1) = 12 + 1 = 2‬‬
‫‪f (2) = 2 2 + 1 = 5‬‬
‫‪f (3) = 32 + 1 = 10‬‬
‫)∞‪Dom f = (−∞,+‬‬
‫)∞‪Rang f = [1,+‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
 ‫‪f ( x ) = −1‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ‪In put Out put‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫)‪y = f (x‬‬ ‫)‪( x , y‬‬
‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫)‪(−2 , − 1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫)‪(0 , − 1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫)‪(3 , − 1‬‬
‫‪Dom y = IR‬‬
‫‪Range y = −1‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = f ( x) = x 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x 3‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪2 1 0 −1 − 2‬‬
‫‪y = f (x) 8 1 0 − 1 − 8‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ( y‬ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪ b :‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ(‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﻚ ‪ x‬ﺩﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﻳﺎ)‪ f(x‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻯ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ XY‬ﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ S‬ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ }) ‪ S = {( x, y) | y = f ( x‬ﻭ ‪ x‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻯ ﺑﺑﺎ ﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ‬
‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺎ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻧﺎ ﻪ‬
‫‪f (x) = x 2 − 9‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪g( x ) = 2x − 5‬‬ ‫‪, h(x) = x 2 − 4‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x + 1‬‬ ‫| ‪g ( x ) =| x − 3‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x−4‬‬
‫‪7x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪f (x) = 2‬‬ ‫= ) ‪g( x‬‬ ‫‪h(x) = 2‬‬
‫‪x − 16‬‬ ‫)‪( x + 3)( x − 7‬‬ ‫‪x + 11x + 24‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬
‫‪x2 + 4‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x) = − x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g ( x) = 2 x − 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪x = −3 , − 2 , − 1 , 0 , 1, 2 , 3 ,‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ x = y 2 − 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪82‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫)‪ (Range‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ f‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ –4‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ –3‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ f‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 6‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ f (−1) = 2‬ﻭ ‪ f (1) = 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ)‪ (– 3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ − 3∉ dom f‬ﻭ ‪ ، 6 ∈ dom f‬ﭘﺲ ]‪dom f = (− 3 , 6‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f , (Range‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﻰ‪ 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫‪ ، − 4 ∉ Range f‬ﭘﺲ ]‪ Range f = (− 4 , 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫)‪( 1‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 1 ≤ x ≤ 6‬ﻭ ‪2 ≤ y ≤ 4‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ 2 ≤ x ≤ 10 :‬ﻳﺎ ]‪Dom = [2 , 10‬‬
‫‪ 1 ≤ y ≤ 8‬ﻳﺎ ]‪Range = [1 , 8‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ f (3) ,‬ﻭ )‪ f (5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪f (−2) t‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ y‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ f (3) = 0 , f (−2) = 0‬ﻭ ‪ f (5) = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪(3 , 0) , (−2 , 0‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
 ‫ﻭ )‪ (5 , 0‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ، y‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ f (0) = 3‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (0 , 3‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ domain‬ﻭ ‪ Range‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ f (3) .‬ﻭ)‪ f (6‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ‪ – 3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ – 3‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ (− 3 , 6].‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Domain f ( x) = −3 < x ≤ 6‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ [− 5 , 4 ) :‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Range f ( x ) = −5 ≤ y < 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪f (6) = −3 .‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ f (3) = −5‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪85‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ (a‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ (b‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ (c‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪X‬‬
‫‪ (d‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻌﻰ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍﭼﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪87‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(Constant function‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f : x → y‬ﻳﺎ ‪ f ( x ) = y‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ y‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪ (c‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ‪ y = f ( x ) = C‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ f ( x ) = −2 , f ( x ) = −3 , f ( x ) = 2 :‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = 2‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x ) = −2‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪f (x) = 2‬‬ ‫‪f ( x ) = −2‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪−1 − 2‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬ ‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪1 2 3 −1‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬
‫‪f (x) = 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪f (x) = − 2 − 2 − 2 − 2‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ )‪:(Identity function‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ‪ f ( x) = x‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x‬‬
‫‪x = 0 1 2 − 1 − 2 ...‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 0 1 2 − 1 − 2 ...‬‬
‫‪88‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﻪ )‪(Absolute value function‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﻪ | ‪ f ( x) =| x‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪⎧ x , x≥0‬‬
‫⎨ = )‪f ( x‬‬
‫‪⎩− x , x < 0‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ | ‪ f ( x) =| x‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫| ‪f ( x ) =| x‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 2 3 −1 − 2 − 3‬‬
‫‪f (x) = 0 1 2 3 1 2 3‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ∞ ‪ [0 ,‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻳﻰ )‪ (Piecewise function‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪⎧2 x + 3: x < 4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪f (x) = ⎨ 2‬‬
‫‪⎩x − 1 : 4 ≤ x ≤ 10‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ f (8) , f (−5‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ – 5 < 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪f (−5) = 2(−5) + 3 = −10 + 3 = −7‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 8‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،4 < 8 < 10‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪f (8) = 82 − 1 = 64 − 1 = 63‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ f‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ) ‪ (−∞ , 4‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ]‪ [4 , 10‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪89‬‬
 ‫ﭘﺲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ]‪ (− ∞ , 10‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪⎧ 11‬‬
‫⇐ ‪− x + 15‬‬‫‪: 0 ≤ x < 60‬‬
‫‪⎪⎪ 60‬‬
‫= ) ‪g( x‬‬ ‫⎨‬
‫⇐ ‪⎪ 1 x −8‬‬‫‪: 60 ≤ x ≤ 90‬‬
‫‪⎩⎪ 5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﻪ ‪ g(80) = 8‬ﻭ ‪ g(30) = 9.5‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻳﻰ ) ‪( Graph of function defined piecewise‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪⎧x : 0 ≤ x ≤ 1‬‬
‫⎨ = )‪f (x‬‬
‫‪⎩x − 1: 1 < x ≤ 2‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ]‪ [0,1‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ]‪ (1,2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ f (x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [0,2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪90‬‬
 ‫‪y = f (x) = x‬‬ ‫‪y = f ( x) = x − 1‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 0.5 0.8 1‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪1,1 1, 5 1, 8‬‬
‫‪y = f(x) 0 0.5 0.8 1‬‬ ‫)‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪0 ,1 0 , 5 0 , 8‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫⇐ ‪⎧x‬‬
‫‪: 0≤x≤4‬‬
‫⎨ = ) ‪ f ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ f (0) , f (−2) , f (2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫⇐ ‪⎩x − 1‬‬
‫‪: 0 < x < −4‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫⇐ ‪⎧x − 1‬‬ ‫‪: x<0‬‬
‫⎨ = )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪⎩ x + 1 ⇐: x > 0 .‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪1 2 4 −1 − 2 − 3 − 4‬‬
‫‪f ( x) 2 3 5 − 2 − 3 − 4 − 5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ( x ≠ 0) .‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫)∞ ‪ Dom f ( x ) = (−∞ , 0) U (0 ,‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ (Range‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫)∞ ‪ (−∞ , − 1) U (1,‬ﻳﺎ ‪ y > 1‬ﻭ ‪y < −1‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ)‪ :(sign function‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ)‪ sgn(x‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪91‬‬
 ‫‪⎧ 1 ⇐: x > 0‬‬
‫‪ sgn( x ) = ⎨⎪ 0 ⇐: x = 0‬ﻧﺎ ﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫⎪‬
‫⇐ ‪⎩− 1‬‬
‫‪: x<0‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ) ‪ ( Range‬ﺁﻥ } ‪ {− 1 , 0 , 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Domsgn = IR‬‬ ‫}‪Rangesgn = {− 1 , 0 ,1‬‬
‫‪ f ( x) = c‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ f ( x ) = x ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﻭ | ‪ f ( x) =| x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪⎧1 ⇐: x > 0‬‬
‫‪⎪ :‬‬
‫⇐ ‪f : IR → IR , Sgn( x) = ⎨0‬‬ ‫‪x=0‬‬
‫⎪‬
‫⇐ ‪⎩− 1‬‬‫‪: x<0‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ }‪ {− 1, 0 ,1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ) ‪ g ( x‬ﻭ ‪ h( x) = 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 1‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪، f ( x ) = −5‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ – 2‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) =| x | −3‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪⎧− x : x < 0‬‬
‫⎨ = ) ‪ f ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ f (−2 , 3) ، f (0) .‬ﻭ ) ‪ f (16‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪⎩ x:x ≥ 0‬‬
‫‪⎧x + 1: − 1 ≤ x < 0‬‬
‫⎨ = ) ‪ h ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) ‪ h ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪⎩− x + 1: 0 ≤ x ≤ 1‬‬
‫‪92‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬
‫‪(Increasing and decreasing‬‬
‫)‪functions‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬
‫‪ – 1‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x1 < x2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ) ‪f ( x1 ) < f ( x2‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x < x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ) ‪f ( x ) > f ( x‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 3‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x1 < x2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ) ‪ f ( x1 ) = f ( x2‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x) = − x 2‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 −1 2 − 2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 −1 2 − 2‬‬
‫‪f ( x) = x 2 0 1 1 4 4‬‬ ‫‪f (x) = −x 2 0 − 1 − 1 − 4 − 4‬‬
‫‪93‬‬
 ‫‪−1 < 2‬‬ ‫‪−1 < 2‬‬
‫)‪f (−1) < f (2‬‬ ‫)‪f (−1) > f (2‬‬
‫‪1< 4‬‬ ‫‪− 1 > −4‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )‪ (−∞ , 0‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )∞ ‪(0 ,‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = − x 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )‪ (−∞ , 0‬ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )∞ ‪(0 ,‬‬
‫ﻰ ﺑﺑﺎﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬
‫ﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺺ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻜﺎﻝ ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻜ‬
‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺩﺩﺭﺭ ﺍﺍﺷﺷ‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭﻃﺎﻕ)‪(Even and odd functions‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ‪ f (− x) = f ( x) :‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ − x‬ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ‪ f (− x) = − f ( x) :‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪x‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ − x‬ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪94‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x‬ﻭ ‪f ( x ) = x 3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ‪ − x‬ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (− x ) = (− x ) 3 = (− x )(− x )(− x ) = − x 3‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 3‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ )‪ f (− x) = − f ( x‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫‪ f ( −2 ) = − f ( 2 ) = −8‬و ‪f ( x) = x 2‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪f (− x ) = (− x ) 2 = (− x )(− x ) = x 2‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫)‪ f (− x) = f ( x‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪f (−2) = f (2) = 4 .‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪Y‬‬
‫ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − 4‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ g ( x) = x 2 + 3x + 2‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪f (− x) = (− x) 2 − 4 = x 2 − 4 = f ( x) :‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫)‪ (3 , 5‬ﻭ )‪ (−3 , 5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 3‬ﻭ ‪x = −3‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪5‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻰ ‪ f (−3) = f (3) = 5‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ‪ x = 2‬ﻭ ‪ x = −2‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g( x ) = (− x ) 2 + 3(− x ) + 2 = x 2 − 3x + 2‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻪ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻃﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ‪ f (−2) = k + 5 :‬ﻭ ‪ f (2) = 2k + 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ f‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪f ( − x ) = −f ( x‬‬
‫)‪f (−2) = −f (2‬‬
‫)‪k + 5 = −(2k + 3‬‬
‫‪k + 5 = −2k − 3‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ(‬
‫‪3k = −8‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪k=−‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ x1 < x2 ، f (x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ) ‪ f ( x1 ) < f ( x2‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ x1 < x2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ) ‪ f ( x1 ) > f ( x2‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻭﻫﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪f (− x) = f ( x‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ f (− x ) = −f ( x‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺑﺎﺷﻨ‬
‫ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻭﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪f ( x) = x 3 + x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪f ( x) = x 2 + x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪f ( x) = x 2 − x 4‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪f ( x) = x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫| ‪f ( x) =| x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪f ( x) = x 4‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪f ( x) = x 5‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
 ‫)‪ (Translation‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ t‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = x 2 + 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪f ( x) = x 2‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ ( x , y‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ )‪ ( x , y − 4‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2 − 4‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2 − 4‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪97‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‬
‫)‪ (Vertical Translation‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ 2‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ c > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ y = f ( x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ c‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = f ( x) + c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ y = f ( x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ c‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = f ( x) − c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ y = x 2 + 2‬ﻭ ‪ y = x 2 − 3‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x 2‬ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ )‪ (2‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ y = x 2 + 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ )‪ ( 3‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x 2 − 3‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪y = x2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪y = x2 + 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪y = x2 − 3 − 3 − 2‬‬ ‫‪1 −2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ‪ y – a ، y‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪a>0‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ | ‪ | a‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ | ‪ | a‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪y = x 2 − 2 , y = x 2 + 2‬‬
‫‪ y = x 2 + 4‬ﻭ ‪ y = x 2 − 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪y = x2‬‬ ‫‪y = x2 + 2 y = x + 4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪y = x2 − 2 y = x − 4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−4‬‬
‫‪±1 1‬‬ ‫‪±1 3‬‬ ‫‪±1 5‬‬ ‫‪±1‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪±1 − 3‬‬
‫‪±2 4‬‬ ‫‪±2 6‬‬ ‫‪±2 8‬‬ ‫‪±2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪±2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ‪( Horizontal Translation) :‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ‪ x – b ، x‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ b‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ | ‪ | b‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ b < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2‬ﮔﺮﺍ ﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ y = ( x + 2) 2‬ﻭ ‪ y = ( x − 3) 2‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪99‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = ( x + 2) 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫‪ y = x 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪y = ( x − 3) 2‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪− 2 0 −1 − 3 − 4‬‬ ‫‪....‬‬
‫‪y = ( x + 2) 2 0 4 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪....‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪3 4 2 5 1‬‬ ‫‪....‬‬
‫‪y = ( x − 3) 2‬‬ ‫‪0 1 1 4 4‬‬ ‫‪....‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ | ‪ f ( x) =| x‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ | ‪ g ( x) =| x + 2‬ﻭ | ‪ h( x) =| x − 3‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ‬
‫)‪(Combining Horizontal and Vertical shifts‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ g( x ) = ( x + 1) 2‬ﻭ ‪ h( x) = ( x + 1) 2 − 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (2 , 4) , (0 , 0‬ﻭ )‪ (−2 , 4‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g ( x) = ( x + 1) 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪f ( x) = x 2‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (1‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ f ( x) = ( x + 1) 2 − 3‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x 2‬‬ ‫‪g ( x ) = ( x + 1) 2‬‬ ‫‪f ( x ) = ( x + 1) 2 − 3‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 2 −2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪−1 1 − 3‬‬ ‫‪x 1 − 3 −1‬‬
‫‪f (x) 0 4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪f (x) 0 4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪f (x) 1 1‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ | ‪ y =| x‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y =| x + 3 | +2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 −1 − 2 − 3 3 2‬‬
‫| ‪y =| x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3 3 2‬‬
‫‪y =| x + 3 | +2 5 6 4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2 8 7‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )‪ (2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ (‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ c‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﺍ ً ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = f ( x) + c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﺍ ً ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = f ( x) − c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ c‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f ( x + c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f ( x − c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x 2‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪g ( x) = x 2 − 2 , g ( x) = ( x − 2) 2 , g ( x) = x 2 − 1 , g ( x) = ( x − 2) 2 + 1‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ f ( x ) = x + 2‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x ) = x + 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ | ‪ f ( x) =| x‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ g( x ) =| x + 4 | , g( x ) =| x | +4‬ﻭ ‪ h ( x ) = x − 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪، f ( x) = x3‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ g ( x) = x3 − 3‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ g ( x) = ( x − 3) 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪102‬‬
 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
g ( x ) = 2 x + 11 ‫ ﻭ‬f ( x) = x + 2 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫( ﺭﺍ‬f − g ) ( x ) ‫( ﻭ‬f + g)( x ) .‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
(f + g )( x ) = f ( x ) + g ( x ) (f − g )( x ) = f ( x ) − g ( x )
f f (x)
(f ⋅ g )( x ) = f ( x ) . g ( x ) ( )( x ) = (g( x ) ≠ 0)
g g( x )
dom (f + g )( x ) = dom f I dom g
dom (f − g )( x ) = dom f I dom g
dom (f ⋅ g )( x ) = dom f I dom g
f
dom ( )( x ) = dom f I dom g − { x / g ( x ) = 0 }
g
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ‬f + g)( x ) ،‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬g ( x) = x 2 − 4 ‫ ﻭ‬f ( x) = 2 x + 1 ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
.‫( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬f + g)( x ) ‫ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
(f + g )( x ) = f ( x ) + g ( x )
(f + g )( x ) = (2 x + 1) + ( x 2 − 4) = 2 x − 3 + x 2 = x 2 + 2 x − 3
dom g = IR ‫ ﻭ‬dom f = IR
dom(f + g )( x ) = IR I IR = IR
(f + g )(3) ‫( ﻭ‬f + g )(x ) .‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬g ( x) = 4 x + 5 ‫ ﻭ‬f ( x) = x 2 − 3 ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
.‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
103
 ‫ﺣﻞ‬
(f + g )( x ) = ( x 2 − 3) + (4 x + 5) = x 2 + 4 x + 2
(f + g )(3) = 32 + 4(3) + 2 = 9 + 12 + 2 = 23
dom g = IR ‫ ﻭ‬dom f = IR
dom(f + g )( x ) = IR I IR = IR
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫( ﺭﺍ‬f + g )( 4) ‫( ﻭ‬f + g)( x ) ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬g ( x) = 2 x + 7 ‫ ﻭ‬f ( x ) = 3x 2 + 4x − 1 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
.‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬g ( x) = x 2 + x − 2 ‫ ﻭ‬f ( x) = 2 x − 1 ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ‬f )( x ) ‫( ﻭ‬f ⋅ g)( x ) (f − g)( x )
g ،
.‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
(f − g ) x = (2 x − 1) − ( x 2 + x − 2) = 2 x − 1 − x 2 − x + 2 = − x 2 + x + 1
dom(f − g )( x ) = IR I IR = IR
(f ⋅ g ) x = (2 x − 1)( x 2 + x − 2) = 2 x 3 + x 2 − 5x + 2
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬dom g = IR ‫ ﻭ‬dom f = IR ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
dom(f ⋅ g )( x ) = IR I IR = IR
f 2x − 1 2x − 1
( )x = =
g x 2 + x − 2 ( x + 2)( x − 1) f
f dom( )( x ) = IR I IR − {x / g ( x ) = 0}
dom( ) x = {x / x ≠ −2 ‫ ﻭ‬x ≠ 1 } g
g
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
f
‫( ﺭﺍ‬f − g)( x ) ‫( ﻭ‬f ⋅ g)( x ) ( )(x ) ،‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬g ( x) = x 2 − 1 ‫ ﻭ‬f ( x) = x − 5 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
g .‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
104
 .‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬g ( x) = x − 1 ‫ ﻭ‬f ( x) = x + 3 ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬f
( )( x ) ‫( ﻭ‬f ⋅ g)( x ) ، (f − g)(x )
g :‫ﺣﻞ‬
( f − g ) ( x) = f ( x) − g ( x) = x + 3 − ( x − 1) = x + 3 − x + 1 = 4
( f ⋅ g ) ( x) = f ( x) ⋅ g ( x) = ( x + 3)( x − 1) = x 2 + 2 x − 3
‫ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬x) ‫ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬f (x) ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
dom g = IR ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬dom f = IR ‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ( ﻳﺎ‬
f f (x) x + 3
( )( x ) = = x ≠1
g g( x ) x − 1
f dom (f − g )( x ) = IR I IR = IR
dom( )( x ) = IR − {}
1
g dom(f ⋅ g ) ( x ) = IR I IR = IR
f ‫ﻳﺎ‬
dom( )( x ) = {x ∈ IR / x ≠ 1}
g
f
dom( )( x ) = (−∞ , 1) U (1, ∞) ‫ﻳﺎ‬
g
‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬g ( x) = 3 + x ‫ ﻭ‬f ( x) = 4 − x ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬
f
.‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬f ⋅g f −g , f +g
g
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
(f + g )( x ) = f ( x ) + g ( x ) = 4 − x + 3 + x
(f − g )( x ) = f ( x ) − g ( x ) = 4 − x − 3 + x
(f ⋅ g )( x ) = f ( x ) ⋅ g ( x ) = ( 4 − x ) ( 3 + x ) = (4 − x )(3 + x )
= 12 + x − x 2
f f (x) 4−x 4−x
( )( x ) = = =
g g( x ) 3+ x 3+ x
dom f : {4 − x ≥ 0 , x ≤ 4} ‫( ﻳﺎ‬−∞ , 4]
105
 ‫ﻳﺎ }‪dom g : {x / 3 + x ≥ 0 , x ≥ −3‬‬ ‫) ∞ ‪[− 3 ,‬‬
‫]‪(−∞,4] I [−3, ∞) = [−3,4‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ]‪ [−3 , 4‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f − g , f + g‬ﻭ ‪ f ⋅ g‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬
‫) ‪ dom( )(x‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ g (−3) = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ‪ Dom = (− 3 , 4] :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ c‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪(c f )( x ) = c ⋅ f ( x‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x ) = x 3 − x + 2‬ﻭ ‪ c = 5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(5 f )( x ) = 5 ⋅ f ( x ) = 5( x 3 − x + 2) = 5x 3 − 5x + 10‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﺯﻳﺮ ﺍ‬
‫ﺗ ﺍ‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪ (f ⋅ g)( x ) , (f − g)( x ) , (f + g)( x ) - 1‬ﻭ ) ‪ ( )(x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a : f ( x) = 2 x + 3‬‬ ‫‪, g ( x) = x − 1 , b : f ( x) = x − 5 , g ( x) = 3 x 2‬‬
‫‪c : f ( x) = 2 x 2 − x − 3 , g ( x) = x + 1 , d : f ( x) = x , g ( x) = x − 5‬‬
‫‪e : f ( x) = x + 4‬‬ ‫‪, g ( x) = x − 1 , f : f ( x) = 3 x , g ( x) = x 2 − 1‬‬
‫‪106‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫‪composition of functions‬‬
‫‪or composite functions‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − 2‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x + 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ( f o g ) ( x) .‬ﻭ ) ‪ (g o f ) ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ) ‪ (f o g)( x ) = (g o f ) ( x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (f o f ) ( x ) t‬ﻭ ) ‪ (g o g) ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ g‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ‪ x‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ f‬ﺑﺎ ‪ g‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪ ( f o g‬ﻳﺎ ) )‪ f (g (x‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫])‪ ( f o g ) ( x) = f (g ( x) ) = f [g ( x‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) ‪ ( f o g ) ( x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ x‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ g‬ﻭ )‪ g (x‬ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ f‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪Dom (fog ) x = {x ∈ IR / x ∈ dom g , g ( x ) ∈ dom f } : (f o g‬‬
‫‪ x − 1‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ g‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ )‪ g (x‬ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ f‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ (f o g)(x‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ‬
‫) ‪ x ، (input‬ﻭ )‪(out put‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ g( x‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ)‪ (input‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫) ‪ g( x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ )‪ (Out put‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ (fog )(x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ g (x‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪ f‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ) ‪ ( f‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪107‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − 1‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = 3x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ (f o g) ( x ) .‬ﻭ ) ‪ (g o f ) ( x‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(f o g )( x ) = f (g ( x ) ) = f (3x ) = (3x ) 2 − 1 = 9 x 2 − 1‬‬
‫‪(g o f )( x ) = g ((f ( x ) ) = g ( x 2 − 1) = 3( x 2 − 1) = 3x 2 − 3‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪(f o g ) ( x ) ≠ (g o f ) ( x‬‬
‫‪9 x 2 − 1 ≠ 3x 2 − 3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = 3 x − 4‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x 2 + 6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ (f o g )( x‬ﻭ ) ‪(g o f )(x‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﺭ ) ‪ (fog)(x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ g (x‬ﻋﻮﺽ )‪ (Domain‬ﻳﺎ ‪ x‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (g ( x ) ) = f ( x 2 + 6 ) = 3( x 2 + 6) − 4 = 3x 2 + 18 − 4 = 3x 2 + 14‬‬
‫‪g(f ( x ) ) = (g o f ) ( x ) = g (3x − 4) = (3x − 4) 2 + 6 = 9 x 2 − 24 x + 22‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) ‪ (f o g) ( x‬ﻭ ) ‪ (g o f )(x‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x + 6‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x − 6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ) ‪(f o g )( x ) = (g o f )( x‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g ( x) = 1 − x‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x) = x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f o g‬ﻭ ‪ g o f‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ f o g‬ﻭ ‪ gof‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ f‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‪ [0 , ∞ ) :‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫)∞ ‪ (−∞,‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)∞ ‪Domf = [0,‬‬ ‫)∞ ‪Domg = (−∞,‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫} ‪D om(f o g ) = {x / x ∈ domg , g ( x ) ∈ dom f‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪108‬‬
‫]‪Dom (fog ) = {x / x ∈ IR ,1 − x ≥ 0} , − x ≥ −1 ⇒ x ≤ 1 = (−∞,1‬‬
‫) ∞ ‪Dom (g o f ) = {x / ∈ dom f , f ( x )∈dom g} = {x / x ≥ 0 , x ∈ IR} = [0 ,‬‬
‫‪(f o g ) ( x ) = f (1 − x ) = 1 − x‬‬
‫‪(g o f )(x ) = g ( x ) = 1 − x‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻭﺿﺎﺣﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ h( x) = 3x 2 + 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ h(x‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ h(x‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ (g o f )(x‬ﻭ )‪ ( Jok )( x‬ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ‪ f ( x) = 3x 2 + 1 :‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(g o f )( x ) = g (f ( x ) ) = g (3x 2 + 1) = 3x 2 + 1‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ h(x‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ (jok)(x‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ‪ j ( x) = x + 1 :‬ﻭ ‪ k ( x) = 3x 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪( j o k )( x ) = j(k ( x ) ) = j(3x 2 ) = 3x 2 + 1‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫= ) ‪ (x ≠ −2 ), f ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪x+2‬‬
‫) ) ‪ (f o f )(2) , f (f ( x‬ﻭ ) ‪ (f o f o f )(x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬
‫= ‪(f o f )( x ) = x + 2 = x + 2‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫⋅‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x + 2x + 4 x + 2 3x + 4 3x + 4‬‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x+2‬‬
‫‪109‬‬
 ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2 1‬‬
‫? = )‪(f o f )(2‬‬ ‫= ) ‪(f o f ) ( x‬‬ ‫= )‪⇒ (f o f )(2‬‬ ‫= =‬
‫‪3x + 4‬‬ ‫‪3 ⋅ 2 + 4 10 5‬‬
‫= ) ‪(f o f o f )( x‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫⋅‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪3x‬‬ ‫‪3x + 4 x + 8 x + 2 7 x + 8 7 x + 8‬‬
‫(‪3‬‬ ‫‪)+4‬‬ ‫‪+4‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x+2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − 2‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x + 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪، (g o f )( x ) , (f o g )( x‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﮔ‬
‫)‪ (g o f )(−2‬ﻭ )‪ (f o g)(3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = −3x + 2‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﮔ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫) ‪(f + g )(x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫) ‪(f − g )(x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫) ‪(g − f )(x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪(f ⋅ g )(x ) ,‬‬
‫) ‪( )(x‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 − 3‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x − 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ ( )( x ) , (f ⋅ g)( x‬ﻭ ) ‪( )( x‬‬
‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 + 1‬ﻭ = )‪ h( x) = 4 − x 2 , g ( x‬ﻭ ‪k ( x) = 3 x + 4‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪h‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ) ‪ (h ⋅ k )( x ) , ( )( x ) , (f ⋅ g)( x‬ﻭ ) ‪ ( )(x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g ( x) = x 2 , f ( x) = 3x − 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ (g o f )(3‬ﻭ )‪ (f o g )(1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = 2 − x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ g o f , f o g‬ﻭ ‪ f o f‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ g( x ) = x10‬ﻭ ‪ h( x) = x + 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ (f o g o h )( x‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫= )‪, f (x‬‬ ‫‪ - 6‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪x +1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪110‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬
‫)‪(Inverse Function‬‬
‫ﻓﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ })‪ f = {(1, 2) (3 , 5) (6 ,7‬ﻭ })‪ g = {(2 ,1) (5 , 3) (7 , 6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎﺧﻴﺮ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ (f o g)(x ) = (g o f )(x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺎﻣﻴﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ f = c + 32‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ )‪ (c‬ﺣﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪f = c + 32 ⇒ f − 32 = c + 32 − 32‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5 9‬‬
‫)‪⇒ (f − 32) = ( c‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9 5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫)‪c = (f − 32‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ c‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ) ‪ ( x , y‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‪ ( y , x) :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪111‬‬
 ‫‪ f‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪ Range f −1 = dom f‬ﻭ ‪ domain f −1 = Range f‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫≠ ) ‪(f −1 ( x‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪f (x‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ })‪ f ( x ) = {(1,5)(3,7)(8,−10‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ })‪ f −1 ( x ) = {(5 ,1) (7 , 3) (−10 , 8‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪f (3) = 7‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪(7 ) = 3‬‬
‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪f (1) = 5‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪(5) = 1‬‬
‫‪f (8) = −10‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪(−10) = 8‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ ) ‪ f −1 ( x‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ })‪f ( x) = {(1, 2 ) (3 , 2) (4 , 5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ })‪ f −1 ( x) = {(2 ,1) (2 , 3) (5 , 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ) ‪ f −1 ( x‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 2‬ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ‬
‫)‪ (Range‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ f (2) = 3 .‬ﻭ ‪ f (2) = 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮﻋﻮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ g‬ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬
‫})‪f = {(1, 2 ) , ( − 2 , 3) , ( 3 ,1) , ( 0 , − 1)} g = {(2 , 4) , (3 ,1) , ( 0 , 2) , (5 ,1‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫})‪f −1 = {(2 ,1) , ( 3 , − 2) , (1, 3) , ( − 1, 0‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ f −1‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ‪ f −1‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ })‪g −1 = {(4 , 2) , (1, 3) , ( 2 , 0) , (1, 5‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ g −1‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ، g‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x = 1‬ﺩﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ 3‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪112‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ f‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ)‪( one – to – one function‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x1 ≠ x2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ) ‪f ( x1 ) ≠ f ( x2‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‪a ≠ b ⇒ f (a ) ≠ f (b) :‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‪a = b ⇒ f (a ) = f (b) :‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x ) = −4x + 12‬ﻭ ‪ g( x ) = 25 − x 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a ≠ b‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ − 4a + 12 ≠ −4b + 12 .‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (2) = −4(2) + 12 = −8 + 12 = 4‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪f (3) = −4(3) + 12 = −12 + 12 = 0‬‬
‫) ‪a ≠ b ⇒ f (a ) ≠ f ( b‬‬
‫‪2 ≠ 3 ⇒ −4 ≠ 0‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ‪g ( x ) = 25 − x 2‬‬
‫‪g (3) = 25 − 9 = 16 = 4‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪g (−3) = 25 − 9 = 16 = 4‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = −3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ f (3) = f (−3‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪3 ≠ −3‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ g (x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x ) = 3x + 8‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪113‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ‪ x‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ‪ y‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪g،‬‬
‫‪ y‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ‪ x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪(f o g )( x ) = x‬‬
‫‪(g o f )( x ) = x‬‬
‫‪(f o g )( x ) = (g o f )( x ) = x‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = 3x + 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻳﺎ )‪ f −1 ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪y = f ( x ) = 3x + 2‬‬
‫‪x = 3y + 2‬‬
‫‪3y = x − 2‬‬
‫‪114‬‬
 ‫‪x−2‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪x−2 1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ) ‪f −1 ( x‬‬ ‫‪= x−‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪f (f −1 ( x )) = f −1 (f ( x )) = x‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪x−2‬‬
‫= ) ‪g( x‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ f −1 ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ (f o g)( x ) = (g o f )( x ) = x‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x−2‬‬
‫(‪(f o g )( x ) = 3‬‬ ‫‪)+2 = x−2+2 = x‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3x + 2 − 2 3x‬‬
‫= ) ‪(g o f )( x‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=x‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫(‬ ‫)‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ f −1 ( f ( x) ) = x‬ﻭ ‪f f −1 ( x) = x‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = x 3 + 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ f −1 ( x‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g ( x) = x 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ g −1 ( x‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪y = x3 +1‬‬
‫‪x = y3 + 1‬‬ ‫‪⇒ y 3 = x − 1⇒ y = 3 x − 1‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ )‪ f −1 ( x‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪f −1 ( x ) = 3 x − 1‬‬
‫‪g(x ) = x 2 ⇒ y = x 2 ⇒ x = y‬‬
‫‪ g −1 ( x) = ± x‬ﻳﺎ ‪y = ± x‬‬
‫‪115‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ )‪ g −1 ( x‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = 2‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ x = −2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ g (−2) = 4‬ﻭ ‪ g (2) = 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ) ‪ g( x‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = 5 x − 2‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ y = 5 x − 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ‪x = 5 y − 2 ⇒ 5 y = x + 2‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x+2‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫= ) ‪f −1 ( x‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪= 5 x − 2 ⇒ 24 x = 12 ⇒ x‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪ x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = 7 x − 2‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = x +‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪(f o g )( x ) = f (g ( x )) = f ( x + ) = 7( x + ) − 2 = x‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= )‪(g o f )( x ) = f (g ( x )) = g (7 x − 2‬‬‫‪(7 x − 2) + = x‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ) ‪ f ( x‬ﻭ )‪ g (x‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ) ‪ (f ( x ) = x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪2x +1‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ f −1 ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪(f o f −1 )(x ) = x‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪x−2‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ )‪ f (x‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ )) ‪ (f −1 ( x‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ (a , b‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ )‪ f (x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ (b , a‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f −1 ( x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (a , b‬ﻭ )‪ (b , a‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = x‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = 3x − 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ f −1 ( x) = x +‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = x‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪y=x‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 2‬‬
‫‪f ( x) − 2 1 4‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪−2 1 4‬‬
‫‪f −1 ( x) 0 1 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ y = x‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ f (x‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫)‪(4 , 2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ )‪ (−1, 0) , (−3 , − 2‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ )‪ f −1 ( x‬ﻭ )‪ f (x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪y = x‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ) ‪ f ( x‬ﻭ‬
‫) ‪ f −1 ( x‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ y=x‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪117‬‬
 ‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪) x‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ( ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )‪ y = f (x‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x‬ﺣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﻭ ‪y‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ x‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ )‪ y = f −1 ( x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )‪ f (x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )‪ f (x‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = x‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ dom f ( x) = Range f −1 ( x‬ﻭ )‪ Range f ( x) = dom f −1 ( x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫})‪f = {(−1,0), (−2,1), (4,3), (3,4)} , h = {(1,4), (2,3), (4,1‬‬
‫})‪g = {(1,2), (2,3), (3,2), (4,1)}, k = {(3,0), (2,−1), (1,2), (0,1), (−1,2‬‬
‫‪ – 2‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺻﺤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪f (f −1 ( x ) = x‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x + 3‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪f ( x ) = 2x‬‬ ‫‪, f ( x ) = 2x + 3‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x 3 + 2‬‬ ‫= ) ‪f ( x ) = ( x + 2) 3 , f ( x‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ – 3‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪) x‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7 − 2x‬‬
‫= )‪f ( x) = 1 − x 2 , g ( x‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ – 4‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪y = 4 x − 5 , y = 6 − x , y = ( x − 2) 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪y=9 ,‬‬ ‫=‪y‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬
‫‪118‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻰ ﻣﻴﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻄﻰ )‪ (Linear function‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻄﻰ( ‪ f ( x ) = ax + b‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ a ≠ 0‬ﻭ ‪a , b‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ f ( x ) = 2x , f ( x ) = x − 1 , f ( x ) = 3x + 4 :‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x) = x‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = x − 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫)‪ (4,0‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (0 , − 3‬ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x − 3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻄﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪x= 8 4 0‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (x) 3 0 − 3‬‬
‫‪119‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = f ( x) = x + 1‬ﻭ ‪ y = x − 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻄﻰ ‪ f ( x) = x + 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪(x = 0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫= )‪f (0‬‬ ‫‪(0) + 2 = 2‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (0,2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﻳﺎ)‪ f(x‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ ( f ( x) = 0‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫=‪0‬‬ ‫‪x + 2 ⇒ x = −3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (−3 , 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (0 , 2‬ﻭ )‪ (−3 , 0‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻭﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 3 − 3 6 − 6 ...‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 2 4 0 6 − 2 ...‬‬
‫‪120‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ )‪ (Quadratic Function‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﭼﻪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﺭﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪k ( x ) = x 2 , h ( x ) = x 2 + 3x , g ( x ) = x 2 + 1, f ( x ) = x 2 + 7 x + 12‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ r ( x) = 2 x − 1‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )‪ (Liner function‬ﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ t‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭼﻰ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﻫﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﭼﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺻﻐﺮﻯ )‪ (Minimum‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻈﻤﻰ )‪ (Maximum‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﺭﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪121‬‬
 ‫‪ f ( x ) = ax 2 + bx + c‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁ ﻥ ‪ b , a‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ‪ a ≠ 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ f ( x) = y = x 2‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ a = 1‬ﻭ ‪ b = c = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ‬
‫‪ x‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﺎ ‪ y‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻻ )‪(parabola‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 0 1 2 −1 − 2‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻰ‬
‫‪y 0 1 4 1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻻ ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪Y‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻻ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ )‪ (Vertex‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻫﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺻﻐﺮﻯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ y = x 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )‪ (−∞,0‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )∞ ‪ (0,‬ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = − x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻫﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ a < 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )‪ (−∞ , 0‬ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ) ∞ ‪(0,‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻋﻈﻤﻰ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 0 1 −1 2 − 2‬‬
‫‪y 0 −1 −1 − 4 − 4‬‬
‫‪122‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x 2 + 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ g( x ) = 2x 2 , f ( x ) = x 2‬ﻭ ‪ h( x) = x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪g ( x) = 2 x 2‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 -1 2 -2‬‬
‫= ) ‪g(x‬‬ ‫‪0 2 2‬‬ ‫‪8 8‬‬
‫‪f ( x) = x 2‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 -1 2 -2‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪0 1 1‬‬ ‫‪4 4‬‬
‫‪1 2‬‬
‫= ) ‪h( x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1 -1 2 -2‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬
‫= )‪h(x‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = x − 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪x 0‬‬ ‫‪1 −1 2 − 2 3 − 3‬‬
‫‪y −4 −3 −3 0 0 5 5‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = ( x − 4) 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ‪ y‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪123‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪x 4 5 3 6 2 ...‬‬
‫‪y 0 1 1 4 4 ...‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )‪(−∞ , 4‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )∞ ‪ (4 ,‬ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x=4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (4 ,0‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ x = 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = −( x + 3) 2 + 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = x 2‬ﺳﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪ (−3 ,1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻋﻈﻤﻰ( ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ‪ x = −3‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪x − 3 − 2 − 4 − 5 −1‬‬
‫‪y 1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0 −3 −3‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ y = 3x 2‬ﻭ ‪ y = −3x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ :Y‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ )ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪X‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪y = ax 2 + bx + c‬‬
‫‪124‬‬
 ‫‪ x=0‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ y=c‬ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺩﺭﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫‪ y=0‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪y = ax 2 + bx + c‬‬
‫‪0 = ax 2 + bx + c‬‬
‫‪ax 2 + bx + c = 0‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ x = − b ± b − 4ac‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2a‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪b 2 − 4ac ≥ 0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b 2 − 4ac < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪(a ≠ 0) y = ax 2 + bx + c‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ b 2 − 4ac > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ b 2 − 4ac = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ b 2 − 4ac < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪y = ax 2 + bx + c = a ( x 2 + x ) + c‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫⎡‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫⎤ ‪b‬‬ ‫⎡‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫⎤ ‪b2‬‬
‫‪y = a ⎢( x 2 + x + ( ) 2 − ( ) 2 ⎥ + c = a ⎢( x + ) 2 − 2 ⎥ + c‬‬
‫⎣‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪2a‬‬ ‫⎦ ‪2a‬‬ ‫⎣‬ ‫‪2a‬‬ ‫⎦ ‪4a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬
‫‪= a (x + )2 − a ( 2 ) + c = a (x + )2 −‬‬ ‫‪+c‬‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪4a‬‬ ‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪4a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪4ac − b 2‬‬
‫‪y = a (x + )2 +‬‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪4a‬‬
‫‪f (x) = a (x − h)2‬‬ ‫‪+k‬‬
‫‪125‬‬
 ‫‪b 4ac − b 2‬‬
‫‪ (− ,‬ﻭﻳﺎ ) ‪ ( h , k‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؛‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ )‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪4a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪x=−‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫‪2a‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺻﻐﺮﻯ )‪ (Minimum‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻋﻈﻤﻰ‬
‫)‪ (Maximum‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = 2x 2 + 4x + 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ b = 4 , a = 2‬ﻭ ‪c = 5‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ = b 2 − 4ac = 4 2 − 4 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 5 = −24 < 0‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ‪ Δ < 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ x = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = ax 2 + bx + c‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ x = 0‬ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ y = c‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ) ‪( 0 , c‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f (0) = 2 ⋅ 02 + 4 ⋅ 0 + 5 = 5‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ) ‪ ( 0 , 5‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 3‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪−4‬‬
‫‪x=−‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= −1‬‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪2⋅2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4ac − b 2 4 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 5 − 4 2 40 − 16 24‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=3‬‬
‫‪4a‬‬ ‫‪4⋅2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫)‪ (-1 , 3‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻻ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺻﻐﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ a > 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 4‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 2x 2 + 4x + 5‬‬ ‫‪b −4‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪−1 − 2 0 1 − 3‬‬ ‫‪x=−‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= −1‬‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪f (x) = 3‬‬ ‫‪5 5 11 11‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ x = −1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪126‬‬
 ‫ﻏﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = −3x 2 − 2x + 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪y = −3( x 2 + x) + 1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫⎡‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫⎤ ‪1‬‬
‫‪y = −3⎢ x 2 + x + ( ) 2 − ( ) 2 ⎥ + 1‬‬
‫⎣‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫⎦ ‪3‬‬
‫⎡‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫⎤ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫⎡‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1 ⎤ 4‬‬
‫‪y = −3⎢ x 2 + x + ( ) 2 ⎥ − 3(− ) + 1 = − 3⎢ x 2 + x + ( ) 2 ⎥ +‬‬
‫⎣‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫⎦ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫⎣‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3 ⎦ 3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪y = −3( x + ) 2 +‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ x = −‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ x + = 0 ⇒ x = −‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1 4‬‬
‫) ‪ (− ,‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫‪3 3‬‬
‫‪ a < 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻋﻈﻤﻰ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ y − k = a ( x − h) 2‬ﻳﺎ ‪y = a ( x − h) 2 + k‬‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ x = h .‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻭ‬
‫) ‪ (h , k‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (a ≠ 0) ، f ( x ) = ax + b‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻄﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬
‫‪ a ≠ 0 , f ( x) = y = ax 2 + bx + c‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻻ )‪ (parabola‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺻﻐﺮﻯ ﻭ‬
‫‪127‬‬
 ‫‪b 4ac − b 2‬‬
‫‪ (−‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻋﻈﻤﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪4a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪ x = −‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = b 2 − 4ac > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬
‫‪2a‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ h( x) = − x + 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ – 2‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ g ( x) = 2 x + 1‬ﻭ ‪ g ( x) = 2 x − 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ –3‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = x 2 , f ( x) = 3 x 2 , f ( x) = 2 x 2‬ﻭ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ – 4‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = x 2 + 8x + 13‬‬ ‫‪f ( x ) = x 2 − 12x + 30‬‬ ‫‪f ( x ) = 3x 2 − 2 x + 6‬‬
‫‪ – 5‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ g ( x) = ( x + 1) 2 , f ( x) = ( x − 2) 2‬ﻭ ‪ h( x) = ( x − 3) 2‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ f ( x) = x 2‬ﭼﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ – 6‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = − x 2 − 1‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫)‪a : (−1 ,1‬‬ ‫)‪b: (1, − 1‬‬ ‫)‪c: (0 , − 1‬‬ ‫)‪d : (0 , 1‬‬
‫‪ – 7‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = ( x − 1) 2 − 2‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪a : (1 , 1‬‬ ‫)‪b: (−1, 2‬‬ ‫)‪c: (−1, − 2‬‬ ‫)‪d : (1, − 2‬‬
‫‪128‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻰ‬
‫)‪(Rational Functions‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭼﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﺎﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪ t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻣﻰ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪p( x‬‬
‫)‪ f (x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؛ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ )‪p (x‬‬ ‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪( g(x ) ≠ 0)،‬‬
‫)‪g ( x‬‬
‫ﻭ )‪ g (x‬ﭘﻮﻟﻴﻨﻮﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪، x‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪x −1‬‬ ‫‪x3 −1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ) ‪g ( x) = 3 ، g( x‬‬ ‫= )‪, h(x‬‬ ‫= )‪, f (x‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‪:‬‬
‫‪x2 − x − 6‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ P( x) = 2 x 2 − 3‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪129‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪x −1‬‬
‫= )‪ k ( x‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬ ‫ﺁﻳﺎ‬
‫‪x+2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫)‪(Finding Domain of Rational function‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x2 − 9‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x+3‬‬
‫= )‪f ( x‬‬ ‫‪ g ( x) = 2‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫= ) ‪h( x‬‬
‫‪x −3‬‬ ‫‪x −9‬‬ ‫‪x2 + 9‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ‪ x = 3‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭘﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (3‬ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻃﻖ )‪ f (x‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ‪Dom f ( x ) = {x / x ∈ IR , x ≠ 3 }:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ g (x‬ﺑﻪ ‪ x = 3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ x = −3‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ g (x‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫} ‪Dom g ( x ) = {x / x ∈ IR , x ≠ 3 , x ≠ −3‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ h(x‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭘﺲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ h(x‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)∞ ‪ Dom h ( x ) = (−∞ ,‬ﻳﺎ ‪Dom h ( x ) = IR‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 2 − 25‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x +5‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫= ) ‪g( x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫= )‪h(x‬‬
‫‪x −5‬‬ ‫‪x 2 − 25‬‬ ‫‪x 2 + 25‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪130‬‬
 ‫‪x +3‬‬ ‫‪x −3‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫= ) ‪, g( x‬‬
‫‪x−4‬‬ ‫‪x +5‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ f (x‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫}‪dom f ( x ) = IR − {4} = IR \ {4‬‬
‫‪x +3‬‬ ‫‪xy − x = 4 y + 3‬‬
‫= )‪y = f (x‬‬ ‫‪⇒ y( x − 4) = x + 3‬‬
‫‪x−4‬‬ ‫‪( y − 1) x = 4 y + 3‬‬
‫‪4y + 3‬‬
‫= ‪x y − 4y = x + 3 ⇒ x‬‬
‫‪y −1‬‬
‫}‪ IR − {1‬ﻳﺎ }‪Range f ( x ) = IR \ {1‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ ،g(x‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ )‪ (-5‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫}‪ {x ∈ IR / x ≠ −5‬ﻳﺎ }‪dom g ( x ) = IR − {−5‬‬
‫‪x −3‬‬
‫= ‪g( x ) = y‬‬ ‫‪⇒ y( x + 5) = x − 3 ⇒ xy + 5 y = x − 3‬‬
‫‪x +5‬‬
‫‪− 5y − 3‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫}‪ {y ∈ IR / y ≠ 1‬ﻳﺎ }‪Range g ( x ) = IR − {1‬‬
‫‪y −1‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 ,‬‬ ‫‪x +1 ,‬‬ ‫‪4x − 1 ,‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫= )‪h(x‬‬ ‫= )‪k(x‬‬ ‫= )‪r(x‬‬ ‫= ) ‪m( x‬‬
‫‪x3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2−x‬‬ ‫‪3x − 2‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ )‪(Graphing Rational function‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ = )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ x = 0‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭘﺲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪f (x‬‬
‫}‪dom f = IR − {0‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪... − 4‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪−1 −‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4...‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) ... −‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪−1 − 2‬‬ ‫‪−4‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪2 1‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪131‬‬
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ = )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ x=0‬ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ‪ x‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ ( ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ) ‪ ( x → 0 −‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ∞ ‪ −‬ﺗﻘﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ∞‪ f ( x ) → −‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ‪ ( x → 0 +‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ∞ ‪+‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ) ∞ → )‪ ( f (x‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x: a‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪... − 1 − 0.5 − 0.1 − 0.01 − 0.001‬‬ ‫‪x → 0−‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪... − 1‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪− 10‬‬ ‫‪− 100‬‬ ‫‪− 1000‬‬ ‫∞‪f ( x ) → −‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ x: b‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0+ ← x‬‬ ‫‪0.001 0.01 0.1 0.5 1...‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪∞ ← f ( x ) 1000‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1...‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ )‪(Vertical Asymptotes‬‬
‫)‪p( x‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﻛﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺮﻙ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫)‪g ( x‬‬
‫‪ p(a ) ≠ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g(a ) = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ‪ x = a‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x → a‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ∞‪ f ( x ) → +‬ﻳﺎ ∞‪ ، f ( x ) → −‬ﭘﺲ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‬
‫‪ x = a‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ∞ → ) ‪ x → a ⇒ f ( x‬ﭘﺲ ‪ x=a‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ x .‬ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ a‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x = a‬ﺭﺍﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪132‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ a‬ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ ‪ x = 0‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ = )‪f ( x‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪2x‬‬
‫= ) ‪ g( x‬ﻭ‬ ‫= )‪, f (x‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x 2 − 25‬‬ ‫‪x −3‬‬
‫‪x +5‬‬
‫= ) ‪ h ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 2 + 25‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻏﺮﺽ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺁﻥ ﻗﻤﻴﺖ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ؛ ﭘﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫}‪domf ( x ) = {x / x ∈ IR , x ≠ 3‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x=3‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪g( x ) = 2‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬
‫)‪x − 25 ( x − 5)( x + 5‬‬
‫‪x −5 = 0 ⇒ x = 5‬‬
‫‪x + 5 = 0 ⇒ x = −5‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x = 5‬ﻭ ‪ x = −5‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ g (x‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ x = 5‬ﻭ ‪x = −5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ g (x‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫}‪dom g ( x ) = {x / x ∈ IR , x ≠ −5 , x ≠ 5‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ x = 5‬ﻭ ‪ x = −5‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ g (x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x +5‬‬
‫= ) ‪ h ( x‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x 2 + 25‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ )‪( Horizontal Asymptote‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪133‬‬
 ‫ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ b‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ‪ y = b‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ b‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪2x2‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x2 −1‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ∞ → ‪ x‬ﻳﺎ ∞‪ x → −‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ ، f ( x ) → b‬ﭘﺲ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = b‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪f (x‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ∞ →| ‪ | x‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ y → b‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ y = b‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2x‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x −1‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ :X‬ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (X‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪f ( x ) = 0‬‬
‫‪2x‬‬
‫=‪0‬‬ ‫‪⇒ 2x = 0 ⇒ x = 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x −1‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (0,0‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2⋅0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫= )‪ ، f (0‬ﭘﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (0 , 0‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪ – 2‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪= 0 :Y‬‬
‫‪0 −1 −1‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ x − 1 = 0 ⇒ x = 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ = 2‬ﭘﺲ ‪ y = f ( x) = 2‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2x = 2 + 2‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 − 2 −1‬‬ ‫‪2 4‬‬ ‫‪x −1‬‬ ‫‪x −1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪y = f ( x) 0‬‬ ‫‪1 −2 4‬‬ ‫‪ – 5‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪134‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪3x‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x−2‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x−2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‪x = 2 :‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ‪f ( x) = y = 1 :‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ :Y‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ x=0‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ f ( x ) = −1‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪Y‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (0,−1‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ :X‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ f(x)=0‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫‪x+2=0‬‬
‫‪x = −2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (-2,0‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪135‬‬
 ‫‪ - 5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪−1 0‬‬ ‫‪1 3 4 5 −2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪f (x) −‬‬ ‫‪−1 − 3 5 3 2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫)‪(1,-3‬‬
‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪= 1+‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪x−2‬‬ ‫‪x−2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ y= f ( x ) = 1‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‪(slant or Oblique asymptote) :‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪x2 +1‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x −1‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x2 +1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= )‪f ( x‬‬ ‫‪= x +1+‬‬
‫‪x −1‬‬ ‫‪x −1‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ | ‪ | x‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪x −1‬‬
‫‪ y = f ( x) = x + 1‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = x + 1‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪136‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ f (0) = 0 + 1 +‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ – 2‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪= 1 − 2 = −1 :Y‬‬
‫‪0 −1‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (0 , − 1‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ x = − 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪x=1‬‬ ‫‪ – 4‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‬
‫‪x −1 = 0 ⇒ x = 1‬‬
‫‪ – 5‬ﻭﺍﺿﺞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 6‬ﻳﻚ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻭﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪2 3 5 −1 − 3‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) 5 5 6.5 − 1 − 2.5‬‬
‫‪x2 +1‬‬
‫= )‪f ( x‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x−2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 1‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ x = 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪x − 2 = 0 ⇒ x = 2 :‬‬
‫‪x2 +1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪= x+2+‬‬ ‫‪ x 2 + 1 - 2‬ﺑﺮ ‪ x − 2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x−2‬‬ ‫‪x−2‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪y = x + 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪x−2‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ‪ y = x + 2‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x = 0‬ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪ – 3‬ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0 +1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪f (0‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫‪0−2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪137‬‬
 ‫‪ - 4‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x) = 0‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪x2 +1‬‬
‫=‪0‬‬ ‫)ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ( ‪⇒ x 2 + 1 = 0 ⇒ x 2 = − 1‬‬
‫‪x−2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪f (x) −‬‬ ‫‪− 2 8.5‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪P( x‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ n , m‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪g ( x‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ – 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ m < n‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ m = n‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ y = b‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ b .‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪an‬‬ ‫‪a n x n + ... + a 0‬‬
‫= ‪ y‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫(‬‫‪b‬‬ ‫= ) ‪n ≠ 0 )، f ( x‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪ n‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪b n x n + ... + b 0‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ)‪ f(x‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ m > n‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪138‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪3x 2‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ – 1‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x2 − 4‬‬
‫‪x4‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬ ‫‪ – 2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x2 +1‬‬
‫‪ – 3‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5x‬‬ ‫‪3x 2‬‬ ‫‪x+7‬‬ ‫‪x+7‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫= ) ‪, g(x‬‬ ‫‪, h(x) = 2‬‬ ‫‪, k(x) = 2‬‬
‫‪x−4‬‬ ‫)‪( x − 5)( x + 4‬‬ ‫‪x − 49‬‬ ‫‪x + 49‬‬
‫‪ – 4‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ) ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x +3‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫= ) ‪, g( x‬‬ ‫= )‪, h (x‬‬ ‫‪, k(x) = 2‬‬
‫‪x+4‬‬ ‫)‪x ( x + 4‬‬ ‫)‪x ( x + 4‬‬ ‫‪x +4‬‬
‫‪ – 5‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4x ,‬‬ ‫‪2x‬‬
‫= )‪f ( x‬‬ ‫= )‪g ( x‬‬
‫‪x−2‬‬ ‫‪x−4‬‬
‫‪3x + 1‬‬
‫= ) ‪ f ( x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ - 6‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x −3‬‬
‫‪a: y=2‬‬ ‫‪b: y = 3‬‬ ‫‪c : y = −2‬‬ ‫‪d:‬‬ ‫‪y = −3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫= )‪ f (x‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ - 7‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x+2‬‬ ‫‪x+2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ) ‪ f ( x‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 8‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x −1‬‬
‫‪139‬‬
 ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ )‪ (Ragne‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺖ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ‪ x‬ﻳﻚ ‪ y‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻯ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ XY‬ﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ S‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ } )‪ S = { ( x, y ) | y = f ( x‬ﻛﻪ ‪ x‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ f ( x) = c
t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ f ( x ) = ax + b ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﻄﻰ )‪ f ( x ) = x ، (a ≠ 0‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﻭ‬
‫| ‪ f ( x) =| x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪⎧ 1: x > 0‬‬
‫⎪‬
‫‪f : IR → IR‬‬ ‫‪sgn(x ) = ⎨ 0 : x = 0‬‬
‫⎪‬
‫‪⎩ −1: x < 0‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ }‪ {− 1, 0 ,1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a ≠ 0 , y = ax 2 + bx + c
t‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻻ ) ‪ ( parabola‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺻﻐﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪a < 0‬‬
‫‪b 4ac − b 2‬‬
‫‪ (−‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻋﻈﻤﻰ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪4a‬‬
‫‪140‬‬
 ‫‪b‬‬
‫‪ x = −‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = b 2 − 4ac > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﻝ‪،‬‬
‫‪2a‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺑﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ x1 < x2 ، f (x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ) ‪ f ( x1 ) < f ( x2‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x1 < x2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ) ‪ f ( x1 ) > f ( x2‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪f (− x) = f ( x‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ f (− x ) = −f ( x‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )‪ (2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ (‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ c‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ y = f ( x) + c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = f ( x) − c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ c‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪ y = f ( x + c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y = f (x‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ‬
‫)‪ y = f ( x − c‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪(f + g )( x ) = f ( x ) + g ( x ) ,‬‬ ‫) ‪(f − g )( x ) = f ( x ) − g ( x‬‬
‫‪f‬‬ ‫)‪f (x‬‬
‫‪(f ⋅ g )( x ) = f ( x ) . g ( x ) ,‬‬ ‫= ) ‪( )( x‬‬ ‫)‪(g( x ) ≠ 0‬‬
‫‪g‬‬ ‫) ‪g( x‬‬
‫‪dom (f + g )( x ) = dom f I dom g‬‬
‫‪dom (f − g )( x ) = dom f I dom g‬‬
‫‪dom (f ⋅ g )( x ) = dom f I dom g‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪dom ( )( x ) = dom f I dom g −‬‬ ‫} ‪{ x / g( x ) = 0‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪141‬‬
 ‫‪
t‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‪:‬‬
‫} ‪Dom (f o g )( x ) = {x / x ∈ domg , g ( x )∈dom f‬‬
‫}‪Dom (g o f )( x ) = {x / x ∈ dom f , f ( x )∈dom g‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪) x‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ( ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ )‪ y = f (x‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ‪ x‬ﺣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ x‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ )‪ f −1 ( x‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )‪f (x‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ f (x‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )‪ f (x‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ y=x‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪P( x‬‬
‫= )‪ f ( x‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ n , m‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫)‪g ( x‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ – 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ m < n‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ m = n‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ y = b‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ b‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪an‬‬ ‫‪a n x n + ... + a 0‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫= ) ‪ f ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪n ≠ 0‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪ n‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪bn‬‬ ‫‪b n x n + ... + b 0‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ)‪ f(x‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ m > n‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪142‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ؟ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1−‬‬ ‫})‪{(1,2), (3,4), (5,5‬‬
‫‪2−‬‬ ‫})‪{(3,4), (3,5), (4,4), (4,5‬‬
‫‪3−‬‬ ‫})‪{( −3,−3), ( −2,−2), ( −1,−1), (0,0‬‬
‫‪4−‬‬ ‫})‪{(1,4), (1,5), (1,6‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g( x ) = x 2 + 2x + 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ g(− x ) , g(−1‬ﻭ )‪ g( x + 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ h ( x ) = x 4 + x 2 + 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ h (− x ), h (−1) , h (2‬ﻭ ) ‪ h (3a‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 2x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪f ( x ) = ( x − 3) 2‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 16 − x 2‬‬ ‫= )‪f (x‬‬
‫‪x2 − 4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪f ( x ) = x 2 − 4x − 5‬‬
‫‪x 2 + 25‬‬
‫‪⎧x + 3 : x < 0‬‬
‫⎨ = ) ‪ f ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ f (0) , f (3) ،‬ﻭ )‪ f (−2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 5‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪⎩4 x + 7 : x ≥ 0‬‬
‫‪⎧x + 3 : x ≥ −3‬‬
‫⎨ = ) ‪ g( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ g(−6) , g(0) ،‬ﻭ )‪ g(−3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 6‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪⎩− ( x + 3) : x < −3‬‬
‫‪⎧x2 − 9‬‬
‫‪ - 7‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ h ( x ) = ⎨⎪ x − 3 ⇐ x ≠ 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ h (0) , h (3) ،‬ﺍﻭ )‪ h (5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫⎪‬ ‫‪⇐ x =3‬‬
‫‪⎩6‬‬
‫‪ - 8‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x + y = 16 ,‬‬ ‫‪x 2 + y = 16‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x 2 + y 2 = 16‬‬
‫‪x = y2‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪y= x+4‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x + y3 = 8‬‬
‫‪143‬‬
 ‫‪ - 9‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻃﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫= ) ‪f ( x ) = x 4 − 2 x 2 + 5 , f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 x − 1 ,. f ( x‬‬
‫‪x −6‬‬
‫‪ - 10‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‪ f ( x ) = x 2 − 1‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x ) = ( x − 1) 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪f ( x ) = x 2‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪ (f ⋅ g) , (f − g) , ( f + g) - 11‬ﻭ ) ( ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊﺯﻳﺮﺭﺍﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪﻭﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 4x − 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪g( x ) = 6x + 3‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 2x + 5‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪g( x ) = 4x − 9‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 4x 2 − 11x + 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪g( x ) = x 2 + 5‬‬
‫‪ - 12‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ f ( x ) = 4x 2 − 2x‬ﻭ ‪ g( x ) = 8x + 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ؛ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪(f + g) (3) ,‬‬ ‫)‪(f + g) (−5‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(f ⋅ g) (4‬‬
‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫)‪( ) (4‬‬ ‫)‪(fog) (2‬‬ ‫)‪(gof ) (−5‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ fog - 13‬ﻭ ‪ gof‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 8x + 12 ,‬‬ ‫‪g ( x ) = 3x − 1‬‬
‫‪f ( x ) = 5x + 3‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪g( x ) = − x 2 + 4x + 3‬‬
‫‪f (x) = −x 3 + 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪g( x ) = 4x‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪g( x ) = x 2‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x + 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪g ( x ) = 8x 2 − 6‬‬
‫‪ - 14‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪ y=f(x‬ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = f ( x ) − 5‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -a‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ -b‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ - c‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ -d‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ - 15‬ﺍﮔﺮ)‪ f(x‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪144‬‬
 ‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪⎧− x + 2‬‬ ‫‪x >1‬‬
‫⎪‬
‫‪f ( x ) = ⎨x 2‬‬ ‫‪−1 < x < 1‬‬
‫⎪‬
‫‪⎩x + 2‬‬ ‫‪x < −1‬‬
‫‪2x‬‬
‫= ) ‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 16‬ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x +1‬‬
‫‪ - 17‬ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = 2x − 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 18‬ﺳﺎﺣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5x‬‬ ‫‪7x‬‬ ‫‪x +8‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫= ) ‪g( x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫= )‪h(x‬‬
‫‪x−4‬‬ ‫‪x −8‬‬ ‫‪x 2 − 64‬‬
‫‪x +8‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪x+7‬‬ ‫‪x+7‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫= ) ‪g( x‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫= )‪h(x‬‬
‫‪x 2 + 64‬‬ ‫‪x 2 − 49‬‬ ‫‪x 2 − 36‬‬
‫‪ - 19‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ f ( x ) = x 2 − 1 , f ( x ) = x 2 + 1 , f ( x ) = x 2 + 2‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x ) = x 2 − 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = x 2‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 20‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪y = ( x − 2) 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪y = ( x + 3) 2 − 4‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ y = −‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 21‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪x2 − 5‬‬
‫= ) ‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 22‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x+2‬‬
‫‪x +1‬‬
‫= ) ‪ h ( x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ - 23‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪x−4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a ) y = −1‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪y =1‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫‪y=−‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬ ‫‪y=4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪145‬‬
 ‫‪⎧3x + 1 : x < 2‬‬
‫⎨ = ) ‪ f ( x‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 24‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪⎩− x‬‬ ‫‪: x≥2‬‬
‫‪ - 25‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g( x ) = x − 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 26‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 27‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪f (f −1 ( x ) = x‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪f (x) = x‬‬ ‫‪f ( x ) = 8x − 1‬‬ ‫‪f (x) = x 2 + 6‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪4x + 6 ,‬‬
‫= )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪f (x) = x 3 − 1‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ - 28‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g( x ) = x 2‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪ - 29‬ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ (fog )( x ) = (gof )( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺑﺎ ‪ g‬ﭼﻰ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 30‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g( x ) = 3 − x‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 31‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = −3‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 32‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = 2x 2 + 4x + 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ - 33‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪f ( x ) = x 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ f ( x ) = 2 x 2 , f ( x ) = 3x 2‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x ) = x 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪f ( x ) = x 2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x2 −1‬‬
‫= ) ‪ f ( x‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ - 34‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪a: y=x‬‬
‫‪b : y = x −1‬‬
‫‪c : y = x +1‬‬
‫‪146‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎرم‬
‫ﺗﻮاﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
 ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ)‪(Angle and Radian‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﺃﻯ ﻣﺸﺘﺘﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻣﺒﺪﺃﻯ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻧﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻠﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻠﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻧﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺃﻯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪1°‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 360°‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪).‬ﻳﻚ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪ (clockwise‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫)‪ (counter clockwise‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻰ )‪ (initial side‬ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻰ )‪(terminal side‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؛ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺿ‬
‫ﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ‬

‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ‬
‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪149‬‬
 ‫→‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ ‪ OA‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫→‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ ‪ OA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪) 360o‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ( ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫→‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ ‪ OA‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ OB‬ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ θ + 360o‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ θ + 720o‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ‬
‫→‬
‫‪ OA‬ﺭﺍ ‪ K‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫‪ θ + K ⋅ 360o‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 360o‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 720 o ، − 360 o ، 360 o ، − 60 o ، 60 o‬ﻭ ‪ − 720o‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ − 180o , 90o , 45o‬ﻭ ‪ 180o‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‪ :‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪150‬‬
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺼﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ )‪ (Rotation‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ‪ 1‬ﺣﺼﺔ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪360‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻳﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪1o = 60′ , 1′ = 60′′ , 1o = 60 ⋅ 60 = 3600′′‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1 o‬‬
‫(‬ ‫( ‪) o = 1′ , ( )′ = 1′′ ,‬‬ ‫‪) = 1′′‬‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪3600‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ 35o 15′ 27′′ :‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻭ ‪ (48,3625) o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ )‪ (DMS‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪27 o‬‬
‫( ‪35o 15′ 27′′ = 35o + ( ) o +‬‬ ‫‪) = 35o + 0,25o + 0,0075o = 35,2575o‬‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪3600‬‬
‫')‪48,3625o = 48o + 0,3625o = 48o + (0,3625 ⋅ 60)′ = 48o + (21,75‬‬
‫"‪= 48o + (21)'+(0,75 ⋅ 60)" = 48o 21' 45‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫"‪ 36o 47' 12‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ‪ 55,967663o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪DMS‬‬
‫‪ Degree, Minute, Second‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺼﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪400‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺼﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﺼﺔ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1g = 100' g‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪1`g = 100' ' g‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪1g =10000' ' g‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪) .‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ‪ 360o‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 400g‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ 45o :‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ‪ 100g‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ‪ 360o‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 400g‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪151‬‬
 ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪360o = 400g‬‬ ‫‪400g = 360o‬‬
‫‪400‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪360‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫= ‪10‬‬ ‫‪g= g‬‬ ‫( = ‪1g‬‬ ‫‪)o = ( )o‬‬
‫‪360‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9 o‬‬
‫‪45o = 45( )g = 50g‬‬ ‫(‪100g = 100‬‬ ‫‪) = 90o‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪180 200‬‬ ‫‪180 200‬‬
‫‪180 ⋅100‬‬
‫=‪d‬‬ ‫‪= 90o‬‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ )‪ :(Radian‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫∧‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ ACB‬ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ r‬ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ‪ AB‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﻪ ‪ r‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫∧‬
‫‪ ACB‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1 radian‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∧‬
‫‪ACB = 1 radian = 1R‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ AB‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪ (r‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ θ‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫∩‬
‫∧‬ ‫‪AB s‬‬
‫=‪θ‬‬ ‫‪ s = r θ‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ =‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪ (Unite Circle‬ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺃﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪152‬‬
 ‫∩‬ ‫∩‬
‫∩ ‪AB AB‬‬
‫=‪θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= AB = S radian‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2P r‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ C = 2πr‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪= 2P radian‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ‪ 360o‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 2πR‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2π R = 360o‬‬
‫‪360o 180o‬‬ ‫‪180o‬‬
‫= ‪1R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫≈‬ ‫‪≈ (57.29578) o ≈ 57 o 17' 45' ' ≈ (57.3) o‬‬
‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3.14159‬‬
‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3.14159‬‬
‫= ‪1o‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫≈‬ ‫‪≈ 0.01745 Randians‬‬
‫‪360o 180o‬‬ ‫‪180o‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪radian‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ 30m‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪d 30m‬‬
‫= ‪ r‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪= 15m‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪s = r ⋅ θ = 15( ) = 5πm ≈ 15.7 m‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 1Rad‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 10cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ 360o = 400g = 2π R‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ d = g = R‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪360° 400 2π‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪360o = 2π R‬‬
‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪π R‬‬
‫( = ‪1o‬‬ ‫( = ‪)R‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪360‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬
‫‪153‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭼﻮﻥ‪2π R = 360o :‬‬
‫‪360‬‬ ‫‪180 o‬‬
‫( = ‪1R‬‬ ‫( = ‪)o‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫‪200g‬‬ ‫‪200g‬‬
‫= ‪1R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪≈ 63,66198g‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3,1415‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ − 100g , − 400o , 220o , 75o‬ﻭ ‪ 40°‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ 1o = ( π ) R‬ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪180‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪5π‬‬ ‫‪π 11π‬‬
‫⋅ ‪75°‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪radain‬‬ ‫⋅ ‪220‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪radain ,‬‬
‫‪180 12‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪20π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫⋅ ‪− 400‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬ ‫‪radain‬‬ ‫⋅ ‪40°‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪radian‬‬
‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪180° 9‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ‪ 2πR‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 400g‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪π R‬‬
‫( = ‪1g‬‬ ‫( = ‪)R‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪400‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫⋅ ‪− 100g = (−100‬‬ ‫‪) R = (− ) R‬‬
‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ‪ 30‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪270 R‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪D − 30 = D‬‬ ‫‪= ⇒ R = Radian‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪180 π‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10D − 9D‬‬
‫⇒ ‪D − D = 30‬‬ ‫‪= 30⇒ D = 270°‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ 4π , π , 5π : a :‬ﻭ ‪ 6π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺼﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ )‪ (Revolution‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬ ‫‪-b‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪154‬‬
 :‫ﺣﻞ‬
180 π 180
1R = ( )o , ⋅ = 36o
π 5 π
5π 180 180 4π 180
a:( )⋅( ) = 150o , 6π ⋅ = 1080o , ⋅ = 80o
6 π π 9 π
1 π
b: = ⋅ 2πR = radian
4 2
.‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
1 1
Re v Re v
2 4
1 1 π
⋅ 2π = π R ⋅ 2π = Radain
2 4 2
O O
3
1 Re volution , Re volution
4
3 3π
2 π Radians , ⋅ 2π = Radians
4 2
O
O
155
 ‫ﻏﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﺎﺣﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪Radian‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 3π , π‬ﻭ ‪ − 5π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (a‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ 11π , 2π‬ﻭ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫)‪ (b‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ Q1‬ﻭ ‪ Q 2‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ Q 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ‪ r1 ، Q1‬ﻭ ‪ r2‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪(a) :‬‬
‫‪156‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‪(b) :‬‬
‫‪θ1 r1‬‬
‫= ‪θ 2 r2 = θ1 r1 ⇒ θ 2‬‬
‫‪r2‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 11π‬ﻭ ‪ − P‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ‪ 2π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪ 40 = 2 Re v‬ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪60 3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4π‬‬
‫= ‪⋅ 2π R‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ‪ 2P Radian‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪Radian‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ‪ θ = 5,5 min − 30hr‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 3‬ﻭ‪ 40‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪θ = 5,5 ⋅ 40 − 30 ⋅ 3 = 130 o‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -11‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 50cm‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 25cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ؟‬
‫‪ 32,4222o -2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺼﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬ ‫‪-3‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪157‬‬
 ‫‪5π‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ‪ − 7,5°‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬ ‫‪-4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ 720o ,−315o ,225o -5‬ﻭ ‪ 45o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ 1 , 1 , 1‬ﻭ ﺣﺼﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ( ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪24 9‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪9π‬‬ ‫‪11π‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ − 5π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪, −‬‬ ‫‪, −‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪-7‬‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 6cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻃﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 3cm‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -10‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 35‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻃﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ -11‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 152°‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻫﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1620°‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬ ‫‪-12‬‬
‫‪a ) 4π R‬‬ ‫‪b) 8π R‬‬ ‫‪c) 9 π R‬‬ ‫‪d ) 10π R‬‬
‫‪ -13‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪a ) 2 πR‬‬ ‫‪b) 4π R‬‬ ‫‪c) 6 π R‬‬ ‫‪d ) 8πR‬‬
‫‪ -14‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 10m‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 45 radian‬ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪158‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 60o‬ﻭ ‪ 420 o‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ )‪:(Standard position of an angle‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ θ1‬ﻭ ‪ θ2‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 280° ، 115°‬ﻭ ‪ − 300°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪159‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺑﻌﻰ )‪ (Quadrantale angle‬ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪360o ,270o ,180o ,90o‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 500o ,50o ,130o‬ﻭ ‪ − 210o‬ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ)‪(Conterminal angles‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 60o‬ﻭ ‪ 420o‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 110o‬ﻭ ‪830o‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ )‪ (Conterminal sides‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 60o‬ﻭ ‪ 420o‬ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 110o‬ﻭ ‪ 830o‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺳﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 60o‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪60o + 360o = 420o , 60 − 360o = −300o , 60o+ 2 ⋅ 360o = 780o :‬‬
‫‪160‬‬
 ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 230o‬ﻭ ‪ 590o‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 230o‬ﻭ ‪ − 130o‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻨﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ) ‪ (360o‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 2P R‬ﻭ ﻳﺎﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪n ⋅ 360o‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪θ + 2π‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪θ + 360 o‬‬
‫‪θ + 2 ⋅ 2π ,‬‬ ‫‪θ + 2 ⋅ 360 o‬‬
‫‪θ + 3 ⋅ 2π‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪θ + 3 ⋅ 360 o‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬ ‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪θ + 2nπ‬‬ ‫‪θ + n ⋅ 360 o‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (a‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 30o‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :(b‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 90°‬ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ)‪(a‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪13π‬‬
‫= ‪ + 2π‬ﻳﺎ ‪30o + 360o = 390o‬‬ ‫‪Radian‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪25π‬‬
‫= ‪ + 2 ⋅ 2π‬ﻳﺎ ‪30° + 2 ⋅ 360° = 750°‬‬ ‫‪Radian‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪37 π‬‬
‫= ‪ + 3 ⋅ 2π‬ﻳﺎ ‪30° + 3 ⋅ 360° = 1110°‬‬ ‫‪Radian‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪49π‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪30° + 4 ⋅ 360° = 1470°‬‬ ‫= ‪+ 4 ⋅ 2π‬‬ ‫‪Radian‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ)‪(b‬‬
‫‪90° + 360° = 450°‬‬ ‫‪90° + 2 ⋅ 360° = 810°‬‬
‫‪161‬‬
 ‫‪ − 680o , 40o‬ﻭ ‪ 60°‬ﻭ ‪ 410o‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪800o , 80o‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪410o , 50o‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪410° = 50° + 360°‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 50o‬ﻭ ‪ 410o‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ‪ 800 0 = 80 o + 2 ⋅ 360 o‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ 80o‬ﻭ ‪ 800o‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ − 680 o = 40 o − 2 ⋅ 360 o‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ 40o‬ﻭ ‪ − 680o‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ‪ 410° ≠ 60° + 360° :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 410°‬ﻭ ‪ 60°‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺩﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ − 270o ,120o ,90o‬ﻭ ‪ 240o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪− 40o‬‬ ‫‪− 125o‬‬ ‫‪450o‬‬ ‫‪539o‬‬ ‫‪60o‬‬ ‫‪90o‬‬ ‫‪135o‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ) ‪ ( 280o ، − 80o‬ﻭ ) ‪ ( 395o ، 35o‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺷﺶ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 40o‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ )‪ (−930°,150°‬ﻭ )‪ (180°,900°‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪162‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫)‪(Trigonometric Fuctions‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ‪ θ‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ؟‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ )‪ (Trigonometric ratios‬ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﺎﺩﻩ )‪ (θ‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪AB y‬‬ ‫‪BC x‬‬
‫= ‪sin θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪cos θ‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪AC r‬‬ ‫‪AC r‬‬
‫‪AB y‬‬ ‫‪BC x‬‬
‫= ‪tan θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪cot θ‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪BC x‬‬ ‫‪AB y‬‬
‫‪AC r‬‬ ‫‪AC r‬‬
‫= ‪sec θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪csc θ‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪BC x‬‬ ‫‪AB y‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪ cot θ‬ﻣﻰ‬ ‫= ‪ sec θ‬ﻭ‬ ‫= ‪, csc θ‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪tan θ‬‬ ‫‪cos θ‬‬ ‫‪sin θ‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪θ‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (8,15‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫‪ θ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ‪ r 2 = x 2 + y 2‬ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪163‬‬
 ‫‪r 2 = 82 + (15) 2 = 64 + 225 = 289‬‬
‫‪r = 289 = 17‬‬
‫‪y 15‬‬ ‫‪x 8‬‬
‫= = ‪sin θ‬‬ ‫= = ‪, cos θ‬‬
‫‪r 17‬‬ ‫‪r 17‬‬
‫‪y 15‬‬ ‫‪x 8‬‬
‫= = ‪tan θ‬‬ ‫= = ‪, cot θ‬‬
‫‪x 8‬‬ ‫‪y 15‬‬
‫‪r 17‬‬ ‫‪r 17‬‬
‫= ‪sec θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= = ‪, csc θ‬‬
‫‪x 8‬‬ ‫‪y 15‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪y 2 + x 2 = r 2 ...................I‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ r 2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪y2 x 2 r 2‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪r2 r2 r2‬‬
‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪( )2 + ( )2 = 1‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫‪sin 2 θ + cos2 θ = 1‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (I‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ y 2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪y2 x 2 r 2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪⇒ 1 + ( )2 = ( )2‬‬
‫‪y2 y2 y2‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪1 + cot 2 θ = csc2 θ‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (I‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ‪ x 2‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪y2 x 2 r 2‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪⇒ ( )2 + 1 = ( )2‬‬
‫‪x2 x2 x2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪1 + tan 2 θ = sec2 θ‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪164‬‬
 ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪sin θ r y‬‬ ‫‪cos θ r x‬‬
‫‪= = = tan θ‬‬ ‫‪= = = cot θ‬‬
‫‪cos θ x x‬‬ ‫‪sin θ y y‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin θ‬‬
‫= ‪sin 2 θ + cos 2 θ = 1 , sin θ ⋅ csc θ = 1 , 1 + tan 2 θ = sec2 θ , tan θ‬‬
‫‪cos θ‬‬
‫‪cos θ‬‬
‫= ‪tan θ ⋅ cot θ = 1 , cos θ ⋅ sec θ = 1 , 1 + cot 2 θ = csc2 θ , cot θ‬‬
‫‪sin θ‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ θ‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ θ‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (12,5‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ θ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ θ‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ P‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ θ‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ OH 1 P1 ، OPH‬ﻭ ‪OH 2 P2‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪| OP |= 1‬‬
‫| ‪| OH | | OH1 | | OH 2‬‬
‫= ‪cos θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫| ‪| OP | | OP1 | | OP2‬‬
‫| ‪| PH | | P1H1 | | P2 H 2‬‬
‫= ‪sin θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫| ‪| OP | | OP1 | | OP2‬‬
‫‪165‬‬
 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ θ‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ sec θ , cot θ , tan θ , cos θ , sin θ .‬ﻭ ‪csc θ‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ )ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ( ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ‬
‫‪q‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ‪ sec θ , cot θ , tan θ , cos θ , sin θ‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ csc‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ Q‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ Q‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫)‪ (Trigonometric Circle‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫'‪Y‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ XX′‬ﻭ ' ‪ YY‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y′oy‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x′ox‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﻮﺳﺎﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ '‪ TAT‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪q'Bq‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺒﺪﺃﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺳﺎﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺒﺪﺃﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﻣﺒﺪﺃﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫∧‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ M‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ MOA‬ﺭﺍ ‪ θ‬ﺑﻨﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ θ‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(r = OM = OA = OB = 1‬‬
‫‪HM OH′ OH′‬‬ ‫‪OH OH‬‬
‫= ‪sin θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪= OH′ ، cos θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= OH‬‬
‫‪OM OM‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪OM‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪HM AP‬‬ ‫‪OM OP‬‬
‫= ‪tan θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= AP‬‬ ‫= ‪، sec θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= OP‬‬
‫‪OH OA‬‬ ‫‪OH OA‬‬
‫‪OH BQ‬‬ ‫‪OM OQ‬‬
‫= ‪cot θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= BQ‬‬ ‫= ‪، csc θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= OQ‬‬
‫‪HM OB‬‬ ‫‪HM OB‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪166‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪ (quadrants‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪sin θ > 0‬‬ ‫‪sin θ > 0‬‬
‫‪cos θ < 0‬‬ ‫‪cos θ > 0‬‬
‫‪tan θ < 0‬‬ ‫‪tan θ > 0‬‬
‫‪cot θ < 0‬‬ ‫‪cot θ > 0‬‬
‫‪sec θ < 0‬‬ ‫‪sec θ > 0‬‬
‫‪sec θ, cos θ tan θ, cot θ sin θ, csc θ‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪csc θ > 0‬‬ ‫‪csc θ > 0‬‬
‫‪sin θ < 0‬‬ ‫‪sin θ < 0‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬
‫‪cos θ < 0‬‬ ‫‪cos θ > 0‬‬
‫_‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪II‬‬
‫_‬ ‫‪tan θ > 0‬‬ ‫‪tan θ < 0‬‬
‫_‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪III‬‬
‫_‬ ‫‪cot θ > 0‬‬ ‫‪cot θ < 0‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪IV‬‬
‫‪sec θ < 0‬‬ ‫‪sec θ > 0‬‬
‫‪csc θ < 0‬‬ ‫‪csc θ < 0‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ Q‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻭ‬
‫‪−3‬‬
‫= ‪ cos Q‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪−3‬‬
‫= ‪ cos Q‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‬
‫‪ x = −3‬ﻭ ‪ r = 5‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪52 = (−3) 2 + y 2‬‬
‫‪y 2 = 25 − 9 = 16‬‬
‫‪y = ± 16‬‬
‫‪y=4‬‬
‫‪167‬‬
 ‫) ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ y>0 ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪y 4‬‬ ‫‪x −3‬‬ ‫‪، tan θ = y = 4‬‬
‫= ‪sin θ = = ، cos θ‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪r 5‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬
‫= ‪csc θ‬‬
‫‪r 5 ،‬‬
‫=‬ ‫= ‪sec θ‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪، cot θ = x = − 3‬‬
‫‪y 4‬‬ ‫‪x −3‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ cos‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ sine‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ )‪P(cos θ, sin θ‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ )‪ P( x, y‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺤﺾ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﻣﺘﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ )ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ( ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ sin θ‬ﻭ ‪ csc θ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ tan θ, cot θ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
‫‪ cos θ, sec θ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻔﺎﻫﻰ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin 120o tan170o‬‬ ‫‪tan 60o‬‬ ‫‪cos 330o‬‬ ‫‪sec 200o‬‬
‫‪cot 271o csc 91o‬‬ ‫‪sin 271o‬‬ ‫‪csc181°‬‬ ‫‪csc 315°‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ θ‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ θ‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ‪ cosQ ، sin θ‬ﻭ ‪ tan Q‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬ ‫‪2 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫(‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪) , (−‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫(‬ ‫‪,−‬‬ ‫‪) , (−‬‬ ‫‪,−‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪2 2‬‬ ‫‪2 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪168‬‬
 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪sin 30o = cos 60o‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ : 45o‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪r 2 = 12 + 12‬‬
‫‪r2 = 2 ⇒ r = 2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪ y 1‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin 45o = sin‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= =‬ ‫=‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ‪π‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪cos 45o = cos‬‬ ‫= =‬ ‫=‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪y 1‬‬
‫‪tan 45o = tan‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= = =1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ x 1‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪ x 1‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ‬
‫‪cot 45o = cot‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= = =1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ y 1‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sec 45o = sec‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= =‬ ‫‪= 2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ x 1‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪csc 45o = csc‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= =‬ ‫‪= 2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ y 1‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪169‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺁﻥ ‪ b‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 45o‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ‪ A B C‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺁﻥ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫∧‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ AH‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ A‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ‪ 30o‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪h 2 + 12 = 2 2‬‬
‫‪h 2 = 4 −1 = 3‬‬
‫‪h= 3‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪π 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫= ‪sin 30° = sin‬‬ ‫= ‪cos 30° = cos‬‬
‫‪6 2‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪π 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫= ‪tan 30° = tan‬‬ ‫‪cot 30° = cot = 3‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪π 2‬‬ ‫‪2 3‬‬ ‫‪π 2‬‬
‫‪sec 30o = sec‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪csc 30o = csc‬‬ ‫‪= =1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6 1‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺁﻥ ‪ a‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 30 o = π‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪170‬‬
 π 3 π 1 ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
sin 60 o = sin = , cos 60 o = cos =
3 2 3 2
, π 1 3
tan 60° = 3 cot 60 o = cot = =
3 3 3
π , π 2
sec 60 o = sec =2 csc 60° = csc =
3 3 3
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬30 o + 60 o = 90 o ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ‬
, ,
sin 30o = cos 60o cos 30o = sin 60o tan 30o = cot 60o
sec 30o = csc 60o , csc 30o = sec 60o , cot 30° = tan 60°
‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬θ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬،‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬90o ‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
.‫( ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬90o − θ)
x x
sin(90o − θ) = , cos θ = ⇒ sin(90o − θ) = cos θ
r r
y y
cos(90o − θ) = , sin θ = ⇒ cos(90o − θ) = sin θ
r r
x x
tan(90o − θ) = , cot θ = ⇒ tan(90o − θ) = cot θ
y y
r r
sec(90o − θ) = , csc θ = ⇒ sec(90o − θ) = csc θ
y y
o r r
csc(90 − θ) = , sec θ = ⇒ csc(90o− θ) = sec θ
x x
171
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ cot(90° − θ) = tan θ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﻒ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 39o‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ 51o‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪sin 39o = 0,6293 , tan 39o = 0,8098‬‬ ‫‪, sec 39o = 1,287‬‬
‫‪cos 39 =,7771‬‬ ‫‪, cot 39o = 1,235‬‬ ‫‪, csc 39o = 1,589‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ 39° + 51° = 90°‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺁﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin 51o = cos 39o = 0,7771‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪cos 51o = sin 39 = 0,6293‬‬
‫‪tan 510 = cot 39o = 1,235‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪cot 51o = tan 39o = 0,8098‬‬
‫‪sec 51o = csc 39 = 1,589‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪csc 51o = sec 39o = 1,287‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin 17 o = 0,2927 cos 17 o = 0,9563 sec17 o = 1,046 csc17 o = 3,420‬‬
‫‪ cot 17 o = 3,271‬ﻭ ‪ tan 17 o = 0,3057‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 73o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 2‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪sin 28° = cos 62°‬‬ ‫' '‪cos 12° 10' 20' ' = sin 77° 49' 40‬‬
‫‪sec 12° = sec 88°‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪tan 70° = cot 20°‬‬
‫‪172‬‬
 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ 270o ,180o ,90o ,0o‬ﻭ ‪360o‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ tan 270o‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﺎ ‪tan 90 o‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪π‬‬
‫= ‪90 o‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(0,1‬ﺭﻭﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 90o‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺁﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪r =1‬‬ ‫‪x=0‬‬ ‫‪y =1‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪y 1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪x 0‬‬
‫‪sin = sin 90 o = = = 1‬‬ ‫‪cos = cos 90 o = = = 0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪r 1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪r 1‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪y 1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪x 0‬‬
‫‪) cot = cot 90 o = = = 0‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( = = ‪tan = tan 90 o‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪y 1‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪r 1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪r 1‬‬
‫‪sec‬‬ ‫‪) csc = csc 90 o = = = 1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( = = ‪= sec 90 o‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪y 1‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ cot 0o‬ﻭ ‪ csc 0°‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ : 180o‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ p (−1,0‬ﺭﻭﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 180°‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ‪ x = −1 r = 1‬ﻭ ‪ y = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪y 0‬‬ ‫‪x −1‬‬
‫‪sin 180o = sin π = = = 0‬‬ ‫= = ‪cos180o = cos π‬‬ ‫‪= −1‬‬
‫‪r 1‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪y 0‬‬ ‫‪x −1‬‬
‫= ‪tan 180o = tan π‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=0‬‬ ‫= ‪cot 180o = cot π‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( =‬
‫‪x −1‬‬ ‫‪y 0‬‬
‫‪173‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ sec180°‬ﻭ ‪ csc180°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3P‬‬
‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪= 270o‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(0,−1‬ﺭﻭﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 270o‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪r =1‬‬ ‫‪x=0‬‬ ‫‪y = −1‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪y −1‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪x 0‬‬
‫‪sin‬‬ ‫= = ‪= sin 270o‬‬ ‫‪= −1‬‬ ‫‪cos‬‬ ‫‪= cos 270o = = = 0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪r 1‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪y −1‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪x 0‬‬
‫‪tan‬‬ ‫= = ‪= tan 270o‬‬ ‫‪) cot‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫= = ‪= cot 270o‬‬ ‫‪=0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪y −1‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪r 1‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪sec‬‬ ‫‪) csc‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( = = ‪= sec 270o‬‬ ‫= = ‪= csc 270°‬‬ ‫‪= −1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪x 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪y −1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 360o‬ﻭ ‪ 0o‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪174‬‬
 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪: 360° = 2π‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(1,0‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 360o‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪x =1‬‬ ‫‪y = 0 r =1‬‬
‫‪y 0‬‬ ‫‪x 1‬‬
‫‪sin 2π = sin 3600 = = = 0‬‬ ‫‪cos 2π = cos 360 o = = = 1‬‬
‫‪r 1‬‬ ‫‪r 1‬‬
‫‪y 0‬‬
‫‪tan 2π = tan 360 o = = = 0‬‬
‫‪x 1‬‬
‫‪x 1‬‬
‫= ‪cot 2π = cot 360 o‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( =‬
‫‪y 0‬‬
‫‪r 1‬‬ ‫‪r 1‬‬
‫= ‪sec 2π = sec 360o‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ( = = ‪= = 1 csc 2π = csc 360 o‬‬
‫‪x 1‬‬ ‫‪y 0‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ 0o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 270o ,180o ,90o ,0o‬ﻭ ‪ 360o‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻯ ﻣﻴﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻫﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪175‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪-1‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪0o‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin θ‬‬
‫‪cos θ‬‬
‫‪tan θ‬‬
‫? = ‪tan 270°‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬
‫‪a) − 1‬‬ ‫‪b) 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪d‬‬
‫‪cos 90° = ? -3‬‬
‫‪a) − 1‬‬ ‫‪b) 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪9π‬‬
‫‪ cos‬ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬ ‫‪= cos‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻳﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪176‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻒ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﺤﺾ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ Q‬ﻭ ‪: − θ‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﻩ ‪ θ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ θ‬ﻫﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ − θ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P( x, y‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ θ‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ θ‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ OMP‬ﻭ ‪ OMP1‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x1 = x‬‬ ‫| ‪| y1 |=| y‬‬ ‫‪y1 = − y‬‬
‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪sin( −θ) = 1 = 1 = y1 = − y = − sin θ‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪cos( −θ) = = x = cos θ‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪sin( −θ) − sin θ‬‬
‫= )‪tan( −θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= − tan θ‬‬
‫‪cos( −θ) cos θ‬‬
‫‪cos( −θ) cos θ‬‬
‫= )‪cot( −θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= − cot θ‬‬
‫‪sin( −θ) − sin θ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ) ‪ (−30o = −‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪sin( −30o ) = − sin 30o = −‬‬ ‫= ‪cos(−30o ) = cos 30o‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪177‬‬
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪tan(−30o ) = − tan 30o = −‬‬ ‫‪cot(−30o ) = − cot 30o = − 3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪sec(−30o ) = sec 30o‬‬ ‫‪csc(−30o ) = − csc 30o = −2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪Sec(−θ) = Secθ‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪csc(−θ) = −cecθ :‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :2‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ − 3π‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin( − ) = − sin‬‬ ‫‪= −(−1) = 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪cos( −‬‬ ‫‪) = cos‬‬ ‫‪=0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ − 3π‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin(−θ) = − sin θ‬‬ ‫‪cos(−θ) = cos θ‬‬
‫‪tan(−θ) = − tan θ‬‬ ‫‪cot(−θ) = − cot θ‬‬
‫‪sec(−θ) = sec θ‬‬ ‫‪csc(−θ) = − csc θ‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ − 360o‬ﻳﺎ ‪ − 2P‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ − 45 o‬ﻳﺎ ‪ − π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ) ‪ (−30o‬ﻭ ) ‪ (−60 o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 3‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ − 90°‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪178‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻥ ‪ π‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 180o‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪150o‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 135o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ sin 135°‬ﻭ ‪ sin 45°‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪sin 130°‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ sin 50°‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﻥ ‪ π‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 180o‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ θ‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )‪ (π − θ‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ M ( x , y‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ θ‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ M1 ( x1 , y1‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ )‪(π − θ‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ )‪(180 − θ‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ OAM‬ﻭ ‪ OM1B‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(r = 1‬‬
‫)‪(r = 1‬‬ ‫‪x1 = x‬‬ ‫‪− x1 = x ⇒ x1 = − x‬‬ ‫‪y1 = y‬‬
‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪sin(180o − θ) = sin( π − θ) = 1 = 1 = y1 = sin θ‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪−x −x‬‬
‫= ‪cos(180o − θ) = cos(π − θ) = 1‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= − x = − cos θ‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪sin(180o − θ‬‬ ‫‪sin θ‬‬
‫= )‪tan(180o − θ) = tan(π − θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= − tan θ‬‬
‫‪cos(180o − θ) − cos θ‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺳﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ (π − θ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪179‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺷﺎﻥ ‪ 180o‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﺎﺩﻩ ‪ θ‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ )‪(π + θ‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ M( x, y‬ﺭﻭﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ‬
‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ M1 ( x1 , y1‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ‬
‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ) ‪ (P + Q‬ﻳﺎ ) ‪ (180° + Q‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ OAM‬ﻭ ‪ OBM1‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‪y1 = − y , x 1 = − x :‬‬
‫‪sin(180o + θ) = y1 = − y = − sin θ‬‬
‫‪cos(180o + θ) = x1 = − x = − cos θ‬‬
‫‪sin(180o + θ) − sin θ‬‬
‫= )‪tan(180o + θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= tan θ‬‬
‫‪cos(180o + θ) − cos θ‬‬
‫‪cos(180o + θ) − cos θ‬‬
‫= )‪cot(180o + θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= cot θ‬‬
‫‪sin(180o + θ) − sin θ‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪sec(180o + θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= − sec θ‬‬
‫‪cos(180o + θ) − cos θ‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪csc(180o + θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= − csc θ‬‬
‫‪sin(180o + θ) − sin θ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 120o‬ﻭ ‪ 240o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫= ‪sin 120o = sin(π − 60o ) = sin(180o − 60o ) = sin 60o‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪cos120o = cos(π − 60o ) = − cos 60o = −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪tan 120o = tan(π − 60o ) = − tan 60o = − 3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪sin 240o = sin(180o + 60o ) = − sin 60o = −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪180‬‬
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪cos 240o = cos(180o + 60o ) = − cos 60o = −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪tan 240o = tan(180o + 60o ) = tan 60o = 3‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 120o‬ﻭ ‪ 240o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ cos ، sin :‬ﻭ ‪ tan‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 3π‬ﻭ ‪ 4π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪3π π‬‬
‫‪π−‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪4 4‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin(π − ) = sin‬‬ ‫= ‪= sin‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪cos(π − ) = cos‬‬ ‫‪= − cos = −‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫‪tan( π −‬‬ ‫‪) = tan‬‬ ‫‪= − tan = −1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫=‪−π‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪sin‬‬ ‫‪= sin( π + ) = − sin = −‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬
‫‪4π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪cos‬‬ ‫‪= cos( π + ) = − cos = −‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫‪tan‬‬ ‫‪= tan( π + ) = tan = 3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ (180° − θ‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ sin Q‬ﻭ ‪ cscQ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻗﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ (180° − θ‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﭼﻮﻥ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪181‬‬
 ‫) ‪ (180 + Q‬ﻳﺎ ) ‪ (P + Q‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ tan θ‬ﻭ ‪ cot θ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻗﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ) ‪ (180 + Q‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 225o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 210o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 150o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬
‫‪cot‬‬ ‫?=‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a) −‬‬ ‫‪b) 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫‪d) − 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sec(225o ) = ? -5‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪182‬‬
 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﻰ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﻥ ‪ 90o‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ sin 60o = cos 30o‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 150°‬ﻭ ‪60°‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ ، A O M‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ' ‪ A O M‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ) ‪ ( P − Q‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ − θ‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ‪ 90o‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ OHM‬ﻭ ' ‪ O H' M‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OH ' = OH‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪sin( − θ) = cos θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪H' M ' = HM‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪cos( − θ) = sin θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫)‪sin( − θ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪cos θ‬‬
‫= )‪tan( − θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= cot θ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫(‪cos‬‬ ‫‪− θ) sin θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= )‪cot( − θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= tan θ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫(‪tan‬‬ ‫‪− θ) cot θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ csc(90 − θ) = sec θ , sec(90 − θ) = csc θ‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪183‬‬
 :‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
،
sin 23o = 0,3907 ، cos 23o = 0,9205 tan 23o = 0,4245
cot 23o = 2,356 ، sec 23o = 1,086 ، csc 23o = 2,559
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬67o ‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
sin 67 o = cos 23o = 0,9205 ، cot 67 o = tan 23o = 0,4245
cos 67 o = sin 23o = 0,3907 ، sec 67 o = csc 23o = 2,559
tan 67 o = cot 23o = 2,356 ، csc 67 o = sec 23o = 1,086
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
sin 8o 10' = 0,1421 ، cos 8o 10' = 0,9899
tan 8o 10' = 0,1435 ، cot 8o 10' = 6,968
sec 8o 10' = 1,010 ، csc 8o 10' = 7,040
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬81o 50' ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
π
90o ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺷﺎﻥ‬
2
π π :‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
sin( + θ) = sin[ − (−θ)] = cos( −θ) = cos θ
2 2
π π
cos( + θ) = cos[ − (−θ)] = sin( −θ) = − sin θ
2 2
π
sin( + θ)
π 2 cos θ
tan( + θ) = = = − cot θ
π
2 cos( + θ) − sin θ
2
π
cos( + θ)
π 2 − sin θ
cot( + θ) = = = − tan θ
2 π cos θ
sin( + θ)
2
184
 π 1 1
sec( + θ) = = = − csc θ
π
2 cos( + θ) − sin θ
2
π 1 1
csc( + θ) = = = sec θ
π
2 sin( + θ) cos θ
2
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬120o ‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
3
sin 120o = sin(90o + 30o ) = cos 30o =
2
1
cos120o = cos(90o + 30o ) = − sin 30o = −
2
tan 120o = tan(90o + 30o ) = − cot 30o = − 3
1
cot 120o = cot(90o + 30o ) = − tan 30° = −
3
o
sec120o = sec(90 + 30) = − csc 30o = −2
o 2
csc120o = csc(90 + 30) = sec 30o =
3
π π
sin( − θ) = cos θ , sin( + θ) = cos θ
2 2
π π
cos( − θ) = sin θ , cos( + θ) = − sin θ
2 2
π π
tan( − θ) = cot θ , tan( + θ) = − cot θ
2 2
π π
cot( − θ) = tan θ , cot( + θ) = − tan θ
2 2
π π
sec( − θ ) = cscθ , sec( + θ) = − csc θ
2 2
π π
csc( − θ) = sec θ , csc( + θ) = sec θ
2 2
185
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 135o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 150°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪sin( − x ) = ? -3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a ) cos x‬‬ ‫‪b) sin x‬‬ ‫‪c) − cos x‬‬ ‫‪d ) − sin x‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪cot( + θ) = ? -4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a ) tan θ‬‬ ‫‪b) − tan θ‬‬ ‫‪c) cot θ‬‬ ‫‪d ) − cot θ‬‬
‫‪186‬‬
 ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻥ ‪ 360o‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 2π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺻﺤﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪sin(360° − θ) = − sin θ‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ cos(360° − θ) = cos θ‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ OPD‬ﻭ ‪ OP1D‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x1 = x‬‬ ‫| ‪| y1 |=| y‬‬ ‫‪− y1 = y ⇒ y1 = − y‬‬
‫‪sin(360o − θ) = y1 = − y = − sin θ‬‬
‫‪cos(360o − θ) = x1 = x = cos θ‬‬
‫‪sin(360o − θ) − sin θ‬‬
‫= )‪tan(360o − θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= − tan θ‬‬
‫‪cos(360o − θ) cos θ‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ sec, cot‬ﻭ ‪ csc‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ θ‬ﻭ ‪360 − θ‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ θ‬ﻭ ‪ - θ‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪11π‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 330o‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪187‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‬
11π π 1
sin = sin(2π − ) = sin 330o = sin(360o − 300 ) = − sin 30o = −
6 6 2
11π π 3
cos = cos(2π − ) = cos 330o = cos(360o − 30o ) = cos 30o =
6 6 2
11π π 1
tan = tan(2π − ) = tan 330o = tan(360o − 30o ) = − tan 30o = −
6 6 3
11π π
cot = cot(2π − ) = cot 330o = cot(360o − 30o ) = − cot 30o = − 3
6 6
11π π 2
sec = sec(2π − ) = sec 330o = sec(360o − 30o ) = sec 30o =
6 6 3
11π π
csc = csc(2π − ) = csc 330o = csc(360o − 30o ) = − csc 30o = −2
6 6
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬315o ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ‬
‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬csc 405o ‫ ﻭ‬tan 390o , sin 450o ‫
ﺁﻳﺎ‬t
‫ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺪ؟ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬sin 790° ‫ ﻭ‬sin 450° ، sin 90° ‫
ﺁﻳﺎ‬t
:‫ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‬360° + Q ‫ ﻭ‬θ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‬
sin(360 o + θ) = sin θ , cos(360 o + θ) = cos θ
tan(360 o + θ) = tan θ , cot(360 o + θ) = cot θ
csc(360 o + θ) = csc θ , sec(360 o + θ) = sec θ
188
 .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬405o ‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
π 1 2
sin 405o = sin( 2π + ) = sin(360o + 45o ) = sin 45o = =
4 2 2
π 1 2
cos 405o = cos(2π + ) = cos(360 o + 45o ) = cos 45o = =
4 2 2
π
tan 405o = tan( 2π + ) = tan(360 o + 45o ) = tan 45o = 1
4
π
cot 405o = cot(2π + ) = cot(360 o + 45o ) = cot 45o = 1
4
π
sec 405o = sec(2π + ) = sec(360o + 45o ) = sec 45o = 2
4
π
csc 405o = csc(2π + ) = csc(360 o + 45o ) = csc 45o = 2
4
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬1500o ‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
3
sin 1500 o = sin( 4 ⋅ 360 o + 60 o ) = sin 60 o =
2
1
cos 1500 o = cos( 4 ⋅ 360 o + 60 o ) = cos 60 o =
2
tan 1500 o = tan( 4 ⋅ 360 o + 60 o ) = tan 60 o = 3
1
cot 1500 o = cot( 4 ⋅ 360 o + 60 o ) = cot 60 o =
3
sec 1500 o = sec( 4 ⋅ 360 o + 60 o ) = sec 60 o = 2
2
csc 1500 o = csc( 4 ⋅ 360 o + 60 o ) = csc 60 o =
3
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬− 930° ‫ ﻭ‬900° ‫ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ‬tan ‫ ﻭ‬cos ، sin :‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
189
 − 930o + 3 ⋅ 360o = 150o
1
sin(−930o ) = sin 150o = sin(180o − 30o ) = sin 30o =
2
3
cos(−930o ) = cos150o = cos(180o − 30o ) = − cos 30o = −
2
1
tan( −930o ) = tan 150o = tan(180o − 30o ) = tan 30o = −
3
sin 900o = sin( 2 ⋅ 360o + 180o ) = sin 180o = 0
cos 900o = cos(2 ⋅ 360o + 180o ) = cos180o = −1
tan 900o = tan(2 ⋅ 360o + 180o ) = tan 180o = 0
7P 5P
.‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ‬− ‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬
3 2
5π π :‫ﺣﻞ‬
− = (−2π − )
2 2
5π π π ، 7 π π π 3
sin(− ) = sin(− ) = − sin = −1 sin = sin(2π + ) = sin =
2 2 2 3 3 3 2
5π π π 7π π π
cos(− ) = cos(− ) = cos = 0 ‫ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬cos
1
= cos(2π + ) = cos =
2 2 2 3 3 3 2
π
5π π
sin(− )
−1 ، 7π π π
tan(− ) = tan(− ) = 2 = tan = tan(2π + ) = tan = 3
2 2 π
cos(− ) 0 3 3 3
2
190
 π
cos(− )
5π π 2 = 0 =0 7π π π 1
cot(− ) = cot(− ) = cot( ) = cot(2π + ) = cot =
π
2 2 sin(− ) − 1 3 3 3 3
2
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
5π 7P
.‫( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬− ) ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ‬،‫ﺩﻭ‬
2 3
sin(2π − θ) = sin(360o − θ) = − sin θ
cos(2π − θ) = cos(360o − θ) = cos θ
tan(2π − θ) = tan(360o − θ) = − tan θ
cot(2π − θ) = cot(360o − θ) = − cot θ
sec(2π − θ) = sec(360o − θ) = sec θ
csc(2π − θ) = csc(360o − θ) = − csc θ
sin(2π + θ) = sin(360o + θ) = sin θ
cos(2π + θ) = cos(360o + θ) = cos θ
tan(2π + θ) = tan(360o + θ) = tan θ
cot(2π + θ) = cot(360o + θ) = cot θ
sec(2π + θ) = sec(360o + θ) = sec θ
csc(2π + θ) = csc(360o + θ) = csc θ
191
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 480o‬ﻭ ‪ 390o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 600o‬ﻭ ‪ 300o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 1830o‬ﻭ ) '‪ (1095o 20‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 25π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 5π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 4π , 41π‬ﻭ ‪ 3P‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ 780o , − 300o‬ﻭ ‪ 420o‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫? = ) ‪cos(−3P‬‬ ‫‪-8‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a )1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫? = )‪cos( −15π‬‬ ‫‪-9‬‬
‫‪a )1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪d ) .‬‬
‫‪sin( −1110 o ) = ? − 10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪b) −‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫‪d) −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪192‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫‪

t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪ f ( x ) = sin x‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x ) = cos x‬ﭼﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ domain‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ f ( x ) = sin x‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x ) = cos x‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪:(graph of the sine function) : f ( x ) = sin x‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (domain‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x ) = sin x‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ‪ Range‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫]‪ [− 1,1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ 2π‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ )‪ (Real Numbers‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ‪ x‬ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺿﻠﻊ ُﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ x‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ 2kP + x‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ sin e‬ﻭ ‪ cos ine‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ sin x‬ﻭ ‪ cos x‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪Range‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ f ( x) = y = sin x‬ﻭ ‪ f ( x) = y = cos x‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ‪ 1‬ﻭ )‪ (−1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ‬
‫]‪ [−1,1‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ Range‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ y = sin Q‬ﻭ ‪ y = cosQ‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ − 1 ≤ sin Q , cosQ ≤ 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ t‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ x ∈ D F‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ x + t‬ﻭ ‪ x − t‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (domain‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ )‪ f ( x + t ) = f ( x‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ t‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ )‪ f ( x + t ) = f ( x‬ﺻﺪﻕ ﻛﻨﺪﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (t‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫‪193‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ t‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ -t‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ f‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ sin( x + 2Kπ) = sin x‬ﻭ ‪ cos( x + 2Kπ) = cos x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ k‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ sin x‬ﻭ ‪ cos x‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ 2π‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ 2π‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫∧‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ t‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ؛ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ y‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ sin t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ h ( t ) = sin t‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ t‬ﻭ ‪ sin t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪sin t‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ )‪ (1,0‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻳﻚ‬
‫)‪(0,1‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪π‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ )‪ (0,1‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫)‪(−1,0‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ π‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪3π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ )‪ (−1,0‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫)‪(0,−1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪-1‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪2π‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ )‪ (0,−1‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ - 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪(1,0‬‬
‫‪194‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ‪ 2P‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ sin(t ± 2P ) = sin t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪h ( t ) = sint‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ sin t‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪h ( t ) = sin t‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﯽ‬ ‫‪180 °‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0.00‬‬
‫‪0°‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0.00‬‬ ‫‪210 °‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.50‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪30°‬‬ ‫‪0.50‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪225°‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.71‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪45°‬‬ ‫‪0.71‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪240 °‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.87‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪60°‬‬ ‫‪0.87‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪270 °‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪− 1.00‬‬
‫‪90°‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬ ‫‪300 °‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪− 0.87‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪120 °‬‬ ‫‪0.87‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪315°‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.71‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪135°‬‬ ‫‪0.71‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪330 °‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.50‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪150 °‬‬ ‫‪0.50‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪360 °‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0.00‬‬
‫‪195‬‬
 ‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ )ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ( ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ sin t‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪sin( t ± 2π) = sin t‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ sin t‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ]‪ [− 2π,0]، [4π,6π] ، [2π,4π]، [0,2π‬ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ sin t‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ − 3π, − 2π, − π, 0 , π, 2π, 4π‬ﻭ ‪ − 4π‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ،t‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ sin t‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ -1‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ sint‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ) ‪ ( 1‬ﻭ)‪ (-1‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ‪ 2π‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻰ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ sin t‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪- 1‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ sin t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 2π‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ ( ,−1‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺥ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ sin t‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ -1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪196‬‬
 ‫‪3π‬‬
‫= ‪ t‬ﻛﻪ ‪ K‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+ 2Kπ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = sin x + 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ] ‪ [0,2P‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ] ‪ [0,2P‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ Range‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ]‪ [0,2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ‪ y = sin x‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ(‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪y = sin x + 1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﺔ)‪ (Amplitude‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ sine‬ﻭ ‪ :cosine‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ f ( t ) = sin bt‬ﻭ ‪ g( t ) = cos bt‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0‬ﻭ ‪ 2π‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ )‪ (cycle‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻭ‬
‫‪2π‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛) ‪ ( b > 0‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = cos 3t‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪2π 2π‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2π 2π‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = sin t‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪= 4π‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ y = a sin bt‬ﻭ ‪ y = a cos bt‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ ( a ≠ 0 ) a‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = −2 sin 4t‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2π = 2π = π‬ﻭ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪4 2‬‬
‫‪ a = − 2 = 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = 2 sin x‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = sin x‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = sin x‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ − 2 ≤ y ≤ 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ 2 = 2‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ 2P‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪197‬‬
 ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin x‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2 sin x‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = 3 sin 2 x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ] ‪ [0, P‬ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2P‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪= P‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ‪ 3 = 3‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪0 π / 4 π / 2 3π / 4 π‬‬
‫‪2x‬‬ ‫‪0 π / 2 π 3π / 2 2π‬‬
‫‪sin 2 x‬‬ ‫‪0 1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3 sin 2 x‬‬ ‫‪0 3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ sin t‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ sin t‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ )‪ (0.0‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪، 3P ، 2P ، P ، (0.0‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ ... 4P‬ﻭ ‪ − 4P − 3P ، − 2P ، − P‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ sin t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3P‬‬ ‫‪3P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 2P‬ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ P‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺯ ‪ P‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪(Graph of the cosine function) f ( t ) = cos t‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (domain‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ‪ Range‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪198‬‬
 ‫]‪ [− 1,1‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ )ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ( ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ cos x‬ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ 2π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∧‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ )‪ (Standard Position‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫∧‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ t‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ p‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ x‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪p‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ cos t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f (t ) = cos t‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﻪ ‪ x‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪ cos t‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪p‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ )‪ (1,0‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫)‪(0,1‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪π‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ )‪ (0,1‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪-1‬‬
‫)‪(−1,0‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ )‪ (−1,0‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ π‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪3π‬‬
‫)‪(0,−1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪2π‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ )‪ (0,−1‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪(1,0‬‬
‫‪199‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ‪ 2P‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ cos(t ± 2P ) = cos t‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪f (t ) = cos t 1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f (t ) = cos t‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ )ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ( ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f (t ) = y = cos t‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪ cos t‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ]‪ [4π,6π] ، [2π,4π] ، [0,2π‬ﻭ ]‪ [− 2π,0‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ cos t‬ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ Range‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ -1‬ﻭ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ]‪ Range ، [−1,1‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ cos t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪200‬‬
 ‫‪f (t ) = cos t‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﯽ‬ ‫‪180o‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪− 1.00‬‬
‫‪0o‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬ ‫‪210o‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪− 0.87‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪30 o‬‬ ‫‪0.87‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪225o‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.71‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪45o‬‬ ‫‪0.71‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪240o‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.50‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪60 o‬‬ ‫‪0.50‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪270o‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0.00‬‬
‫‪90 o‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0.00‬‬ ‫‪300o‬‬ ‫‪0.50‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪120o‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.50‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪315o‬‬ ‫‪0.711‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪135o‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.71‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪330o‬‬ ‫‪0.87‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪150o‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪− 0.87‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪360o‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ g( t ) = cos t‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ t‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ cos t‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺑﻰ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ = ‪ cos t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪201‬‬
 ‫‪π 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ]‪ [0,2π‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ = ‪ cos t‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ ( ,‬ﻭ‬
‫‪3 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5π 1‬‬
‫) ‪ ( ,‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ = ‪ cos t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3 2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪ 5π + 2kπ‬ﻳﺎ ‪t = + 2kπ‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ‪ k‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ sin‬ﻭ ‪ cos‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = cos t‬ﺍﺯ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3P‬‬ ‫‪3P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪2P‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ P‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ P‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ y = sin t‬ﻭ ‪ 2P ، y = cos t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻪ‪ cos( t ± 2π) = cos t , sin( t ± 2π) = sin t :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f (t ) = sin t‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻭ ‪ f ( t ) = cos t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ sin(− t ) = − sin t‬ﻭ ‪ cos(− t ) = cos t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ sin t‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻭﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ cos t‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗ ﺍ‬
‫‪ -11‬ﮔ ﺍﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫]‪f ( t ) = sin t : [2π,6π‬‬ ‫]‪g ( t ) = cos t : [π,3π‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ t‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ]‪ sin t = 1 , [− 2π,6π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ t‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ]‪ cos t = 0 , [− 2π,6π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ]‪[− 2π,6π‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪g (t ) = − sin t‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪202‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ tan t = y = sin t‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ‪ x ≠ 0‬ﻳﺎ ‪ cos t ≠ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪cos t‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ cos‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ cos‬ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ 3P‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ + 2kP‬ﻭ ‪ 3P + 2kP‬ﺻﻔﺮﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2 2‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ )‪ (0,1‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ P‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ) ‪ (2P‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ P‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ‪ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ − 7P , 3P , P , 5P , 9P‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2 2 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ tan‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ t = kπ ±‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (0,−1‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 3P‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ) ‪ (2P‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 3P‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ‪ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ − 5π , − π , 3π , 7π , 11π‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (domain‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪tan‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ IR − {t / t ∈ IR , t = kπ +‬ﻭ ‪ Range‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ‪ π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪tan( t ± π) = tan t‬‬
‫‪203‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ π‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ tan t‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎ ∞ ‪ +‬ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً‬
‫∧‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ) ‪ tan‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ π‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ π‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪ tan t‬ﺍﺯ ∞ ‪ −‬ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∧‬
‫∧ ‪3π π‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎ‬
‫∧‪2‬‬
‫∞ ‪ +‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ∞ ‪ −‬ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﻴﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π / 2‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫∞‪+‬‬ ‫∞‪+‬‬
‫‪tan t‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫∞‪−‬‬ ‫∞‪−‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Q‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan Q‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫‪− 90 o − 60 − 45o − 30o 0‬‬ ‫‪30o 45o 60o‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫‪90 o 120 135o 150o 180 210o 255o 240o‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪3 0‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ − 3 -1‬ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪tan θ‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪ − 1.73 -1 − 0.58 0‬ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻰ‬ ‫‪0.58 1 1.73‬‬
‫‪204‬‬
 ‫‪O‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ )‪ (π,2π‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ )‪ (0, π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ ‪ π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ f ( t ) = tan bt‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ π‬ﻭ ‪ − π‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪f ( t ) = tan 2 t‬‬ ‫)‪ (cycle‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪π π‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ =‬
‫‪b 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ t‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ tan t = −1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ tan t‬ﺩﺭﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ π‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﻰ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ y = tan t‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ -1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪-1‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π π‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ) ‪ (− ,‬ﻣﺤﺾ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (− ,−1‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ t‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪205‬‬
 ‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ tan t = −1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪ K) t = − + Kπ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺁﻥ ‪ π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪. tan( t ± π) = tan ( t ) :‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺎﻕ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ tan(− t ) = − tan t‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ‪ y = tan t‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻡ ﻃﺎﻕ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﺺ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ cosine ، sine‬و ‪tangent‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺒﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Domain‬‬ ‫‪Range‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻕ‬
‫‪sin e‬‬ ‫‪f (t ) = sin t‬‬ ‫‪2P‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ − 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪1‬‬
‫‪cos ine‬‬ ‫‪f (t ) = cos t‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪2P‬‬ ‫ﺟﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ − 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪1‬‬
‫‪tan gent f (t ) = tan t‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻕ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺎﻕ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪D sin = D cos = IR‬‬ ‫]‪R sin = R cos = [−1,1‬‬
‫‪D tan = {x ∈ IR‬‬ ‫}‪: cos x ≠ 0‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪π π‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،t‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan t‬ﺩﺭﺍ ﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ) ‪ (− ,‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = 3 tan θ‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan θ‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) 2π‬‬ ‫‪b) π‬‬ ‫‪c) 3π‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ )‪d‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 0 o‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 90o‬ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ‪ tan θ‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ -1‬ﺗﺎ ∞ ‪a) −‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎ ∞ ‪b) +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ∞ ‪ −‬ﺗﺎ ∞ ‪c) +‬‬
‫‪206‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻧﺠﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ sin t = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ) ‪ cot(t‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪AC AC‬‬
‫= ) ‪cot(t‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= AC‬‬
‫‪OC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪cos t‬‬
‫= ) ‪ cot(t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ sin t = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ cot(t‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ t‬ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫‪sin t‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ)‪ (domain‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ cot‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪ P‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ IR − {t / t ∈ IR , t = kπ , k ∈ z‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫}‪ dom cot = {t ∈ IR / sin t ≠ 0‬ﻭ‪ Range‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ F (t ) = cot(t‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪ P‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ )‪Vertical‬‬
‫‪ (asymptotes‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ( t = kπ) .‬ﻛﻪ ‪ k‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ) ‪ cot(t‬ﺍﺯ ∞ ‪ +‬ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ) ‪ cot 0°‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ P‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ) ‪ cot(t‬ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎ ∞ ‪ −‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ cot‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ P‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ) ‪ cot(t‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪cot t‬‬ ‫∞‪+‬‬ ‫∞‪+‬‬ ‫∞‪+‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫∞‪−‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫∞‪−‬‬
‫‪207‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ )‪(Graph of the secant Function) secant(t‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ) ‪ sec(t‬ﻭ )‪ cos (t‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ f ( t ) = sec( t‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ cos(t‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ) ‪ sec(t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ sec( t‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫) ‪cos( t‬‬ ‫) ‪cos(t‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ 90°‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ) ‪ cos(t‬ﺍﺯ )‪ (1‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ sec t‬ﺍﺯ‪ 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ∞ ‪ +‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫) ‪cos( t‬‬
‫‪ t = 90°‬ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ sec t‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 90°‬ﻛﻤﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ) ‪، sec(t‬‬
‫∞ ‪ −‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ‪ t = P = 180°‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ − 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 180°‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ 270°‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ) ‪ cos(t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ − 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ sec t‬ﺍﺯ ‪− 1‬‬
‫‪3P‬‬
‫= ‪ t‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ) ‪ sec(t‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ∞ ‪ −‬ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ‪= 270°‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 270°‬ﺑﻪ ‪ 360°‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ ) ‪ cos(t‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ )‪ (1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫) ‪ sec(t‬ﺍﺯ ∞ ‪ +‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫)‪Domain sec t = IR − {t | t = (2k + 1‬‬ ‫}‪, k ∈ z‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭ }‪ Range sec( t ) = IR − {t | −1 ≤ t ≤ 1‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ]‪ [− 1,1‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ Range‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ F (t ) = sec t‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ − 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ sec( t‬ﻧﻴﺰ ‪2P‬‬
‫‪208‬‬
 ‫‪π‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ F( t ) = sec(t‬ﺩﺭ )‪ x = (2k + 1‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪k‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪OM OM‬‬
‫= ‪sec t‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= OM‬‬
‫‪OB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪0°‬‬ ‫‪90°‬‬ ‫‪180°‬‬ ‫‪270°‬‬ ‫‪360‬‬
‫∞‪+‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫∞‪+‬‬
‫‪F( t ) = sec t‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫∞‪−‬‬ ‫∞‪−‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ f ( t ) = sec( t‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪209‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪(Graph of the cosecant Function ) Co sec ant‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ f ( t ) = sin( t‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ F( t ) = csc(t‬ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪ csc t‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ sin t .‬ﻭ ) ‪ csc( t‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫‪sin t‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ sin( t ) = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ csc( t‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ F (t ) = csc t‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ sin‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ( ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Range‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ F( t ) = csc(t‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ )‪(−1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ 2P‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 0°‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 90°‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ) ‪ sin( t‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ )‪ (1‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ) ‪ csc(t‬ﺍﺯ ∞ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻰ )‪ (1‬ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ t = 90°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪csc(t ) = 1‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 90°‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 180°‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ) ‪ sin( t‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ) ‪ csc(t‬ﺍﺯ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ∞ ‪ +‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ‪ t = 180°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ sin( t ) = 0‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ) ‪ csc(t‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 180°‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 270°‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ) ‪sin( t‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ )‪ (−1‬ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ) ‪ csc(t‬ﺍﺯ ∞ ‪ −‬ﺍﻟﻰ )‪ (−1‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ t = 270°‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ csc t‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ )‪ (−1‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 270°‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 360°‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ) ‪ sin( t‬ﺍﺯ ‪ − 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ csc t‬ﺍﺯ )‪ (−1‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ∞ ‪ −‬ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪t = 360°‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ csc t‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪).‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺩﺭ ‪ t = kπ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ k‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ C‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ O C A‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪210‬‬
 ‫∧‬ ‫‪OA OA‬‬ ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫= ‪csc( t ) = csc OAC‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= OA‬‬ ‫)‪( t = OAC‬‬
‫‪OC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺧﻂ ‪ OA‬ﻳﺎ ) ‪ (csct‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻠﺺ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫∞‪+‬‬ ‫∞‪+‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪F (t ) = csc t‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫∞‪−‬‬ ‫∞‪−‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ t‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 360°‬ﻳﺎ ) ‪ (2P‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ‪ csc(t ) ≤ −1‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ csc(t ) ≥ 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ h(t ) = −3 csc t‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺒﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Domain‬‬ ‫‪Range‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻕ ﻭ ﺟﻔﺖ ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2P‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻔﺖ‬
‫‪F( t ) = sec t‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺎﻕ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ − 1‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪211‬‬
 ‫) ‪f ( t ) = csc( t‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2P‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ − 1‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫) ‪f ( t ) = cot( t‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﻳﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ t‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪ sin θ‬ﻭ ‪ tan θ‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ cos θ‬ﻭ ‪ cot θ‬ﻛﻢ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ f ( t ) = cot( t‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ t‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ P‬ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ‪ cot Q‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ - 2‬ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ Q‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫∞‪a ) 1 → −‬‬ ‫∞‪b) 0 → −‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪(c‬‬
‫∧‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ t = P‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ) ‪ cot(t‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ) ‪a‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ )‪c‬‬
‫‪ Range - 4‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ sec‬ﻭ ‪ csc‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫}‪a ) IR − {t | −1 < t < 1‬‬ ‫}‪ c) IR − {t | −1 ≤ t ≤ 1‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ )‪b‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (Domain‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ f ( t ) = csc( t‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﻃﺎﻕ )‪ b‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪a ) P‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻀﺮﺏ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪c) 2P‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ) ‪d‬‬
‫⎤‪⎡ π‬‬
‫‪0,‬‬ ‫‪ - 6‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ f ( t ) = csc( t‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ‬
‫⎥⎦ ‪⎣⎢ 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪b‬‬ ‫ﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ )‪c‬‬
‫‪212‬‬
 ‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬
‫= ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪
t‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬
‫‪P 200 180‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪ Q t‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ = ‪ Q‬ﻛﻪ ‪ s‬ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﻭ‪ r‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪sin(90 − θ) = cosθ‬‬ ‫‪sin( −θ ) = −sinθ‬‬ ‫‪sin( π − θ) = sin θ‬‬
‫‪cos(90 − θ) = sinθ‬‬ ‫‪cos( −θ ) = cosθ‬‬ ‫‪cos(π − θ ) = −cosθ‬‬
‫‪tan(90 − θ) = cotθ‬‬ ‫‪tan( −θ ) = −tanθ‬‬ ‫‪tan( π − θ) = − tan θ‬‬
‫‪cot(90 − θ) = tanθ‬‬ ‫‪cot( −θ ) = −cotθ‬‬ ‫‪cot(π − θ ) = −cotθ‬‬
‫‪sec(90 − θ) = cscθ‬‬ ‫‪sec(−θ ) = secθ‬‬ ‫‪sec( π − θ) = − sec θ‬‬
‫‪csc(90 − θ) = secθ‬‬ ‫‪csc(−θ ) = −cscθ‬‬ ‫‪csc(π − θ ) = cscθ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪sin( + θ ) = cosθ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪sin(π + θ) = −sinθ sin(2 π − θ) = − sin θ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪cos( + θ ) = −sinθ cos(π + θ) = −cos θ cos(2π − θ) = cosθ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪tan(π + θ) = tanθ‬‬ ‫‪tan(2π − θ) = − tan θ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪tan( + θ ) = −tanθ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪cot( + θ ) = −tanθ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪cot(π + θ) = cotθ‬‬ ‫‪cot(2π − θ ) = −cotθ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪sec( + θ ) = −cscθ sec(π + θ) = −secθ sec(2π − θ) = sec θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪csc(π + θ) = −cscθ csc(2π − θ ) = −cscθ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫‪csc( + θ ) = secθ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪213‬‬
 ‫‪
t‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪ Q‬ﻭ )‪ (θ + 2kπ‬ﻛﻪ ‪ k‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ domain
t‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ sin Q‬ﻭ ‪ cosQ‬ﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ Range‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫]‪ [− 1,1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = sin Q‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ sin(−Q ) = − sin Q‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = cosQ‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ‪ cos(−Q ) = cosQ‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = cosQ‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪3P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 2P‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪
t‬ﺩﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ‪، P ، ، 0°‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ sec ، cos ، sin‬ﻭ ‪ csc‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2P‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ )ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ tan‬ﻭ ‪ cot‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ P‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ cot‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ cos‬ﻭ ‪ sec‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ‪ cot ، tan ، sin‬ﻭ ‪ csc‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻕ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ‬
‫‪ x ∈ domF‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ )‪ F (− x) = F ( x‬ﺻﺪﻕ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪

t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻃﺎﻕ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ‪،x‬‬
‫‪ x ∈ domF‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ )‪ F (− x) = − F ( x‬ﺻﺪﻕ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪214‬‬
215
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 42,6033°‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ‪ 25‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ JLK‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪sin K sin J‬‬ ‫‪cos J‬‬ ‫‪cos K‬‬ ‫‪tan K‬‬ ‫‪tan J‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪sec K sec J‬‬ ‫‪cot J‬‬ ‫‪cot K‬‬ ‫‪csc J‬‬ ‫‪csc K‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 20cm‬ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ s = 85cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 1radian‬ﻭ ‪ 2 radian‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 10 cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 6‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ )‪ ( ter min al side‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪11π‬‬
‫‪, − 7π ,‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪− 500° ,‬‬ ‫‪900°‬‬ ‫‪, −π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 7‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪17π‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬
‫‪ - 8‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 54‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﭼﺮﺧﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 9‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺁﻥ ‪ 120 cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 70°‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 10‬ﭼﺮﺧﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 300 Re V‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺪ؟‬
‫‪πx‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ - 11‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ 4 x‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ 70x ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫∧‬ ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫‪ C ، B ، A -12‬ﻭ ‪ D‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪، A+ D = 240°‬‬
‫‪216‬‬
 ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬ ‫‪2P R‬‬ ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫= ‪ B+ D‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫‪ C+ D = 200 g‬ﻭ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪- 13‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬
‫‪a ) = 30o‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪radian‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 14‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 17°‬ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ 17‬ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 15‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ x‬ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 16‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪47°‬‬ ‫'‪15‬‬ ‫' '‪36‬‬ ‫‪15°‬‬ ‫'‪24‬‬ ‫' '‪45‬‬
‫‪ - 17‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ )‪ (DMS‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪23.16°‬‬ ‫‪4.2075°‬‬
‫‪7P‬‬ ‫‪3P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬
‫‪ cot‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ tan‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ - 18‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ) ‪، sin(−‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 19‬ﺩﺭﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ] ‪ [−2P ,2P‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ sin Q = 1 ، Q‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ - 20‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ] ‪ [−2P ,2P‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ tan Q‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫‪ - 21‬ﺍﺯ ) ‪ (i ) − (iii‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫)‪(i‬‬ ‫‪sin( − x ) = − sin x‬‬ ‫‪(ii) cos(− x ) = − cos x‬‬
‫‪(iii) tan(− x ) = − tan x‬‬
‫‪ (b‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ ii‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ i (a‬ﻭ ‪ ii‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (d‬ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ i (c‬ﻭ ‪ iii‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (e‬ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪217‬‬
 ‫‪8π‬‬ ‫‪47 π‬‬
‫‪ tan‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ sin( −13π) ، cos‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪- 22‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 23‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ‪ 23‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 24‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺳﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 240‬ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ‪ 40‬ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ‪ 3π‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﻣﻰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ - 25‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 4185°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 26‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ )‪ (−3660°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3P‬‬
‫[ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ - 27‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = cosQ‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻭﺍﻝ ] ‪, 2P‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪b‬‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪c‬‬
‫‪ - 28‬ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = tan Q‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬
‫‪a ) 2π‬‬ ‫‪b) π‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 29‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ) ‪ F (t ) = cot( t‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪a‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪b‬‬ ‫ﻧﻪ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻃﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪c‬‬
‫‪ - 30‬ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻰ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪a‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪b‬‬ ‫ﻧﻪ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻃﺎﻕ ) ‪c‬‬
‫‪ - 31‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ y = cosQ‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪3π‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪c) 2 π‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪d ) 3π‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ sin 67° - 32‬ﺑﺎ ‪ sin 787°‬ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫‪a ) sin 787° > sin 67°‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪sin 787° < sin 67° c) sin 67° = sin 787°‬‬
‫‪ - 33‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪a ) sec 135° = − csc 45°‬‬ ‫‪b) sec 135° = csc 45°‬‬
‫‪d ) sec135° = sec 45°‬‬ ‫‪c) sec135° = − sec 45°‬‬
‫‪218‬‬
 ‫‪ - 34‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪a ) tan 240° = tan 60°‬‬ ‫‪b) tan 240° = − tan 60°‬‬
‫‪c) tan 240° = cot 60°‬‬ ‫‪d ) tan 240° = − cot 60°‬‬
‫? = ‪cot 0°‬‬ ‫‪- 35‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪d‬‬
‫? = ‪cos 9P‬‬ ‫‪- 36‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪13π‬‬
‫‪sin(−‬‬ ‫?=)‬ ‫‪- 37‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪ - 38‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ − 2430°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫? = ) ‪sin( 270° − Q‬‬ ‫‪- 39‬‬
‫‪a ) sin Q‬‬ ‫‪b) − sin Q‬‬ ‫‪c) cosQ‬‬ ‫‪d ) − cosQ‬‬
‫‪9P‬‬
‫? = ) ‪sin( −‬‬ ‫‪- 40‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪9P‬‬
‫? = ) ‪sec(−‬‬ ‫‪- 41‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ) ‪d‬‬
‫? = )‪tan( −15π‬‬ ‫‪- 42‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ) ‪d‬‬
‫? = )‪sec(−1530°‬‬ ‫‪- 43‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ) ‪d‬‬
‫? = )‪cot(−2430°‬‬ ‫‪- 44‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪235P‬‬
‫(‪sin‬‬ ‫?=)‬ ‫‪- 45‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪219‬‬
 a) 1 b) − 1 c) 0 d ) ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
407P
cos( )=? - 46
2
a) 1 b) 0 c) − 1 d) ∞
tan(90 + θ) = ? - 47
a ) cot Q b) − cot Q c) − tan Q d ) tan Q
tan(270 + Q ) = ? - 48
a ) cot Q b) − cot Q c) tan Q d ) − tan Q
sin(−1980°) = ? - 49
1
a) 1 b) − 1 c) 0 d)
2
3P
sin(− )=? - 50
2
1
a) 1 b) − 1 c) 0 d)
2
‫ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬- 51
3π π 3π π 3π π
a ) sin = sin b) sin > sin c) sin < sin
4 4 4 4 4 4
220
 ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎت‬
 R
S Q
A
A+B
O B
T P
 ‫ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﯽ زواﻳﺎى ﻣﺮﮐﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻮرﻣﻮل ﻫﺎی ﺟﻤﻊ و ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮع دو زاوﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻰ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪Sin (α + β) = Sinα cos β + CosαSinβ‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ) ‪ : Sin(A + B‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ X O Z‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ Z O T‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ β‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻯ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ OT‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ OB‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ‪BA‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ‪ OZ‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ؛ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ‪ AH‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ‪ OX‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪AB AB‬‬
‫= ‪Sinβ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= AB‬‬
‫‪OB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪OA OA‬‬
‫= ‪Cosβ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= OA‬‬
‫‪OB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪HA‬‬ ‫‪HA‬‬
‫= ‪Sinα‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪α cos β‬‬
‫∝ ‪⇒ HA = sin‬‬
‫‪OA‬‬ ‫‪cos β‬‬
‫‪OH‬‬ ‫‪OH‬‬
‫= ‪Cosα‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪⇒ OH = cos α cos β‬‬
‫‪OA cos β‬‬
‫‪KB KB‬‬
‫= )‪sin(α + β‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= KB‬‬
‫‪OB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪OK OK‬‬
‫= )‪cos(α + β‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= OK‬‬
‫‪OB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪223‬‬
 ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬KHAM ‫ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ‬.‫ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‬KB ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬AM ‫ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬A ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬MA=KH ‫ ﻭ‬KM=HA ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ) ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬A ‫ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬MBA ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
:‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬MBA ‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
∧ MB MB
cos(M B A) = cos α = = α sin β
⇒ MB = cos ∝
AB sin β
∧ MA MA KH
sin(MBA) = sin α = = = ⇒ KH = sin α∝ sin β
AB sin β sin β
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ MB ‫ ﻭ‬KB ، KM ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ‬KB = KM + MB ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
:‫( ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬KM = AH = sin α cos β) ‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
sin( α + β) = sin α cos β + cos α sin β
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ‬OK = OH − KH ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬: cos(α + β) ‫ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬:2
:‫ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬OH ‫ ﻭ‬OK، KH
cos( α + β) = cos α cos β − sin α sin β
tan(A + B ) ‫ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬:3
sin(α + β) sin α cos β + cos α sin β
tan(α + β) = =
cos(α + β) cos α cos β − sin α sin β
.‫ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‬cos A cos B ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬
sin α cos β cos α sin β
+
cos α cos β cos α cos β tan α + tan β
tan(α + β) = =
cos α cos β sin α sin β 1 − tan α tan β
−
cos α cos β cos α cos β
5π
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬tan ‫ ﻭ‬cos120° ، sin 120° ، sin 7 π :‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
12 12 ‫ﺣﻞ‬
224
 7π π π π π π π
sin = sin( + ) = sin cos + cos sin
12 3 4 3 4 3 4
3 2 1 2 6 2 6+ 2
= ⋅ + ⋅ = + =
2 2 2 2 4 4 4
sin 120° = sin(90° + 30°) = sin 90° cos 30° + cos 90° sin 30°
3 1 3
sin 120° = 1 ⋅ + 0⋅ =
2 2 2
cos 120° = cos(90° + 30°) = cos 90° cos 30° − sin 90° sin 30°
3 1 1
= 0⋅ − 1⋅ = −
2 2 2
π π 3 3 3+ 3
tan + tan 1+ 1+
5π π π 4 6 = 3 = 3 = 3
tan = tan( + ) =
12 4 6 π π 3 3 3 − 3
1 − tan⋅ tan 1 − 1⋅ 1−
4 6 3 3 3
3+ 3
=
3− 3
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
sin 120o = sin(180o − 60o ) = ?
:‫ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬− B ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬B ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
sin[ α + (−β)] = sin α cos( −β) + cos α sin( −β)
sin( α − β) = sin α cos β + cos α(− sin β)
:‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
cos(−β) = cos β
sin( −β) = − sin β
tan(−β) = − tan β
225
 sin(α − β) = sin α cos β − cos α sin β
cos[α + (−β)] = cos α cos(−β) − sin α sin( −β)
cos(α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β
tan α + tan(−β)
tan[(α + (−β)] =
1 − tan α ⋅ tan(−β)
tan α − tan β
tan(α − β) =
1 + tan α ⋅ tan β
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
cot α ⋅ cot β + 1
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬cot(α − β) = :‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
cot β − cot α
π
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬sin 150° ‫ ﻭ‬cos :‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
12
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
π π π π π π π
cos = cos( − ) = cos cos + sin sin
12 4 6 4 6 4 6
2 3 2 1 6 2 6+ 2
= ⋅ + ⋅ = + =
2 2 2 2 4 4 4
sin 150 ° = sin( 180 ° − 30 °) = sin 180 ° cos 30 ° − cos 180 ° sin 30 °
3 1 1 1
= 0⋅ − ( −1) ⋅ = −(− ) =
2 2 2 2
π
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬cos( − θ) = sin θ ‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
2 :‫ﺣﻞ‬
π π π
cos( − θ) = cos cos θ + sin sin θ = 0 ⋅ cos θ + 1 ⋅ sin θ = sin θ
2 2 2
cos( 270° − θ) = − sin θ : ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
cos(270° − θ) = cos 270° cos θ + sin 270° sin θ
cos(270° − θ) = 0 ⋅ cos θ + (−1) sin θ = − sin θ
226
 :‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬tan 120o :‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
tan 180o − tan 60o 0− 3 3
tan 120o = tan(180o − 60o ) = = =−
1 + tan 180o ⋅ tan 60o 1 + 0 ⋅ 3 1
=− 3
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﻭ‬sin 211° cos 59° + cos 211° sin 59° = −1 ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬cos 211° cos149° − sin 211° sin 149° = 1
sin(α + β) = sin α cos β + cos α sin β tan α + tan β
tan(α + β) =
sin(α − β) = sin α cos β − cos α sin β 1 − tan α tan β
cos(α + β) = cos α cos β − sin α sin β tan α − tan β
tan(α − β) =
cos(α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β 1 + tan α tan β
227
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪1 − tan θ‬‬
‫= )‪tan( 45 − θ‬‬
‫‪1 + tan θ‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin( α + β) + sin( α − β) = 2 sin α cos β‬‬
‫‪cos( α − β) − cos( α + β) = 2 sin α sin β‬‬
‫? = ‪cos 277o cos 97 o + sin 277o sin 97 o‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a) −1‬‬ ‫‪b) 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪ cos 240° ، sin 240°‬ﻭ ‪ tan 240°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪[cos( x + y) + cos( x − y] = cos x ⋅ cos y‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 210°‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ cos105° ، sin 105° -7‬ﻭ ‪ tan 105°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪(105° = 60° + 45°) .‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ cos( + x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ sin x = −‬ﻭ ‪< x < 2π‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ cos(α + β) − cos(α − β) = −2 sin α sin β :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪sin 2° cos 88° + cos 2° sin 88° = ? -10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a) −1‬‬ ‫‪b)1‬‬ ‫‪c)0‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪228‬‬
 ‫ ﺍﺯ‬2A ‫ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﻫـﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗـﻰ‬
: A ‫ﺟﻨﺲ‬
x x x x
sin cos + cos sin = ?
3 3 3 3
cos 2 x − sin 2 x = ?
:‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬cos 2α = cos 2 α − sin 2 α = 2 cos 2 α − 1 = 1 − 2 sin 2 α
sin 2α = sin(α + α) = sin α cos α + cos α sin α = 2 sin α cos α
cos 2α = cos(α + α) = cos α cos α − sin α sin α = cos 2 α − sin 2 α
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬cos 2 α = 1 − sin 2 α ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
cos 2α = 1 − sin 2 α − sin 2 α = 1 − 2 sin 2 α
: ‫ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ‬sin 2 α = 1 − cos 2 α ‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
cos 2α = cos 2 α − (1 − cos 2 α) = cos 2 α − 1 + cos 2 α = 2 cos 2 α − 1
tan α + tan α 2 tan α
tan 2α = tan(α + α) = =
1 − tan α ⋅ tan α 1 − tan 2 α
4
‫ ﻭ‬cos 2Q ، sin 2Q ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Q ‫ ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ‬sin θ = ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
5
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬tan 2Q
.(‫ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬Q ‫ ) ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ‬cos θ = − 1 − sin 2 θ :‫ﺣﻞ‬
4 16 25 − 16 9 3
cos θ = − 1 − ( ) 2 = − 1 − =− =− =−
5 25 25 25 5
229
 ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬
‫‪sin 2θ = 2 sin θ cos θ = 2( )(− ) = −‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬
‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪9 16‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫= ‪cos 2θ = cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ = ( ) 2 − ( ) 2‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪25 25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪−‬‬
‫‪sin 2θ‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬
‫= ‪tan 2θ‬‬ ‫= ‪= 25‬‬
‫‪cos 2θ − 7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫= ‪ cos α‬ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ tan 2A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ sin β = 12‬ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ sin 2B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 120°‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ‪60°‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪sin 2α = 2 sin α cos α‬‬
‫‪3 1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫⋅ ‪sin 120° = 2 sin 60° cos 60° = 2‬‬ ‫= ⋅‬
‫‪2 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪cos 2α = cos 2 α − sin 2 α‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1 3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪cos 120° = cos 2 60° − sin 2 60° = ( ) 2 − ( ) 2 = − = −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4 4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2 tan α‬‬ ‫‪2 tan 60°‬‬ ‫‪2⋅ 3‬‬
‫= ‪tan 2α‬‬ ‫= ‪⇒ tan 120°‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=− 3‬‬
‫‪1 − tan 2 α‬‬ ‫‪1 − tan 2 60° 1 − 3‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪:‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪sin θ = 2 sin cos‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪230‬‬
 ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪2 tan‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫= ‪, tan θ‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪cos θ = cos 2‬‬ ‫‪− sin 2 = 2 cos 2 − 1 = 1 − 2 sin 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪1 − tan 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ cos 2Q‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪cos‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪°‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫‪°‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y2 = r 2‬‬
‫‪(−3) 2 + y 2 = 4 2‬‬
‫‪y = ± 4 2 − (−3) 2‬‬
‫) ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪y = 7 (.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫= = ‪sin θ‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪cos 2θ = cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ = (− ) 2 − ( ) 2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ sin‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ 90° < θ < 180°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ‪ cos θ = − 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ tan‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ cosQ ، sin Q‬ﻭ ‪ tan Q‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪2 sin cos‬‬ ‫‪2 sin cos‬‬
‫= ‪sin θ‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫=‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪2 θ‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪sin 2‬‬
‫‪cos‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪sin 2‬‬ ‫‪+ cos 2 = 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫) ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ‪ cos 2 θ‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ(‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪231‬‬
 θ θ θ
2 sin ⋅ cos 2 sin
2 2 2
θ θ θ
cos 2 cos 2 tan
sin θ = 2 = 2 = 2
θ θ θ θ
sin 2 + cos 2 sin 2 1 + tan 2
2 2 2 +1 2
θ θ
cos 2 cos 2
2 2
2 θ 2 θ θ θ
θ θ cos − sin cos2 − sin 2
cos θ = cos 2 − sin 2 2 2 2 2
2 2= 1
=
2 θ 2 θ
θ θ sin 2 + cos 2
cos 2 − sin 2
2 2
θ θ θ
cos 2 − sin 2 cos 2
cos θ = 2 2= 2
θ θ θ θ
sin 2 + cos 2 sin 2 cos 2
2 2 2+ 2
θ θ
cos 2 cos 2
2 2
θ
2 tan
2
θ θ θ
1 − tan 2 1 + tan 2 2 tan
2 sin θ 2 2
cos θ = , tan θ = = =
θ cos θ θ θ
1 + tan 2 1 − tan 2 1 − tan 2
2 2 2
θ
1 + tan 2
2
‫ ﺑﻪ‬2Q ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬Q ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
.‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‬
2 cos 2 θ − 1 = cos 2θ
2 cos 2 θ = 1 + cos 2θ
1 + cos 2θ
cos 2 θ =
2
1 + cos 2θ θ 1 + cos θ
cos θ = ± ‫ﻳﺎ‬ cos =±
2 2 2
232
 :‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
1 − 2 sin 2 θ = cos 2θ
− 2 sin 2 θ = −1 + cos 2θ
1 − cos 2θ
sin 2 θ =
2
1 − cos 2θ θ 1 − cos θ
sin θ = ± ‫ﻳﺎ‬ sin =±
2 2 2
: ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
1 − cos 2θ θ 1 − cos θ
tan θ = ± ‫ﻳﺎ‬ tan =±
1 + cos 2θ 2 1 + cos θ
.‫ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬60° ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬30° ‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
1 1
1−
1 − cos 60° 2 = 2 1 1
sin 30° = = = =
2 2 2 4 2
1 3
1+
1 + cos 60° 2 3
cos 30° = = = 2 =
2 2 2 2
1
1 − cos 60° 1
tan 30° = = 2 =
1 + cos 60° 3 3
2
θ
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬cos ‫ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬،‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬sin θ = − 2 ‫ ﻭ‬180° < Q < 270° ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
2 3 :‫ﺣﻞ‬
x 2 + y2 = r 2
x 2 + (−2) 2 = 32
x − 5
cos θ = = x = ± 32 − (−2 ) 2 = − 5
r 3
180° θ 270°
90° < θ < 135° ‫ﻳﺎ‬ < < ‫ ﭘﺲ‬،‫ ﺍﺳﺖ‬180° < Q < 270° ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
2 2 2
233
 ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ cos‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪1 + cos Q‬‬
‫‪cos‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫(‪1+‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪3 = − 1 (1+ 5 ) = − 1 + 5‬‬
‫‪cos‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2 6‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ sin θ = 2 sin cos‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ cos θ = 2 cos 2 − 1 :‬ﻭ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪ cos θ‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ Q‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪، sin θ‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ tan‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ cos θ‬ﻭ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪16 3‬‬
‫‪sin θ = 1 − cos 2 θ = 1 − ( ) 2 = 1 −‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪25 5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1−‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪1 − cos θ‬‬ ‫= ‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪sin‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫⋅‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪5 2‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪1+‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪1 + cos θ‬‬ ‫= ‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪9 1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪cos‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫⋅‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪5 2‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1−‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪1 − cos θ‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1 1‬‬
‫= ‪tan‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1 + cos θ‬‬ ‫‪1+‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪9 3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪sin 3θ cos 3θ‬‬
‫‪−‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪= 2‬‬
‫‪sin θ‬‬ ‫‪cos θ‬‬
‫‪234‬‬
 :‫ﺣﻞ‬
sin 3θ cos 3θ sin 3θ cos θ − cos 3θ sin θ sin(3θ − θ)
− = =
sin θ cos θ sin θ cos θ sin θ cos θ
sin 2θ 2 sin θ cos θ
= = =2
sin θ cos θ sin θ cos θ
θ θ
sin 2θ = 2 sin θ cos θ , sin θ = 2 sin cos
2 2
cos 2θ = cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ = 2 cos 2 θ − 1 = 1 − 2 sin 2 θ
θ θ θ θ
cos θ = cos 2 − sin 2 = 2 cos 2 − 1 = 1 − 2 sin 2
2 2 2 2
θ
2 tan
2 tan θ 2
tan 2θ = , tan θ =
1 − tan 2 θ θ
1 − tan 2
2
1 − cos 2θ 1 + cos 2θ
sin θ = ± , cos θ = ±
2 2
1 − cos 2θ
tan θ = ±
1 + cos 2θ
235
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 240°‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 120°‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ = ‪ sin Q‬ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ Q‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ cos 2Q ، sin 2Q‬ﻭ ‪ tan 2Q‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ = ‪ sin Q‬ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ Q‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ cosQ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫‪ sin‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ sin - 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫= ‪ sin θ‬ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ Q‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ sinQ 2‬ﻭ ‪ tanQ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - 5‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪ - 6‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 15°‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 30°‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫= ‪ sin β‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ sin 2B‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ - 7‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪120‬‬ ‫‪120‬‬ ‫‪169‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪b) −‬‬ ‫‪c) = −‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪169‬‬ ‫‪169‬‬ ‫‪120‬‬
‫‪cos 3β sin 3β‬‬
‫‪−‬‬ ‫?=‬ ‫‪-8‬‬
‫‪cos β sin β‬‬
‫‪a) 2‬‬ ‫‪b) 1‬‬ ‫‪c) − 2‬‬ ‫‪d) − 1‬‬
‫‪236‬‬
 ‫ ﺍﺯ‬3A ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
A ‫ﺟﻨﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
45o − 3 cos
4 ccoss3 45 c 4545o = ?
‫ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬cos 90° = 4 cos3 30° − 3 cos 30° ‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺻﺤﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
sin(α + β) = sin α cos β + cos α sin β
sin 3α = sin(2α + α) = sin 2α cos α + cos 2α sin α
sin 3α = 2 sin α cos α ⋅ cos α + (1 − 2 sin 2 α) sin α
= 2 sin α cos2 α + sin α − 2 sin 3 α (sin 2α = 2 sin α cos α)
= 2 sin α(1 − sin 2 α) + sin α − 2 sin 3 α (cos 2α = 1 − 2 sin 2 α)
= 2 sin α − 2 sin 3 α + sin α − 2 sin 3 α
sin 3α = 3 sin α − 4 sin 3 α
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬sin 60° ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬sin 180° :‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
3 3 3 3 12 3
sin 180° = 3 sin 60° − 4 sin 3 60° = 3 ⋅ − 4( ) 3 = −
2 2 2 8
3 3 3 3 0
= − = =0
2 2 2
:‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
237
 cos(α + β) = cos α cosβ − sin α sin β
cos3α = cos(2α + α) = cos 2α cos α − sin 2α sin α
= (2 cos2 α − 1) cos α − 2 sin α cos α sin α
= 2 cos3 α − cos α − 2 sin 2 α cos α
= 2 cos3 α − cos α − 2 cos α(1 − cos2 α) (sin2 α = 1 − cos2 α)
= 2 cos3 α − cos α − 2 cos α + 2 cos3 α
cos3α = 4 cos3 α − 3 cos α
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬cos 90° ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬coss 270°
.‫ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬cos 60° ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬cos180° :‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
1 1 1 3 1 3
cos 180° = 4 cos 3 60° − 3 cos 60° = 4( ) 3 − 3 ⋅ = 4 ⋅ − = − = −1
2 2 8 2 2 2
tan α + tan β
tan( α + β) =
1 − tan α tan β
2 tan α
+ tan α
tan 2α + tan α
= 1 − tan α
2
tan 3α = tan( 2α + α) =
1 − tan 2α ⋅ tan α 1 − 2 tan α ⋅ tan α
1 − tan 2 α
2 tan α + tan α − tan 3 α
1 − tan 2 α 2 tan α + tan α − tan 3 α 3 tan α − tan 3 α
= = =
1 − tan 2 α − 2 tan 2 α 1 − tan 2 α − 2 tan 2 α 1 − 3 tan 2 α
1 − tan 2 α
.‫ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬tan 45° ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬tan 135° ‫ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
238
 3 tan 45° − tan 3 45° 3 ⋅1 − 1 2
tan 135° = = = = −1
1 − 3 tan 2 45° 1 − 3 ⋅1 − 2
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬4 sin θ sin(60o − θ) sin(60o + θ) = sin 3θ ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
4 sin θ(sin 60o cos θ − cos 60o sin θ)(sin 60o cos θ + cos 60o sin θ)
3 1 3 1
= 4 sin θ( cos θ − sin θ)( cos θ + sin θ)
2 2 2 2
3 1
= 4 sin θ( cos2 θ − sin 2 θ) = sin θ(3 cos2 θ − sin 2 θ)
4 4
= sin 2 [3(1 − sin 2 θ) − sin 2 θ] = sin θ ⋅ 3 − 3 sin 3 θ − sin 3 θ
= 3 sin θ − 4 sin 3 θ = sin 3θ
: (α + β + γ) ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬
sin(α + β + γ) = sin[α + (β + γ)] = sin α cos(β + γ) + cos α sin(β + γ)
= sin α (cos β cos γ − sin β sin γ) + cos α(sin β cos γ + cos β sin γ)
= sin α cos β cos γ − sin α sin β sin γ + sin β cos α cos γ + sin γ cos α cos β
cos[α + (β + γ)] = cos α cos(β + γ) − sin α sin(β + γ)
= cos α(cos β cos γ − sin β sin γ) − sin α(sin β cos γ + cos β sin γ)
= cos α cos β cos γ − cos α sin β sin γ − cos γ sin α sin β − cos β sin α sin γ
tan α + tan(β + γ)
tan( α + β + γ) = tan[ α + (β + γ)] =
1 − tan α ⋅ tan(β + γ)
tan β + tan γ
tan α +
1 − tan β tan γ
tan( α + β + γ) =
tan β + tan γ
1 − tan α
1 − tan β ⋅ tan γ
tan α − tan α tan β tan γ + tan β + tan γ
1 − tan β tan γ
=
1 − tan β tan γ − tan α tan β − tan α ⋅ tan γ
1 − tan β ⋅ tan γ
239
 tan α + tan β + tan γ − tan α ⋅ tan β ⋅ tan γ
=
1 − tan α ⋅ tan β − tan β tan γ − tanα tan γ
.‫ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬sin(30° + 45° + 60°) ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬sin 135° :‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
sin 135° = sin(30° + 45° + 60°) = sin 30° cos 45° cos 60°
− sin 30° sin 45° sin 60° + sin 45° cos 30°co60° + sin 60° cos 30° cos 45°
1 2 1 1 2 3 2 3 1 3 3 2
= ⋅ ⋅ − ⋅ ⋅ ⋅+ ⋅ ⋅ + ⋅ ⋅
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 6 6 3 2 2 3 2 4 2 2
= − + + = + = =
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 2
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ ﻭ‬cos 30° ، sin 30° ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑــﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴــﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨــﺲ‬tan 90° ، cos 90° ، sin 9 ° -1
i 90 1
.‫ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬tan 30°
135° = (30° + 45° + 60°) .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬tan 135° ‫ ﻭ‬cos135° -2
8 cos3 Q − 6 cosQ = ? -3
a ) cos 3θ b) 2 cos 3θ c) − 2 cos 3θ
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
.‫ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬C ‫ ﻭ‬B , A ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ‬Cos(A − B+ C) − 4
:‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬-5
4 cos x cos(60o − x ) cos(60o + x ) = cos 3x
tan x tan(60o − x ) tan(60o + x ) = tan 3x
24
240
 ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ‬
30° + ssin 60
sin 30 60° = ?
45° + ttan 60
tan 45 60° =?
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B....(I)
sin(A − B) = sin A cos B − cos A sin B....(II)
‫( ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬II ) ‫( ﻭ‬I ) ‫ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬A − B = q ‫ ﻭ‬A + B = P ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
:‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
sin( A + B) + sin( A − B) = 2 sin A cos B
A+B=p A+B=p
−A m B = −q A−B=q
2B = P − q 2A = P + q
P−q P+q
B= A=
2 2
p+q p−q :‫ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
sin p + sin q = 2 sin cos
2 2
:‫ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬II ‫ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬I ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬
sin( A + B) − sin( A − B) = 2 cos A sin B
p+q p−q
sin p − sin q = 2 cos sin
2 2
241
 :‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
cos(A + B) = cos A cos B − sin A sin B....III
cos(A − B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B....IV
:‫ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬IV ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬III ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬
cos( A + B) + cos( A − B) = 2 cos A cos B
p+q p−q
cos p + cos q = 2 cos cos
2 2
:‫ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬IV ‫ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬III ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬
cos( A + B) − cos( A − B) = −2 sin A sin B
p+q p−q
cos p − cos q = −2 sin sin
2 2
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬cos 60° + cos 30° ‫ ﻭ‬sin 60° + sinn 30° ‫ﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
sin p sin q sin p cos q + cos p sin q sin( p + q )
tan p + tan q = + = =
cos p cos q cos p cos q cos p cos q
sin p sin q sin p cos q − cos p sin q sin( p − q )
tan p − tan q = − = =
cos p cos q cos p cos q cos p cos q
sin 7θ + sin 3θ
= tan 5θ :‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬:a‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
cos 7θ + cos 3θ
7θ + 3θ 7θ − 3θ
2 sin cos
sin 7θ + sin 3θ 2 2 sin 5θ cos 2θ
= = = tan 5θ
cos 7θ + cos 3θ 7θ + 3θ 7θ − 3θ cos 5θ cos 2θ
2 cos cos
2 2
sin 3x + sin x = 2 ⋅ sin 2 x ⋅ cos x ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬:b
242
 3x + x 3x − x :‫ﺣﻞ‬
sin 3x + sin x = 2 sin cos = 2 ⋅ sin 2 x ⋅ cos x :b
2 2
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
sin(q − p) cot p + cot q = sin(p + q )
cot p − cot q = ‫ﻭ‬ :‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
sin p sin q sin p sin q
.‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
cos 2θ − cos 2β
‫ﻭ‬ = tan(β − θ) :‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
sin 2θ + sin 2β
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬cos 4θ − cos 2θ = −2 sin 3θ sin θ
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
2θ + 2β 2θ − 2β
− 2 sin sin
cos 2θ − cos 2β 2 2 − 2 sin(θ + β) sin(θ − β)
= =
sin 2θ + sin 2β 2θ + 2β 2θ − 2β 2 sin(θ + β) cos(θ − β)
2 sin cos
2 2
sin(θ − β)
=− = − tan(θ − β) = tan(β − θ)
cos(θ − β)
4θ + 2θ 4θ − 2θ
cos 4θ − cos 2θ = −2 sin sin = −2 sin 3θ sin θ
2 2
:‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ‬
p+q p−q
sin p + sin q = 2 sin cos A + B = P :‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
2 2
A− B = q
sin(A + B) + sin(A − B) = 2 sin A cos B ‫ﻳﺎ‬
2 sin A cos B = sin( A + B) + sin( A − B)
1
sin A cos B = [sin(A + B) + sin( A − B)]
2
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬sin(A + B) − sin(A − B) = 2 cos A sin B :‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
2 cos A sin B = sin(A + B) − sin(A − B) :‫ﭘﺲ‬
243
 1
cos A sin B = [sin( A + B) − sin( A − B)]
2
cos(A + B) + cos(A − B) = 2 cos A cos B :‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
2 cos A cos B = cos(A + B) + cos(A − B) :‫ﭘﺲ‬
1
cos A cos B = [cos(A + B) + cos(A − B)]
2
cos(A + B) − cos(A − B) = −2 sin A sin B :‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
− 2 sin A sin B = cos(A + B) − cos(A − B) :‫ﭘﺲ‬
1
sin A sin B = − [cos(A + B) − cos(A − B)
2
1
= [cos(A − B) − cos(A + B)]
2
:‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪﻛﻪ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
sin 8x + sin 5x + sin 2 x
a: = tan 5x
cos 8x + cos 5x + cos 2 x
2
b: cos 75° − cos 15° = −
2
:a‫ﺣﻞ‬
8x + 2 x 8x − 2 x
2 sin cos + sin 5x
= 2 2
8x + 2 x 8x − 2 x
2 cos cos + cos 5x
2 2
2 sin 5x cos 3x + sin 5x sin 5x (2 cos 3x + 1)
= = = tan 5x
2 cos 5x cos 3x + cos 5x cos 5x (2 cos 3x + 1)
:b‫ﺣﻞ‬
75° + 15° 75° − 15°
cos 75° − cos15° = −2 ⋅ sin sin = −2 sin 45° sin 30°
2 2
2 1 2
= −2 ⋅ ⋅ =−
2 2 2
244
 :‫ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
2 cos 95° sin 13° = sin(95° + 13°) − sin(95° − 13°) = sin 108° − sin 82°
1
cos 38° cos 61° = [cos(38° + 61°) + cos(38° − 61°)]
2
1 1
= [cos 99° + cos(−23°)] = [cos 99° + cos 23°]
2 2
π π 1 π 1
cos( x + ) cos( x − ) = [cos 2 x + cos ] = cos 2 x
4 4 2 2 2
:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
1 1
cos 34° sin 28° = [sin(34° + 28°) − sin(34° − 28°)] = (sin 62° − sin 6°)
2 2
2 cos 45° cos 15° = cos(45° + 15°) + cos(45° − 15°) = cos 60° + cos 30°
1 3 1+ 3
= + =
2 2 2
1 1
sin 10θ cos 4θ = [sin(10θ + 4θ) + sin(10θ − 4θ)] = (sin 14θ + sin 6θ)
2 2
1
[cos( x + y) + cos( x − y)] = cos x cos y :‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
2 .‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
1 1
[cos( x + y) + cos( x − y)] = [(cos x cos y − sin x sin y)
2 2
1
+ (cos x cos y + sin x sin y)] = [(cos x cos y + cos x cos y)]
2
1
= (2 cos x cos y) = cos x cos y
2
sin 8θ cos θ − sin 6θ cos 3θ
.‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ = tan 2θ : ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬
cos 2θ cos θ − sin 3θ sin 4θ
245
 :‫ﺣﻞ‬
1 1
(sin 9θ + sin 7θ) − (sin 9θ + sin 3θ)
sin 8θ cos θ − sin 6θ cos 3θ 2 2
=
cos 2θ cos θ − sin 3θ sin 4θ 1 (cos 3θ + cos θ) +
1
(cos 7θ − cos θ)
2 2
sin 7θ − sin 3θ 2 cos 5θ sin 2θ sin 2θ
= = = = tan 2θ
cos 3θ + cos 7θ 2 cos 5θ cos( −2θ) cos 2θ
A+B A−B
sin A + sin B = 2 ⋅ sin ⋅ cos
2 2
A+B A−B
sin A − sin B = 2 ⋅ cos ⋅ sin
2 2
A+B A−B
cos A + cos B = 2 ⋅ cos ⋅ cos
2 2
A+B A−B
cos A − cos B = −2 ⋅ sin ⋅ sin
2 2
sin(A + B) sin(A − B)
tan A + tan B = tan A − tan B =
cos A cos B cos A cos B
1
sin A cos B = [sin(A + B) + sin( A − B)]
2
1
cos A sin B = [sin(A + B) − sin( A − B)]
2
1
cos A cos B = [cos(A + B) + cos(A − B)]
2
1 1
SinA sin B = − [cos(A + B) − (cos A − B)] = [cos(A − B) − cos(A + B)]
2 2
246
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
:‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻛﻪ‬-11
cos 37° + sin 37°
= cot 8°
cos 37° − sin 37°
‫ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬-2
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
sin 5x cos 8x , sin 3θ cos 5θ , cos 30° cos 60°
sin 32° ⋅ cos 24° , cos 5x sin 8x , cos 7θ sin 5θ
sin 88° sin 12°
, 2 sin 60° ⋅ sin 20°
A+B A−B
2 cos 8θ ⋅ sin 4θ , 2 cos 75α ⋅ sin 25α , sin ⋅ cos
2 2
‫ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬-3
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
cos 56° + cos 22° , sin 84° − sin 76° , sin 94° − sin 86°
cos 86° + cos 22° , cos 84° − cos 76° , sin 8θ + sin 4θ
, P+Q P−Q , 5x 5x
cos 95° − cos 41° sin − sin sin − sin
2 2 3 6
3A 4A A+B A−B
cos + cos , cos 84° + cos 76° , cos + cos
4 3 2 2
:‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬-4
sin 4A − sin 2A cos β + cos 9β
= tan A , = cot 5β
cos 4A + cos 2A sin β + sin 9β
1
sin 10° ⋅ sin 30° ⋅ sin 50° ⋅ sin 70° =
16
1
cos 20° ⋅ cos 40° ⋅ cos 60° ⋅ cos 80° =
16
247
 ∧ ∧ ∧
:‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬A + B+ C = 180° ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬-5
A B C
sin A + sin B + sin C = 4 cos cos cos
2 2 2
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬sin 10° + sin 50° − sin 75° = 0 :‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬-6
sin 30° cos 60° + cos 30° sin 60° = ? -7
1
a) −1 b) 1 c) 0 d)
2
:‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬-8
sin(180° + θ) = − sin θ , cos(180° + θ) = − cos θ
sin(360° − θ) = − sin θ , sin(270° + θ) = − cos θ
cos(270° + θ) = sin θ
, cos(360° − θ) = cos θ
248
 ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ)‪(Arc length‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 5cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 45°‬ﺁﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ cm‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻗﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫∩‬ ‫∩‬
‫‪AB‬‬ ‫‪A′ B′‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪mA B‬‬ ‫∩‬
‫‪m A′B′‬‬
‫∩‬
‫ﻛﻪ ‪ m A B‬ﻭ ' ‪ m A ' B‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ ، θo‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ ،R‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ (L) θo‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ C‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪θ° 360°‬‬
‫ُﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ C = 2P r‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪L 2πR‬‬ ‫‪θo‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪⇒ L = πR‬‬
‫‪θo 360o‬‬ ‫‪180o‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Q‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ L = RQ‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 45°‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 14cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪249‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪45o‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪14 22‬‬
‫=‪L‬‬ ‫‪⋅ π ⋅14 cm = π cm ≈ ⋅ cm = 11cm‬‬
‫‪180o‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4 7‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 14cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪L = Rθ‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪22 1‬‬
‫‪L = 14 cm‬‬ ‫‪≈ 14 cm ⋅ ⋅ = 11cm‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪7 4‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 45°‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ 3πcm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ 45° = π radian‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪L = Rθ‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪L 3πcm‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫= =‪R‬‬ ‫‪= 3π ⋅ cm = 12cm‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫∩‬
‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ AB‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ O‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ R‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫∩‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ OP‬ﻛﻪ ‪ P‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ AB‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫∩‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ AB‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ Q‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ Q ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪250‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ‪ Q‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ R‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ S = R 2 θ‬ﻛﻪ ‪ S‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2π R‬‬ ‫⎫⎪ ‪π R‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪πR 2 ⋅ θ 1‬‬
‫= ‪⎬⇒ S‬‬ ‫‪= R 2θ‬‬
‫‪θR‬‬ ‫⎪⎭ ‪S‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Q‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪360°‬‬ ‫⎫ ‪πR 2‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪⎬ ⇒ S = πR‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪θ°‬‬ ‫⎭ ‪S‬‬ ‫‪360°‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 10cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ‪ θ = 90°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪π‬‬
‫= ‪ 90°‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪Radian‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪S = R 2θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪π 1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬ ‫‪(10cm ) 2 ⋅ = ⋅100 cm 2 ⋅ = 25πcm 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 10cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪﻛﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ‪ θ = 72°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫⋅ ‪72° = 72‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪Radian‬‬
‫‪180° 5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬ ‫⋅ ‪R 2 θ = ⋅100cm 2‬‬ ‫‪= 20π cm 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 6cm‬ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 15πcm2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 15πcm = (6cm ) θ‬ﻳﺎ ‪R 2 θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪251‬‬
 ‫‪15π 5π‬‬
‫= ‪15πcm 2 = 18θ ⇒ θ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪Radian‬‬
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5π‬‬
‫‪ L = Rθ = 6cm‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ‬ ‫‪= 5πcm ≈ 5 ⋅ 3.14cm ≈ 15.7cm‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ 7cm‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 60°‬ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 60°‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ 60° = π Radian‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬
‫‪C = 2πR ≈ 2 ⋅ ⋅ 7cm ≈ 44cm , A‬‬
‫‪S = πR 2 ≈ ⋅ 49cm 2 ≈ 154cm 2‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪π 7π‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬
‫⋅ ‪L = Rθ = 7‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪cm‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪A = R 2 θ = ⋅ 49cm 2 ⋅ ≈ 25.6cm 2‬‬
‫‪3 3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 8cm‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 45°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪45°‬‬
‫‪ As = πR 2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫⋅ )‪= (8cm) 2 (3,14‬‬ ‫‪≈ 25,12cm‬‬
‫‪360°‬‬ ‫‪360°‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪45°‬‬
‫‪ L = 2πR‬ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫⋅ ‪= 2 ⋅ 8cm ⋅ 3.14‬‬ ‫‪≈ 6.28cm‬‬
‫‪360°‬‬ ‫‪360°‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ = 2πR‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪+ 2R = 6.28cm + 2 ⋅ 8cm ≈ 22.28cm‬‬
‫‪360°‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 10cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ‪216° ، 180°‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 324°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪252‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ‪ 90°‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ R‬ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ R‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪ d = R = a 2 ،‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪R2‬‬
‫= ‪ S‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‪ a‬ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪ a = R‬ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪π R 2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫= ‪πR2 − R2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪(π − 2) :‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ 1cm‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 300°‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪360°‬‬ ‫‪2πR‬‬
‫‪300° ⋅ 2πR 5πR‬‬
‫‪300°‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫=‪x‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪cm‬‬
‫‪360°‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ = ( πR + 2)cm‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ؛‬
‫‪P‬‬ ‫∩‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ AB‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪253‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ‪ Q‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ R‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1 2‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬ ‫)‪R (θ − sin θ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ AB‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ‪ Q‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ O‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ -AOB‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ‪ =AOB‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪ S‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ SOAB −‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ =‪ S‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬
‫‪AOB‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ A O B‬ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪θ h‬‬
‫‪cos‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2 R‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ h = R cos‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫‪AB‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪sin = 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪AB = 2R sin :‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪h ⋅ AB‬‬
‫= ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪A O B‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ sin θ = 2 sin cso‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪R cos ⋅ 2R sin‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬
‫= ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪A O B‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪R sin θ :‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪R 2 sin θ‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ‪ As = R θ‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫= ‪SOAB‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ‪ S = R 2 θ − R 2 sin θ = R 2 (θ − sin θ) :‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ )ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ(‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ ‪ R = 6.8cm‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ r = 6,8cm‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ θ = 71°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ A O B‬ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪254‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪R = 6,8cm‬‬
‫‪θ = 71°‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪71°‬‬
‫‪ A = πR 2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪= (6.8cm) 2 ⋅ 3.14‬‬ ‫‪≈ 28.64cm 2‬‬
‫‪360°‬‬ ‫‪360°‬‬
‫‪ h = R cos θ = 6.8cm ⋅ cos 71° ≈ 5.54cm‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪cos 35o30' = 0.8141‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪71°‬‬
‫‪ b = 2 ⋅ R sin = 2 ⋅ 6.8cm ⋅ sin‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬ ‫‪≈ 7.9cm‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin 35o30' = 0.5807‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ A = R 2 sin θ = (6.8cm) 2 ⋅ sin 71° ≈ 21.96cm 2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin 71o = 0.9455‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ = ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫‪ = 28,64cm 2 − 21,96cm 2 = 6,68cm 2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫∩‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ R‬ﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ‪ A B‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫∩‬
‫‪ A B = 60° , R = 12cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ 60o = π‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪S = R 2 (θ − sin θ) = (12cm) 2 ( − sin ) = ⋅144cm 2 ( −‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3 2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪= 72cm 2 ( −‬‬ ‫‪) = 24π cm 2 − 36 3 cm 2 = (24π − 36 3 )cm 2‬‬
‫‪3 2‬‬
‫‪255‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫∩‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ 6cm‬ﻭﻗﻮﺱ ‪ AB = 120°‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺎﺣﺖ‬
‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺎﺣ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 6cm‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ 6cm‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ‪ 3‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪S = R 2 (θ − sin θ) = (6cm) 2 ( −‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3 2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪= 18cm 2 ( −‬‬ ‫‪) = (6π − 9 3 )cm 2‬‬
‫‪3 2‬‬
‫‪≈ 6(3.14)cm 2 − 9(1.73)cm 2 = 3.27cm 2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ 6cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 20cm‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄ‬
‫‪ -11‬ﺎ ﺖ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺁﻥ ‪ 55.5cm 2‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ 12cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 10m‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪3,8‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ‪ 27‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪256‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺩﻭﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ 4cm‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 8cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ‪30°‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ A B C‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺱ ‪ B‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ BH‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ ‪ AC‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ sin A = BH = h‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ h = c sin A‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‬
‫= ‪ ( S‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ )‬
‫‪b⋅h‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪SABC‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪SABC = b c sin A‬‬ ‫)‪(h = c sin A‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ SABC = ab sin C‬ﻭ ‪ SABC = ac sin B‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﻠﻊ ‪ a = 3,5cm‬ﻭ ‪ c = 6cm‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻌﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ B = 47,5°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪257‬‬
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪A = ac sin B‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin 47.5o = 0.73727733‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫=‪A‬‬ ‫‪⋅ 3,5cm ⋅ 6cm ⋅ sin 47,5° ≈ 7,74cm 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪A = ab sin C = (8)(13) sin 130o ≈ 39.83 cm 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪sin 130o = 0.7660‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ‪ AB = AC = 8cm , ABC‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪A = 30o‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪S = AB ⋅ AC sin 30o‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬ ‫‪⋅ 8 ⋅ 8 ⋅ = 16 cm 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺳﻪ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺁﻥ)ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﺮﻭﻥ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ sin‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ ABC‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫)‪(p − b)(p − c‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫)‪(p − a )(p − c‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫)‪(p − a )(p − b‬‬
‫= ‪sin‬‬ ‫= ‪, sin‬‬ ‫= ‪, sin‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ac‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ab‬‬
‫‪a+b+c‬‬
‫= ‪ (p‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ‪ a, b, c‬ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ‪ p‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻰ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪1 − cos A‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪1 − cos B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪1 − cos C‬‬
‫‪sin‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪، sin‬‬ ‫= ‪، sin‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪258‬‬
 ‫‪b2 + c2 − a 2‬‬
‫= ‪ cos A‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ‪ cos ine‬ﻳﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫‪2bc‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺛﺒﻮﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺛﺒﻮﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ‬
‫‪ cos A‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪b2 + c2 − a 2‬‬ ‫‪2bc − b 2 − c 2 + a 2‬‬ ‫) ‪a 2 − (b 2 − 2bc + c 2‬‬
‫‪sin = 1 −‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2bc‬‬ ‫‪4bc‬‬ ‫‪4bc‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a 2 − ( b − c) 2‬‬ ‫)‪(a − b + c)(a + b − c‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪4bc‬‬ ‫‪4bc‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ‪ a + b + c = 2 p :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪a − b + c = a + b + c − 2b = 2p − 2b = 2(p − b‬‬
‫)‪a + b − c = a + b + c − 2c = 2p − 2c = 2(p − c‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ )‪ (a − b + c‬ﻭ )‪ (a + b − c‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫)‪2(p − b)2(p − c‬‬ ‫)‪(p − b)( p − c‬‬
‫‪sin‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4bc‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺸﺎ‬
‫)‪ sin B = (p − a )(p − c) , sin C = (p − a )(p − b‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ac‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ab‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ‪ cos ine‬ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫) ‪p( p − a‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫)‪p( p − b‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫)‪p ( p − c‬‬
‫‪cos‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪، cos‬‬ ‫= ‪، cos‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ac‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ab‬‬
‫‪259‬‬
 .‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬cos A = 1 + cos A ‫ ﭼﻮﻥ‬:‫ﺛﺒﻮﺕ‬
2 2
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‬cos A ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
b2 + c2 − a 2
1+
A 2bc 2bc + b 2 + c 2 − a 2 ( b + c) 2 − a 2
cos = = =
2 2 4bc 4bc
(b + c + a )(b + c − a )
=
4bc
b + c + a − 2a = 2p − 2a
b + c − a = 2p − 2a = 2(p − a )
A p( p − a ) :‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
cos =
2 bc
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
A
sin
A (p − b)(p − c) A 2 ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬tan = :‫ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬tan =
2 p( p − a ) 2 A
cos
2
A A A A
‫ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ‬cos ‫ ﻭ‬sin ‫ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬sin A = 2 sin cos ‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
2 2 2 2
:‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
(p − b)( p − c) p(p − a )
sin A = 2 ⋅
bc bc
p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c)
sin A = 2
(bc) 2
2
sin A = ⋅ p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c)
bc
1 1 1
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬S = ab sin C = ac sin B = bc sin A ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
2 2 2
260
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪SABC‬‬ ‫‪bc ⋅ sin A‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ sin A‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫⋅ ‪SABC = bc‬‬ ‫)‪p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬
‫)‪SABC = p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2S‬‬ ‫‪2S‬‬ ‫‪2S‬‬
‫= ‪sin A‬‬ ‫= ‪⋅S‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫= ‪sin B‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫= ‪sin C‬‬
‫‪bc‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬ ‫‪ac‬‬ ‫‪ab‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a = 5cm ,‬‬ ‫‪b = 4cm , c = 3cm‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪a + b + c 5cm + 4cm + 3cm‬‬
‫=‪P‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 6cm‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪S = p(p − a )(p − b)( p − c) = 6(6 − 5)(6 − 4)(6 − 3‬‬
‫‪= 6 ⋅1⋅ 2 ⋅ 3 = 36 = 6 cm 2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ b = 5cm , c = 6cm‬ﻭ ‪ a = 4cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ b = 24cm ، a = 18cm‬ﻭ ‪ c = 30cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪a + b + c 18 + 24 + 30‬‬
‫=‪P‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 36cm‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪S = p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c‬‬
‫‪= 36(36 − 18)(36 − 24)(36 − 30) = 36 ⋅18 ⋅12 ⋅ 6 = 216 cm 2‬‬
‫‪261‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ b = 42,3ft ، a = 29,7ft‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ c = 38,4ft‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪a + b + c 29,7 + 42,3 + 38,4‬‬
‫=‪p‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 55,2ft‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪s = p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c) = 55,2(55,2 − 29,7)(55,2 − 42,3)(55,2 − 38,4‬‬
‫‪= 55,2(25,5)(12,9)(16,8) = 552ft 2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮﺳﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺮﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﺻﻒ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ‬
‫) ‪ (Perpendicular Bisector‬ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ A B C‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ b ،a‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﺻﻒ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ BOC‬ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ‬
‫∧‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ B O C‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻨﺼﻴﻒ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫∧‬ ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪A = B O L = L O C :‬‬
‫∧‬ ‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫‪sin A = sin B O L = sin L O C‬‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫∧‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫= ‪sin A = 2‬‬
‫‪R 2R‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪abc‬‬ ‫‪2S‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪(sin A‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪2 sin A 2 ⋅ 2s‬‬ ‫‪4s‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬
‫‪bc‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫= ‪ R‬دارﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ‪:‬‬ ‫و از‬
‫‪2 sin A‬‬
‫‪a = R ⋅ 2 sin A‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪= 2R‬‬
‫‪sin A‬‬
‫‪262‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪ R‬ﻳﺎ ‪= 2R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪sin A sin B sin C‬‬ ‫‪2 sin A 2 sin B 2 sin C‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ ABC‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪، a = 11cm‬‬
‫‪ b = 12cm‬ﻭ ‪ c = 13cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪abc‬‬ ‫‪11⋅12 ⋅13‬‬ ‫‪11 + 12 + 13‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 6,98cm‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫‪= 18cm‬‬
‫‪4s 4 18 ⋅ 7 ⋅ 6 ⋅ 5‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ 24cm ، 18cm‬ﻭ ‪30cm‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ b = 5cm ، a = 3cm‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ c = 6cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪abc‬‬ ‫‪3⋅5⋅ 6‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪≈ 3cm‬‬
‫‪4 ⋅ p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c) 4 ⋅ 7 ⋅ 4 ⋅ 2 ⋅1 4 ⋅ 56 2 ⋅ 56‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺮﺳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ‪ + O A B‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ + O C A‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ‪ = O B C‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪A B C‬‬
‫‪263‬‬
 ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪SABC‬‬ ‫‪ar + br + cr == r (a + b + c) = r ⋅ 2p‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫= ‪S = r⋅p ⇒ r‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫)‪s = P(p − a )(p − b)(p − c‬‬
‫)‪(p − a )(p − b)(p − c‬‬
‫=‪r‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 8cm ، 7cm‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 9cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪7+8+9‬‬
‫=‪p‬‬ ‫‪= 12cm‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪S = 12(12 − 7)(12 − 8)(12 − 9) = 26.83cm 2‬‬
‫‪s 26.83cm 2‬‬
‫=‪r‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 2.23cm‬‬
‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪12cm‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫= ‪= π r2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪⋅ (2.23cm) 2 ≈ 15.6cm 2 :‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ 3cm‬ﻭ ‪ 4cm‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪3+ 4+5‬‬
‫=‪p‬‬ ‫‪= 6cm‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪abc‬‬ ‫‪3⋅ 4 ⋅5‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪60 60‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪4s 4 ⋅ 6(6 − 3)(6 − 4)(6 − 5) 4 ⋅ 6 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 2 ⋅1 4 ⋅ 6 24‬‬
‫‪264‬‬
 ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪= cm = 2,5cm‬‬ ‫‪AC = AB + BC‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪AC = 9 + 16 = 5‬‬
‫‪s 6‬‬
‫=‪r‬‬ ‫‪= = 1cm‬‬
‫‪p 6‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ MTN‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺁﻥ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪ n‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪(MN ) 2 = m 2 + n 2‬‬
‫‪t = MN = m 2 + n 2‬‬
‫‪n⋅m‬‬ ‫‪m ⋅ n ⋅ t m ⋅ n ⋅ m2 + n 2 m n m2 + n 2‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬ ‫=‪,R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4S‬‬ ‫‪nm‬‬ ‫‪2mn‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪m2 + n 2‬‬
‫= ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪35cm ، 34cm‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﻚ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺎﻃ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍ ﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎ ﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 36cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪h‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫= ‪sin 60°‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‪⇒h‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪265‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪h 2 + ( )2 = a 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a 2 4a 2 − a 2 3a 2‬‬
‫= ‪h2 = a2 −‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3a a‬‬
‫=‪h‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3a‬‬
‫‪⋅a‬‬
‫‪ S = h ⋅ a = 2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪ABC‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪3a 2 1 a 2‬‬
‫= ⋅‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪abc‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪3 a‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 2‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫⋅‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4s‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a 3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3 3 3‬‬
‫⋅‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪a2‬‬
‫‪⋅ 3‬‬
‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪a2 3 2 a‬‬
‫‪r= = 4‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ⋅‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪p‬‬ ‫‪3a‬‬ ‫‪4 3a 6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ‪ 18cm‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ )‪ (a‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a = ⋅18cm = 6cm‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪(6cm) 2‬‬
‫= ‪3 = 15,6cm ، h‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪6cm‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬ ‫=‪3‬‬ ‫=‪3‬‬ ‫‪3 = 5,2cm‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫=‪3‬‬
‫‪6cm‬‬
‫‪3 = 3,5cm‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫=‪r‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫=‪3‬‬
‫‪6cm‬‬
‫‪3 ≈ 1,7cm‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪266‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ OAB‬ﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻠ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻄﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ‪ R‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ O‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺗﺮ ‪ AB‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪π 1‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪a ) ( − )R 2‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪( − )R 2‬‬ ‫‪c) ( − ) R 2‬‬
‫‪6 4‬‬ ‫‪6 5‬‬ ‫‪6 2‬‬
‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪2 2‬‬ ‫‪π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪d) ( −‬‬ ‫‪)R‬‬ ‫)‪e‬‬ ‫‪( − )R 2‬‬
‫‪6 2‬‬ ‫‪6 4‬‬
‫‪ 6cm‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻕ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ‪30°‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻕ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ 5 2cm‬ﻭ ‪ 6cm‬ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺿﻠﻊ ‪ 45°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ 4cm ، 3cm‬ﻭ ‪ 5cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ b = 9cm ، a = 7cm‬ﻭ ‪c = 12cm‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ 12cm‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 5cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ‪ a = 8cm ، ABC‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ r = 3cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 84cm 2‬ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 3,36cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪267‬‬
 ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
.‫
ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬t
sin(α + β) = sin α cos β + cos α sin β sin(α − β) = sin α cos β − cos α sin β
cos(α + β) = cos α cos β − sin α sin β cos(α − β) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β
tan α + tan β tan α − tan β
tan(α + β) = tan(α − β) =
1 − tan α ⋅ tan β 1 + tan α tan β
: α ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬2α ‫
ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ‬t
sin 2α = 2 sin α cos α
cos 2α = cos 2 α − sin 2 α = 2 cos 2 α − 1 = 1 − 2 sin 2 α
2 tan α
tan 2α =
1 − tan 2 α
:‫
ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬t
1 − cos 2α 1 + cos 2α 1 − cos 2α
sin α = ± cos α = ± tan α = ±
2 ، 2 ، 1 + cos 2α
:‫
ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬t
α 1 − cos α α 1 + cos α α 1 − cos α
sin =± , cos = ± , tan =
2 2 2 2 2 1 + cos α
:‫
ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺳﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬t
sin 3α = 3 sin α − 4 sin 3 α , cos 3α = 4 cos3 α − 3 cos α
3 tan α − tan 3 α
tan 3α =
1 − 3 tan 2 α
(A + B + Q ) ‫
ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺳﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬t
268
sin( α + β + θ) = sin α cos β cos θ + sin β cos α cos θ
+ sin θ cos α cos β − sin α sin β sin θ
cos( α + β + θ) = cos α cos β cos θ − cos α sin β sin θ
− cos β sin α sin θ − cos θ sin α sin β
tan α + tan β + tan θ − tan α ⋅ tan β ⋅ tan θ
tan( α + β + θ) =
1 − tan α tan β − tan β tan θ − tan α tan θ
‫ )ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬:‫ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺿﺮﺏ‬
.(‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
A (p − b)(p − c) B (p − a )(p − c) C (p − b)(p − a )
sin = sin = sin =
2 bc 2 ac 2 ab
A p( p − a ) B p( p − b) C p ( p − c)
cos = cos = cos =
2 bc 2 ac 2 ab
A (p − b)(p − c)
tan =
2 p( p − a )
‫ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
.‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
1
sin A cos B = [sin( A + B) + sin( A − B)]
2
1
cos A sin B = [sin( A + B) − sin( A − B)]
2
1
cos A cos B = [cos( A + B) + cos( A − B)]
2
1 1
sin A sin B = − [cos( A + B) − cos( A − B)] = [cos( A − B) − cos( A + B)]
2 2
θ°
L = πR ‫ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬R ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ‬θo ‫
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ‬t
180°
L = RQ :‫ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬R ‫ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ‬Q ‫
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ‬t
.‫
ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬t
269
 ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ‪ Asec tor = R 2 θ‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‬
‫‪1 2‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ )‪R (θ − sin θ‬‬
‫‪Segment‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬ ‫‪ac sin B , S = bc sin A , S = ab sin C‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪ P :‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻭ ‪ a, b, c‬ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫)‪(p − b)(p − c‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫)‪(p − a )(p − c‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫) ‪(p − b)(p − a‬‬
‫‪sin‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪، sin‬‬ ‫= ‪، sin‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ac‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ab‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫) ‪p( p − a‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫) ‪p( p − b‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫) ‪p( p − c‬‬
‫‪cos‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪, cos‬‬ ‫= ‪, cos‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ac‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ab‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫) ‪( p − b )( p − c‬‬
‫‪tan‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫) ‪p( p − a‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ‪S = p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c) :‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ )‪ (R‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪⇒ 2R‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2 sin A 2 sin B 2 sin C‬‬ ‫‪sin A sin B sin C‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪abc‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬
‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪4S‬‬
‫= ‪ r‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫)‪p(p − a )(p − b)(p − c‬‬
‫= ‪ r‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪270‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ) ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a‬ﻳﻚ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪3 2‬‬
‫= ‪ S‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ b = 8cm ، a = 7cm‬ﻭ ‪ c = 9cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ cos165° - 3‬ﻭ ‪ sin 165°‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪sin( −165°) = ? - 4‬‬
‫‪6− 2‬‬ ‫‪2− 6‬‬ ‫‪− 6− 2‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪cos 2θ sin 2θ‬‬ ‫‪cos 3θ‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪ - 5‬ﻧﺸﺎﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin θ‬‬ ‫‪cos θ sin θ cos θ‬‬
‫‪ - 6‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin(30° + 45°) ,‬‬ ‫‪cos(150° − 45°) ,‬‬ ‫)‪tan(30° + 60°‬‬
‫‪sin(135° + 180°) ,‬‬ ‫‪sin(135° − 180°) ,‬‬ ‫)‪tan(180° − 45°‬‬
‫‪ - 7‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪sin(90° − θ) = cos θ‬‬ ‫‪, cos(90° + θ) = − sin θ , cos(90° − θ) = sin θ‬‬
‫‪sin( 270° + θ) = − cos θ , cos(180° − θ) = − cos θ, sin(180° − θ) = sin θ‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ 0° < θ < 90°‬ﻭ = ‪ sin θ‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ cos θ ، sin 2θ ، cos 2θ‬ﻭ ‪sin‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 9‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin 2θ‬‬
‫‪= 2 sin θ ,‬‬ ‫‪cos 2θ + 1 = 2 cos 2 θ ,‬‬ ‫‪cos 2θ + 2 sin 2 θ = 1‬‬
‫‪cos θ‬‬
‫‪cos 2θ‬‬
‫‪2 cos 2 θ − 2 sin 2 θ = 2 cos 2θ ,‬‬ ‫‪= cos θ − sin θ‬‬
‫‪cos θ + sin θ‬‬
‫‪271‬‬
 ‫‪ - 10‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ 7cm ، 5cm‬ﻭ ‪ 8cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 11‬‬
‫? = )‪sin(180° + θ‬‬
‫‪a ) sin θ‬‬ ‫‪b) − cos θ‬‬ ‫‪c) − sin θ‬‬ ‫‪d) cos θ‬‬
‫‪ - 12‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ tan(180° + θ) = tan θ ¡ sec(360° − θ) = sec θ‬ﻭ ‪sin(360° − θ) = − sin θ‬‬
‫‪cos(α + β) − cos(α − β) = ? - 13‬‬
‫‪a ) 2 sin α sin β‬‬ ‫‪b)2 cos α cos β‬‬ ‫‪c) − 2 sin α sin β‬‬
‫‪sin α‬‬ ‫‪cos α‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪ - 14‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪= sin 5α :‬‬
‫‪sec 4α csc 4α‬‬
‫‪ - 15‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3θ‬‬ ‫‪5θ‬‬
‫‪cos 100° sin 50° , cos 40° cos 60° , sin 8θ cos 10θ , sin sin‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 16‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3α‬‬ ‫‪4α‬‬
‫‪cos 84° − cos 76° ، sin 80° − sin 72° ، sin 12θ + sin 8θ ، cos‬‬ ‫‪+ cos‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 17‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪sin 5θ + sin 3θ‬‬
‫‪= − cot θ‬‬
‫‪cos 5θ − cos 3θ‬‬
‫‪ - 18‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ 180cm 2‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ‪ 80°‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 19‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ‪ 60°‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ )‪ (1cm‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺗﺮ ‪ AB‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪272‬‬
 tan 60° − tan 30°
=? - 20
1 + tan 60° ⋅ tan 30°
1 1
a) − b) c) 3 d) − 3
3 3
3
، sin 2Q ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬θ ‫ ﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ‬، sin θ = ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬- 21
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬tan 2Q 5 ‫ ﻭ‬cos 2Q
cos θ + sin θ
.‫ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬tan( 45° + θ) = ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬- 22
cos θ − sin θ
cos 37° cos 53° − sin 37° sin 53° = ? - 23
a )1 b) − 1 c) 0 d ) ‫ﻫﺮﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
cos 60° cos14° + sin 60° sin 14° = ? - 24
a ) cos 74° b) cos 46° c) sin 74° d) sin 46°
cos14° cos 31° − sin 14° sin 31° = ? - 25
a ) cos17° b) cos 45° c) sin17° d) − sin17°
cos 80° cos 35° + sin 80° sin 35° = ? - 26
a ) cos115° b) sin115° c) cos 45° d) sin 45°
5 3
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬B ‫ ﻭ‬A ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬sin β = − ، cos α = ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬- 27
13 5
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬cos(A − B )
3
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬γ ‫ ﻭ‬θ ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‬cos γ = − ، cos θ = − 8 ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬- 28
5 17
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬cos(θ − γ) ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
cos( x − y ) − cos( x + y )
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ = tan x ⋅ tan y :‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬- 29
cos( x − y ) + cos( x + y )
cos(0° − t ) = ? -30
a ) sin t b) cos t c) − sin t d) − cos t
273
 cosQ sin 2Q
.‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ = sin Q :‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬- 31
1 + cos 2Q
:‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬- 32
cos 8x + cos 4 x
= − cot 6 x cot 2 x
cos 8x − cos 4 x
sin 4 x + sin 6 x sin x − sin 3x
= cot x , = − tan x
cos 4 x − cos 6 x cos x + cos 3x
sin x − sin 3x sin t + sin 3t
= − cot 2 x , = tan 2 t
cos x − cos 3x cos t + cos 3t
cos( x + y) cos y + sin( x + y) sin y = ? - 33
a ) sin x b) cos x c) − sin x d) − cos x
sin( x − y ) cos y + cos( x − y ) sin y = ? - 34
a ) sin x b) cos x c) − sin x d ) − cos x
‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0,5 radian ‫ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ ﺁﻥ‬2m ‫ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ‬- 35
:‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
a) 3m 2 b) 2m 2 c) 1m 2 d ) .‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ‬2 radian ‫ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻯ‬200cm 2 ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬- 36
:‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
a ) 14.14cm b) − 14.14cm c) 14cm d) .‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
274
 ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ‬
‫اﻋﺪاد ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
 ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫)‪(Complex numbers‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ x 2 + 9 = 0‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻲ )‪:(Imaginary Numbers‬‬
‫‪ − 1 = i‬ﻳﺎ ‪ i 2 = −1‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ i‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻳﻮﻧﺎﻧﻰ )‪ (iota‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ − 1 = i‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪− 16 :1‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪− 16 = (−1) ⋅16 = − 1 16 = i 16 = ±4i :‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 2 + a 2 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x 2 + a 2 = 0 ⇒ x 2 = −a 2 ⇒ x = ± − a 2 = ± (−1) ⋅ (a 2 ) = ±a − 1 = ±ai‬‬
‫‪ ai‬ﻭ ‪ –ai‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ a ) ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‪(Powers of i) :i‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ‪ i 2 = −1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ i = − 1‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺭﺍﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪i = −1‬‬ ‫‪i 2 = ( − 1) 2 = − 1‬‬ ‫‪i 3 = i 2 ⋅ i = (−1) ⋅ (i) = −i‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ i 4 = i 2 ⋅ i 2 = (−1)(−1) = 1‬ﻳﺎ ‪i 4 = ( − 1) 4 = [( − 1 )]2 = (−1) 2 = 1‬‬
‫‪i 5 = i 4 ⋅ i = (1)(i) = i‬‬ ‫‪i 6 = (i) 4 ⋅ (i) 2 = (1) ⋅ (−1) = −1‬‬
‫‪277‬‬
 ‫‪i 7 = (i) 6 ⋅ (i) = (−1) ⋅ (i) = −i‬‬ ‫‪i 8 = i 7 ⋅ i = (−i) ⋅ (i) = −i 2 = −(−1) = 1‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ‪ n=4‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ )‪ (1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:3‬‬
‫‪i 8 = i 4 ⋅ i 4 = 1 ⋅1 = 1‬‬
‫‪i12 = i 4 ⋅ i 4 ⋅ i 4 = 1 ⋅1 ⋅1 = 1‬‬
‫‪i16 = i 4 ⋅ i 4 ⋅ i 4 ⋅ i 4 = 1 ⋅1 ⋅1 ⋅1 = 1‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪i 4 n = i 4 ⋅ i 4 ...i 4 = 1‬‬
‫‪i 4 n +1 = i 4 n ⋅ i = 1 ⋅ i = i‬‬
‫‪i 4 n + 2 = i 4 n ⋅ i 2 = 1 ⋅ (−1) = −1‬‬
‫‪i 4 n +3 = i 4 n ⋅ i 2 ⋅ i = 1(−1)i = −i‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻃﺎﻗﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ (i) −37 , (i) 61‬ﻭ ‪ (i) 256‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ i1998 ، i 54 :4‬ﻭ ‪ i89‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 54‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ‪ 4‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪i 54 = i 52 ⋅ i 2 = i 4⋅13 ⋅ i 2 = (i 4 )13 ⋅ i 2 = (1) ⋅ i 2 = (1) ⋅ (−1) = −1‬‬
‫‪i1998 = i 4 ( 499 ) ⋅ i 2 = 1 ⋅ i 2 = i 2 = −1‬‬
‫‪i89 = i 4⋅22 ⋅ i = 1 ⋅ i = i‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻥ ‪− 1‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ ‪ i‬ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ − i ,1 , i‬ﻭ ‪ -1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪278‬‬
 ‫ﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ‬
‫}‪ IN = {1,2,3,...‬ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮﻯ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ 3x = 0‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ x = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺯ‪ W = {0,1,2,3,...} :‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x + 2 = 0‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ‪ x = −2‬ﺣﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎﻡ )‪ (Integer Numbers set‬ﻳﺎ }‪I = {...,−2,−1,0,1,2,3,...‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ 2 x + 1 = 2‬ﺣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺣﻞ ﺁﻥ = ‪x‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ )‪ (Rational Numbers set‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﮔﻮﻳﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 2 − 2 = 0‬ﺣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺣﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪ x = 2‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ )‪ (Irrational Numbers set‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ ﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻃﻖ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫)‪ (Real Numbers Set‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ‪x 2 + 1 = 0‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ x 2 + 16 = 0‬ﻛﻪ ﺣﻞ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ − 25 , − 16‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪279‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1795‬ﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻰ ﺩﺍﻥ ﺟﺮﻣﻨﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺱ )‪ (Gauss‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ )‪(Complex Numbers set‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ z‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪ ، z = a + bi‬ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ) ‪ (Real Part of z‬ﻭ ‪ bi‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ)‪ (Imaginary Part of z‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫}‪C = {z | z = a + bi , a , b ∈1R , i 2 = −1‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ z‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪z = a + bi = (a , b) ,‬‬ ‫)‪z = a − bi = (a ,−b‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a=0‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪ Z = 0 + bi = bi :‬ﻛﻪ ‪ bi‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫)‪ (Pure imaginary number‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b=0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ z = a + 0 ⋅ i = a‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ )‪ (Pure real number‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺮﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ )‪ :(Zero complex Number‬ﻋﺪﺩﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )‪ (b = 0 a = 0‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺁﻥ ‪z = a + bi = 0 + 0i = 0‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ 4 + 3i‬ﻭ ‪ 2 − 5i‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ 5i , 3 − 3i , 1 − i‬ﻭ ‪ 2 − 5i‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ‪ 1− i‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﻥ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ‪ –i‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ‪ − 3i‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﻥ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪3 − 3i‬‬
‫‪280‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ 5i‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ‪ 5i‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ 2 − 5i‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ‪ − 5i‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ 9 − i , 0 , − 9 , 6i‬ﻭ ‪ i − 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪ (Standard Form‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ z = a + bi‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ a‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻭ ‪ bi‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫)‪(z = a + bi‬‬
‫‪6i‬‬ ‫‪0 + 6i‬‬
‫‪−9‬‬ ‫‪− 9 + 0i‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0 + 0i‬‬
‫‪9−i‬‬ ‫‪9−i‬‬
‫‪i −1‬‬ ‫‪− 1+ i‬‬
‫‪ z=a+bi‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ‪ bi‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a=0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ bi ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b=0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ a ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺣﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪281‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪202‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪−33‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ )‪ (2i) , (i) , (i) , (i‬ﻭ ‪ (3i) 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪−i−4‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪5i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪− 4i + 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪− 3i‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ 7 − i , 5 + 3i , − 3i‬ﻭ ‪ 5 − 7i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ – i‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪d) 2‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﺟﺬﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ − 16‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a ) ± 4 , b) − 4‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪c) ± 4i , d) ± 2‬‬
‫‪282‬‬
 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻋﻤﻠ‬
‫ﻣﻣﻮﻫ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫‪ͥΚͤ͜ΚͮͨΚ‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ‪ 3i‬ﻭ ‪ 4i‬ﺭﺍﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪ͥΚͤ͞ΚͮΚ‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ‪10i‬‬
‫‪ͥΚ͙ͤ͞͞Κ͚ͮͨΚ‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ 50i‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (a‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:1‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪7i‬ﻭ‪ 8i‬ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪ 5i‬ﻭ ‪7i‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪7i + 8i = (7 + 8)i = 15i‬‬
‫‪7i + 5i = ( 7 + 5)i‬‬
‫‪ (b‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ‪ 7i-4i‬ﻭ ‪ 9i -13i‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪7i − 4i = (7 − 4)i = 3i‬‬
‫‪9i − 13i = (9 − 13)i = −4i‬‬
‫‪ ( c‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ )‪(Real number‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ (10i) ⋅ (5i‬ﻭ )‪ ( 9i) ⋅ ( 4i‬ﺭﺍﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(10i) ⋅ (5i) = (10) ⋅ (5) ⋅ i ⋅ i = 50i 2 = −50‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ i 2 = −1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ‪ 50i 2 = 50 ⋅ (−1) = −50‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ‪ − 50‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ)‪ (Real number‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪( 4i) ⋅ ( 9i) = 4 ⋅ 9 ⋅ i ⋅ i = 36 ⋅ i 2 = 6 ⋅ (−1) = −6 :‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻰ )‪ (Commutative Property‬ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪283‬‬
 ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻰ ‪(ai) ⋅ (bi) = (bi) ⋅ (ai) = −ab‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ ( i) ⋅ (− i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ ( d‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪13i 5i‬‬ ‫‪−7‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ,‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫‪3i 7i‬‬ ‫‪−5‬‬
‫‪5i 5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫)‪1‬‬ ‫) ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ( =‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪7i 7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪13 i‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬
‫)‪2‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫) ‪ 13‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪3i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪−7‬‬ ‫‪−1 7‬‬ ‫‪7i‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫)‪3‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫⋅‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪−5‬‬ ‫‪−1 5‬‬ ‫‪5i‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ 36i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ‪ -2i‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻰ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪− 1b + − 1c‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪−7 + −4 ,‬‬ ‫‪7i+ 7i‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5i− 5i‬‬ ‫‪, 12i − 7i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪5i − 2i‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪13i‬‬ ‫‪16i‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪, (3i) ⋅ (5i) , ( 7 i) ⋅ (−7i) , ( i)(− i‬‬
‫‪26i‬‬ ‫‪− 4i‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪284‬‬
 ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺟﻤ‬
‫ﺟ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻯ ‪ 3x − 2 yi = 6 + i‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻳ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؟‬
‫(‪:‬‬
‫‪(Equall Compl‬‬
‫‪:(Equal‬‬ ‫‪lex Numb‬‬
‫‪Complex‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ))‪bers‬‬
‫)‪Numbers‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ z1 = a + bi‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = x + yi‬ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ x = a‬ﻭ ‪ y = b‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = x1 + 2 y1i‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = 3 − 5i‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ‪ z1 = z 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ y1 = −‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x1 = 3‬ﻭ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = 2 x + 3 yi‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = −5 − 6i‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪ z1 = z 2‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ 2 + mi = k + 3i‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = a + bi‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = c + di‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ z1 + z 2 = (a + bi) + (c + di) = (a + c) + (b + d) ⋅ i‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫‪285‬‬
 ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = 2 − 3i‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = 3 + 4i‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ z1 + z 2 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪z1 + z1 = (2 − 3i) + (3 + 4i) = (2 + 3) + (−3 + 4)i = 5 + i‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪(3 − 4i) + (−2 + 6i) = (3 − 2) + (−4 + 6)i = 1 + 2i‬‬
‫‪(−9 + 7i) + (3 − 15i) = (−9 + 3) + (7 − 15)i = −6 − 8i‬‬
‫‪ 0 + 0i‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ)‪ (additive identity‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (a + bi) + (0 + 0i) = (a + 0) + (b + 0)i = a + bi‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺟﻤﻌﻰ )‪ (additive inverse‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ a + bi‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ − a − bi‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ‪(a + bi) + (−a − bi) = (a − a ) + (b − b)i = 0 + 0i :‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ )‪ (3x − yi) + (5x + 3yi‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺎ ﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻋﺪﺩﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻰ‪(a + bi) − (c + di) = (a − c) + (b − d )i :‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:1‬‬
‫‪(−4 + 3i) − (6 − 7i) = (−4 + 3i) + (−6 + 7i) = −10 + 10i‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:2‬‬
‫‪(12 − 5i) − (8 − 3i) = (12 − 8) + (−5 + 3)i = 4 − 2i‬‬
‫‪286‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ( ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(2 + 5i) + (3 + 4i‬‬ ‫)‪(13 − 12i) + (13 + 12i‬‬
‫)‪(−3 + 6i) + (10 − 7i‬‬ ‫)‪( 3 − ci) + (d + 5ci‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(5 − i) − (7 + 3i‬‬
‫)‪( 2 3 + 5 ⋅ 7 i) − ( 3 + 3 7 i‬‬
‫)‪(3c + 4di) − (3c + 8di‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺟﻤﻌﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 + 3i , (2,−3) ,‬‬ ‫‪2+ 3i‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ) ‪ ( x, y ∈ IR‬ﻭ ‪ 3x + 2iy − ix + 5y = 7 + 5i‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ a + bi‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(2 + 3i) + (−5 + 2i‬‬
‫)‪(−5 − 4i) − (−2 − 2i‬‬
‫)‪(2 + 3i) + (−5 − i‬‬
‫)‪(6 − 5i) + (3 + 2i‬‬
‫)‪(3.7 + 6.1i) − (1 + 5.9i‬‬
‫‪287‬‬
 ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪(8 + i) − (−7 + i‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪(−6 − i) + (4 + i‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪(−2 + 5i) + (3 − i‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫)‪(3 + i) − ( −11 + i‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫)‪( −4 − i) + (13 + i‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫) ‪( −7 − − 72 ) + (8 + − 50‬‬
‫) ‪( 3 + − 2 ) − ( 12 + 8‬‬
‫‪ :6‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻌﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪2 − 3i‬‬ ‫‪8 + 11i‬‬
‫‪1− i‬‬ ‫‪−1 + i‬‬
‫‪5 − 8i‬‬ ‫‪− 13 + 13i‬‬
‫‪− 5i‬‬ ‫‪2i‬‬
‫‪288‬‬
 ‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺮ‬
‫ﺿ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺍ‬
‫ﺁﺎ‬
‫)‪ (2 − 3i)(3 + 4i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪ i 2 = −1‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = a + bi‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = c + di‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪z1 ⋅ z 2 = (a + bi) ⋅ (c + di) = ac + adi + bci + bidi‬‬
‫‪= ac + adi + bci + bdi 2‬‬
‫)‪= ac + (ad + bc)i + bd (−1‬‬
‫‪z1 ⋅ z 2 = (ac − bd ) + (ad + bc)i‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ )‪ (5 − 4i) ⋅ (7 − 2i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪(5 − 4i)(7 − 2i) = 5(7) + 5(−2i) + (−4i)(7) − 4i(−2i) = 35 − 10i − 28i + 8i 2‬‬
‫)‪= 35 − 38i + 8(−1‬‬
‫‪= 35 − 38i − 8‬‬
‫‪= 27 − 38i‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ (2 − 3i)(3 + 4i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ (a + bi)(1 + 0i) = a ⋅1 + a ⋅ 0i + bi ⋅1 + bi ⋅ 0i = a + bi‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪1+ 0i‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ (Multiplicative identity‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ؛‬
‫‪289‬‬
 ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪(3 + 5i)(1 + 0i) = 3 + 5i‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ )‪:(Conjugate of a Complex Number‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ ، z = x + yi‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ z = x − yi‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪z ⋅ z = ( x + yi ) ⋅ ( x − yi ) = x 2 − ( yi ) 2 = x 2 + y 2‬‬
‫‪z ⋅ z = x 2 + y2‬‬
‫‪z + z = ( x + yi ) + ( x − yi ) = 2 x‬‬ ‫)‪2 x = Re( z‬‬
‫‪z − z = ( x + yi ) − ( x − yi ) = 2 yi‬‬ ‫)‪2 yi = Im(z‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ‪ z = 3 + 4i‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ z = 3 − 4i‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z + z , z − z‬ﻭ ‪ z ⋅ z‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫)‪z ⋅ z = (3 + 4i) ⋅ (3 − 4i) = 3(3) + 3(−4i) + 4i(3) + 4i(−4i‬‬
‫‪= 9 − 16i 2 = 9 − 16(−1) = 9 + 16 = 25‬‬
‫‪z + z = (3 + 4i) + (3 − 4i) = 6‬‬ ‫)ﻛﻪ ‪ 6‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪z − z = (3 + 4i) − (3 − 4i) = 8i‬‬ ‫)‪ 8i‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ z 2 = 7 + i , z1 = 5 − 3i‬ﻭ ‪ z 3 = 5 + 7 i‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺰﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪-i‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪1+i‬‬ ‫‪1-i‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪-4-2i‬‬ ‫‪-4+2i‬‬
‫‪-5i-6‬‬ ‫‪5i-6‬‬
‫‪290‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ )‪ (Multiplicative inverse‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ a + bi‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ a − bi‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ (a + bi) ⋅ (a − bi) = a 2 − (b 2i 2 ) = a 2 − b 2 (−1) = a 2 + b 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ‪ a + bi‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪a + bi‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺮﺏ ‪ a − bi‬ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ a-bi) .‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪a − bi‬‬ ‫)‪(a − bi‬‬ ‫‪a − bi‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫⋅‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪a + bi a − bi (a + bi) (a − bi) a 2 + b 2 a 2 + b 2 a 2 + b 2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪a + bi a 2 + b 2 a 2 + b 2‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫( ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ )‪ (a + bi‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪i‬‬
‫‪a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2 − 3i‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 2 + 3i 2 + 3i 2 + 3i 2 + 3i 2 3‬‬
‫⋅‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= + i‬‬
‫‪2 − 3i 2 + 3i 4 − 9i 2 4 + 9‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪13 13‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :4‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﺓ ‪ x 2 + 4‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪x 2 + 4 = x 2 − (−1) ⋅ 4 = x 2 − (i) 2 ⋅ 4 = x 2 − (2i) 2 = ( x − 2i)( x + 2i‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ 5 + 3i‬ﻭ ‪ 2 − 4i‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ﺍ ﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z = x + yi‬ﻭ ‪ w = x′ + y′i‬ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ z ⋅ w ،‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪z ⋅ w = ( xx′ − y y′) + ( xy′ + x′y)i‬‬
‫‪291‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﺤﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫( ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ a + bi‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪i‬‬
‫‪a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(2 + i) (3 − 2i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(3 + i) (3 − i‬‬
‫‪(−2 + 3i) (4 − 2i) ,‬‬ ‫)‪(2 − 5i) (2 + 5i‬‬
‫)‪(5 + 2i) (5 − 3i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫) ‪( 6 + i ) (6 − i‬‬
‫)‪( 3 + 2i) ( 3 − 2i‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1− i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪2 + 4i ,‬‬ ‫)‪5 − 3i , 3a − 4bi , (7,4‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x 2 + 16‬‬ ‫‪, x2 +8‬‬ ‫‪, x2 + 5‬‬ ‫‪, x2 + 7‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ (−3 + 2i) 2‬ﻭ ‪ (2 + i) 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z = 4 − 3i‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ 8z − z 2 ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ x + yi = (2 − 3i)(2 + 3i‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ ، 2 + 2 i :‬ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪ i‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3 1‬‬
‫ﺟﺬﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ - i‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪− i :‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪292‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴ‬
‫‪Di‬‬
‫‪Division‬‬ ‫‪exx‬‬
‫‪of two Complex‬‬
‫‪erss‬‬
‫‪numbers‬‬
‫‪− 2 − 2i‬‬
‫‪− 2 − 2i‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫‪− 5 + 6i‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﻳﺎ‬
‫?=‬ ‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪− 5 + 6i‬‬
‫‪a + bi‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ c‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ‪ di‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪c + di‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ )‪(Rationalization‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ‪ 4 + 3i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 + 5i‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ‪ 2+5i‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2-5i‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ 2 − 5i‬ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪4 + 3i 4 + 3i 2 − 5i 8 − 20i + 6i − 15i 2 8 − 14i − 15(−1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫⋅‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2 + 5i 2 + 5i 2 − 5i 4 − 10i + 10i − 25i 2‬‬ ‫)‪4 − 25(−1‬‬
‫‪23 − 14i 23 14‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪− i‬‬
‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪29 29‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺭﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪ ﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪1+ i‬‬ ‫‪3 + 2i‬‬
‫‪2i‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ )ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ(‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫‪1− i‬‬ ‫‪5−i‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪293‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = a + bi‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = c + di‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ 1 ،‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳ‬
‫ﺍﮔﮔ‬
‫‪z2‬‬
‫‪z1 (a + bi)(c − di) ac − adi + bci − bdi 2 ac + bd − (ad − bc)i‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫)‪z 2 (c + di)(c − di‬‬ ‫‪c 2 − d 2i 2‬‬ ‫‪c2 + d 2‬‬
‫‪ac + bd ad − bc‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪c2 + d 2 c2 + d 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ z1 = 2 − 3i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ z 2 =1 + i‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪z 2 − 3i (2 − 3i)(1 − i) − 1 − 5i‬‬ ‫‪1 5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=− − i‬‬
‫‪z2 1+ i‬‬ ‫)‪(1 + i)(1 − i‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪1 5‬‬ ‫‪1 5 1 5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪(1 + i) (− − i) = − − i − i − i 2 = − − 3i + = 2 − 3i‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬ ‫‪2 2 2 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :3‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ‪ 3 + 2i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5−i‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪3 + 2i (3 + 2i) (5 + i) 15 + 3i + 10i + 2i 2 15 + 13i − 2 13 + 13i 1 1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= + i‬‬
‫)‪5 − i (5 − i)(5 + i‬‬ ‫‪25 − i 2‬‬ ‫‪25 + 1‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z = x + yi‬ﻭ ‪ w = x ′ + y′i‬ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪z xx ′ + yy′ x ′y − xy′‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪i ,‬‬ ‫)‪( x ′2 + y′2 ≠ 0‬‬
‫‪w x ′ 2 + y ′ 2 x ′ 2 + y′ 2‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1‬ﻭ ‪ z 2‬ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪1‬‬ ‫‪z1 + z 2 = z1 + z 2‬‬ ‫)‪2‬‬ ‫‪z1 − z 2 = z1 − z 2‬‬
‫‪294‬‬
 z1 z1
3) z1 ⋅ z 2 = z1 ⋅ z 2 = z 2 ⋅ z1 4) ( ) =
z2 z2
5) z + z = 2 x 6) z − z = 2 yi
7) z = z
‫ ﻭ‬z1 + z 2 = z1 + z 2 :‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬z 2 = −3 + 2i ‫ ﻭ‬z1 = 4 + 5i ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:1‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
z ⋅ z = z ⋅ z2
1 2 1
:‫ﺣﻞ‬
z1 + z 2 = (4 + 5i) + (−3 + 2i) = 1 + 7i ⇒ z1 + z 2 = 1 − 7i
z1 + z 2 = (4 − 5i) + (−3 − 2i) = 1 − 7i
z1 + z 2 = z1 + z 2 ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
z1 ⋅ z 2 = (4 + 5i) ⋅ (−3 + 2i) = −12 − 10 + (8 − 15)i = −22 − 7i
⇒ z ⋅ z 2 = −22 + 7i
z1 ⋅ z 2 = (4 − 5i) ⋅ (−3 − 2i) = −12 − 8i + 15i + 10i 2 = −12 − 8i + 15i − 10
= −22 + 7i
z1 ⋅ z 2 = z1 ⋅ z 2 = −22 + 7i :‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬z − z ‫ ﻭ‬z + z ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬z = x + yi ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ‬:2‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
z + z = ( x + yi) + ( x − yi) = 2 x , z − z = ( x + yi ) − ( x − yi ) = 2 yi :‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬z − z ‫ ﻭ‬z , z + z ،‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬z = 2 + 3i ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺍﮔ‬
295
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -11‬ﺧﺎ‬
‫‪7−i‬‬ ‫‪5 − 2i‬‬ ‫‪3 − 4i‬‬ ‫‪1+ i‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪3 − 5i‬‬ ‫‪6−i‬‬ ‫‪2 − 5i‬‬ ‫‪1 −1‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = −a − 3bi‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = 2a − 3bi‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ z1 ⋅ z 2 = z1 ⋅ z 2‬ﻭ ‪ ⎜⎛ z1 ⎟⎞ = z1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫⎟ ⎜‬
‫‪⎝ z2 ⎠ z2‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ a + bi‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3−i‬‬ ‫‪2 − 3i‬‬
‫‪a:‬‬ ‫‪b:‬‬ ‫‪c:‬‬
‫‪5−i‬‬ ‫‪2+i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪6 + − 36‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪3+ −9‬‬
‫‪a :1‬‬ ‫‪b:‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪c : 3i‬‬ ‫‪d: −2‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ a + bi‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 + 4i ,‬‬ ‫‪−5‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪4i‬‬ ‫‪2 − 3i‬‬ ‫‪1 + 3i‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪− 4 + 8i‬‬ ‫‪3 − 2i‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪7 − 2i‬‬ ‫‪2 − 4i‬‬ ‫‪− 6 + 4i‬‬
‫‪− 4 + 8i‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪2 − 4i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪296‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ‬‫ﺣ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻣﺠ‬
‫‪x2 + x + 4 = 0‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 2 + x + 4 = 0‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻳﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫? = ‪x1‬‬
‫? = ‪x2‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﻪ ‪ ax 2 + bx + c = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = b 2 − 4ac > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﻪ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :1‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 2 − 10x + 26 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ a = 1 b = −10 c = 26 :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪− b ± b 2 − 4ac 10 ± (−10) 2 − 4 ⋅1 ⋅ 26 10 ± − 4‬‬
‫= ‪x1, 2‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪2 ⋅1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪10 ± 2i‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪= 5±i‬‬ ‫‪⇒ x1 = 5 + i‬‬ ‫‪x2 = 5 − i‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ 4x 2 + 4i x + 15 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‬
‫‪Δ = b 2 − 4 ac = (4i) 2 − 4.4.15 = 16 i 2 − 240 = −256‬‬
‫‪± Δ = ± − 256 = 256(−1) = ±16i‬‬
‫‪297‬‬
 ‫‪− 4i + 16i 12 i 3‬‬ ‫‪− 4i − 16i‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫= ‪x1‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= i‬‬ ‫= ‪x2‬‬ ‫‪=− i‬‬
‫‪2⋅4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ x 2 + 3ix − 2 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ = b 2 − 4ac = (3i) 2 − 4 ⋅1⋅ (−2) = 32 ⋅ i 2 + 8 = −9 + 8 = −1‬‬
‫‪± Δ = ± − 1 = ±i‬‬
‫‪− 3i ± i‬‬ ‫‪− 4i‬‬ ‫‪− 2i‬‬
‫= ‪x1, 2‬‬ ‫= ‪x1‬‬ ‫‪= −2i‬‬ ‫= ‪x2‬‬ ‫‪= −i‬‬
‫‪2 ⋅1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ x 2 − 6x +‬ﻭ ‪ x 2 − 4x + 13 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻯ ‪18 = 0 ، x 2 + 3 = 0‬‬
‫‪+18‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻟ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ (1‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ (3 + 2i‬ﻭ ) ‪ (3 − 2 i‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x 2 − 4 x + 13 = 0 , x 2 − 6 x + 18 = 0 , − 4 x 2 + 3x − 5 = 0‬‬
‫‪x 2 + 8x + 41 = 0 , x 4 − 1 = 0‬‬ ‫‪, 3x 2 + x + 2 = 0‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪2 + 5i , 2 − 5i‬‬ ‫‪1+ i , 1− i‬‬
‫‪4i , − 4i‬‬ ‫‪5i‬‬ ‫‪, − 5i‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪3i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪2 1‬‬ ‫‪2 1‬‬
‫‪+ i ,‬‬ ‫‪− i‬‬ ‫‪2−i‬‬ ‫‪, 2+i‬‬
‫‪3 2‬‬ ‫‪3 2‬‬
‫‪298‬‬
 ‫ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪i 2 = −1 ⇒ i = − 1‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪
t‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪− 1‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ C‬ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫}‪C = {z / z = a + bi , a , b ∈ IR , i = − 1‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ z = a + bi‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ‪ z‬ﻭ ‪ bi‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ‪ z‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ )‪ bi = img (z‬ﻭ ) ‪a = Re(z‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪ ، i‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ‪ 4‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻮﺭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ i‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ i 4 k + r = i r :‬ﻳﺎ ‪(i)1379 = i 4⋅344 ⋅ i 3 = (1)(i) 3 = −i‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ b = 0 ، z = a + bi‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ a ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪a = 0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ bi‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺁﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ (a = 0, b = 0) ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺻﻔﺮﻯ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ z1‬ﻭ ‪ z2‬ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ Re(z1 ) = Re(z 2 ) .‬ﻭ ) ‪Im g (z1 ) = Im g (z 2‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪299‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = x1 + y1 i‬ﻭ ‪ z2 = x2 + y2i‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪z1 + z 2 = ( x1 + x 2 ) + ( y1 + y 2 )i‬‬
‫‪z1 − z 2 = ( x1 − x 2 ) + ( y1 − y 2 )i‬‬
‫= ‪z1 .z 2‬‬ ‫‪x1 x 2 − y1 y 2 + ( x1 y 2 + y1 x 2 )i‬‬
‫‪z1‬‬ ‫‪x1 x 2 + y1 y 2 y1 x 2 − y 2 x1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪i ,‬‬ ‫)‪(z 2 ≠ 0‬‬
‫‪z2‬‬ ‫‪x 22 + y 22‬‬ ‫‪x 22 + y 22‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ‪ z = x + yi‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Z = x − yi‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪zz = x 2 + y 2‬‬ ‫‪z1 + z 2 = z1 + z 2‬‬
‫‪z + z = 2x‬‬ ‫‪z1 − z 2 = z1 − z 2‬‬
‫‪z − z = 2 yi‬‬ ‫‪z1 ⋅ z 2 = z1 ⋅ z 2 = z 2 ⋅ z1‬‬
‫‪z1‬‬ ‫‪z1‬‬
‫(‬ ‫)‬ ‫=‬
‫‪z2‬‬ ‫‪z2‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺟﻤﻌﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ z = a + bi‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ − a − bi‬ﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2‬‬
‫‪ 0 + 0i = (0,0)
t‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻭ ‪ 1 + 0i‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪300‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ (i)51 (1‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪c) i‬‬ ‫‪d) − i‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ‪ i −98‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬ ‫‪c) i‬‬ ‫‪d) − i‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ‪ i‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪−i‬‬ ‫‪b) 1‬‬ ‫‪c) − 1‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ 7i − 4i (4‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪− 3i‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪3i‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪d) − 3‬‬
‫‪ 3i ⋅ 4i (5‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪− 12‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪c) 12i‬‬ ‫‪d ) − 12i‬‬
‫‪64i‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(6‬‬
‫‪a) − 8‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫‪8i‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬ ‫‪− 8i‬‬ ‫‪8i‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ i ⋅ i (7‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬
‫‪a) −‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪c) −‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬
‫‪− 11‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(8‬‬
‫‪−5‬‬
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪− 11‬‬ ‫‪− 11‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪−1 5‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(9‬‬
‫‪−1 ⋅ 5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪b) −‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺟﺰء ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪301‬‬
 ‫‪xi‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(10‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪−x‬‬ ‫‪xi‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪yi‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪ (11‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(3 + 4i) + (2 + 5i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(a + bi) + (c + di‬‬
‫)‪(1 + i) + (1 − i‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(2 + 3i) + (2 − 3i‬‬
‫‪ (12‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪(4 + 3i) − (4 + 4i) ,‬‬ ‫)‪(3 − 2i) − (3 + 2i‬‬
‫‪(4 + 4i) − (4 + 3i) ,‬‬ ‫)‪(1 + i) − (1 − i‬‬
‫‪ (2a + ib) − (2a − ib) (13‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪− ib‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪− 2ib‬‬ ‫‪c) 2ib‬‬ ‫‪d ) 4a‬‬
‫‪ (14‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ )‪ (2 − 3i)(2 + 3i‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a ) − 13‬‬ ‫‪b) 13i‬‬ ‫‪c) 13‬‬ ‫‪d ) 9i‬‬
‫‪(15‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ a+bi‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪4(2 + 5i) − (3 − 4i) , (4 − 3i)(2 + i‬‬
‫‪i(3 − 2i) 2‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪i 51‬‬
‫‪ (16‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ z1 = 2 − 4i‬ﻭ ‪ z 2 = 1 − i‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪z1‬‬ ‫‪z1‬‬
‫‪z1 + z 2 = z1 + z 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪z1 ⋅ z 2 = z1 ⋅ z 2 ,‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫)‬ ‫=‬
‫‪z2‬‬ ‫‪z2‬‬
‫‪ (17‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺟﻤﻌﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺿﺮﺑﻰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3x − yi , 2a − bi , 2 + 5i , − 7 + 3i , − 6 + 2i , 3 − i ,‬‬ ‫‪2 +i‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ (18‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ 5 x 2 + 2 x + 1 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪302‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻰ‬
 ‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺨﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻳﻜﺠﺎ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻧﺎﻧﻰ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً )‪ (300‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻮﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫)‪ (Euclid‬ﺳﻴﺰﺩﻩ )‪ (13‬ﺟﻠﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮﻯ ﺭﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﺎﺭﺗﺲ‬
‫)‪ (Rene Descartes‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ )‪ 1596-1650‬ﺏ‪.‬ﻡ( ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻰ )‪ (Analytic geometry‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻫﻤﺂﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫)‪ (Coordinate geometry‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ )‪ 1637‬ﻡ( ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ )‪ (La geometry‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﺺ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺮ ﻳﻜﺠﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻠﺺ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺩﻧﺖ‬
‫)‪(Coordinate system‬‬
‫ﺁﻳــﺎ ﻧﻘــﺎﻁ )‪، (−4,7) ، (2,2) ، (0,−1‬‬
‫)‪ (2,0‬ﻭ )‪ (0,−2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ '‪ XX‬ﻭ '‪ YY‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ )‪ (O‬ﺑﻨﺎﻣﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ O‬ﺭﺍﻣﺒﺪﺍ )‪ (Origin‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺩﻳﻨﺖ )‪ (Coordinate axises‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ '‪ XOX‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ '‪ YOY‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ Y‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪ p‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬
‫) ‪ (OrderPair‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ p‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ Y‬ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ S‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ R‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ OR = x‬ﻭ ‪ OS = y‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ )‪ ( x, y‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ) ‪ ( x, y‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪X‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﺰﻳﻨﻰ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺩﻳﻨﺖ )‪(Coordinate System‬‬
‫‪305‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ x‬ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺟﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ y‬ﻳﺎ )‪(y-Coordinate‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺩﻳﻨﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻊ )‪ (quadrants‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ y > 0 ، x > 0‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ y > 0 ، x < 0‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ y < 0 ، x < 0‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻊ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ‪ x > 0‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ y < 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ E (0,2) D(3,−5) C (2,5) ، B(−4,−2) ، A(−2,3‬ﻭ )‪ F (−2,0‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪
t‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ y‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﻪ ‪ x‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (0,4) ، (−2,−3) ، (2,−3) ، (−2,3) ، (2,3‬ﻭ )‪ (4,0‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪:(Distance between two points‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(4,8‬ﻭ )‪ B(1,2‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﻭ ) ‪ P2 ( x2 , y2‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪306‬‬
 ‫‪Δ‬‬
‫‪ P1‬ﻭ ‪ P2‬ﻳﺎ ‪ d = P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ P P P3‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪(P1 P2 ) 2 = (P1 P3 ) 2 + (P2 P3 ) 2‬‬
‫‪d = P1 P2 = ( x 2 − x1 ) 2 + ( y 2 − y1 ) 2‬‬
‫‪= ( x1 − x 2 ) 2 + ( y1 − y 2 ) 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﻭ ) ‪ P2 ( x2 , y2‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ y1 = y2‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (a‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪d = P1 P2 = ( x 2 − x1 ) 2 + 0 = x 2 − x1‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P1‬ﻭ ‪ P2‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ x1 = x2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (b‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪d = P1 P2 = 0 + ( y 2 − y1 ) 2 = ( y 2 − y1 ) = y 2 − y1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(2‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ P (3,−2‬ﻭ )‪ P (−1,−5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪307‬‬
 ‫‪P1P2 = (x1 − x 2 ) 2 + (y1 − y 2 ) 2 = ( x 2 − x1 ) 2 + ( y 2 − y1 ) 2‬‬
‫‪= (−1 − 3) 2 + [−5 − (−2)]2 = (−4) 2 + (−3) 2 = 25 = 5‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ P1 (8,0‬ﻭ )‪ P2 (2,0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(3‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ )‪ B (2,1) ، A(−2,−3‬ﻭ )‪C (−2,5‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪AB = [2 − (−2)]2 + [1 − (−3)]2 = 32‬‬
‫‪BC = (−2 − 2) 2 + (5 − 1) 2‬‬ ‫‪= 32‬‬
‫‪CA = [−2 − (−2)]2 + [5 − (−3)]2 = 64‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪AB + BC = 32 + 32 = 64‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪CA = 64‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ‪ CA 2 = AB 2 + BC 2 :‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ A B C‬ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ B(3,−5) ، A(−6,3‬ﻭ )‪ C (−1,5‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(4‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ C (0,0‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ )‪ P(3,4‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪308‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪PC = R = ( x 2 − x1 ) 2 + ( y 2 − y1 ) 2 = (3 − 0) 2 + (4 − 0) 2‬‬
‫‪= 9 + 16 = 25 = 5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ y‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ x‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ) ‪ P( x1 , y1‬ﻭ ) ‪ Q( x2 , y2‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ d = PQ = ( x 2 − x1 ) 2 + ( y 2 − y1 ) 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪309‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ‪ 15‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫)‪A : ( 176 ,7‬‬
‫)‪B : (10,−10‬‬
‫)‪C : (1,15‬‬
‫‪15 15‬‬
‫(‪A:‬‬ ‫) ‪,‬‬
‫‪2 2‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ B( 3, 1) ، A(0,2‬ﻭ )‪ C (0,−2‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (0,5‬ﻭ )‪ (0,−3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪−3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ B(−1,‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(− ,3‬ﻭ )‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (7,11‬ﻭ )‪ (1,3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (3,6‬ﻭ )‪ (1,2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (3,7‬ﻭ )‪ (12,19‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪310‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻳﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳــﻄﻰ‬
‫ﺧــﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻛــﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘــﺎﻁ )‪ A(3,1‬ﻭ‬
‫)‪ B(−2,4‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ ( x, y‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪r‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪P1 P‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ P1 M P‬ﻭ ‪ P N P2‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ‪= r‬‬
‫‪PP2‬‬
‫‪P1P P1M x − x1‬‬ ‫‪P1P PM y − y1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=r‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=r‬‬
‫‪PP2‬‬ ‫‪PN x 2 − x‬‬ ‫‪PP2 P2 N y 2 − y‬‬
‫‪x − x1 = rx 2 − rx‬‬ ‫‪y − y1 = ry 2 − ry‬‬
‫‪x + rx = rx 2 + x1‬‬ ‫‪y + ry = ry 2 + y1‬‬
‫‪(1 + r ) x = rx 2 + x1‬‬ ‫‪(1 + r ) y = ry 2 + y1‬‬
‫‪x + rx 2‬‬ ‫‪y + ry 2‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1+ r‬‬ ‫‪1+ r‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ )‪ :(1‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪ P1 (−6,3‬ﻭ )‪ P2 (5,−2‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪PP‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ =‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫‪PP2 3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪311‬‬
 ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪x1 = −6 , x 2 = 5 , r‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪⋅5 − 6‬‬
‫‪rx + x‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪= 3‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫‪1+ r‬‬ ‫‪1+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪−4‬‬
‫‪(−2) + 3‬‬ ‫‪+3‬‬
‫‪ry 2 + y1 3‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 3‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪1+ r‬‬ ‫‪1+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪−8‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P( ,1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴــﺒﺖ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ ، P‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ r > 0‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ r < 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ p‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ r‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣــﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P1 P‬ﻭ ‪ PP2‬ﻫﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ‪ r > 0‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ P‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ P1P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ r‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ‪ P1P‬ﻭ ‪ PP2‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ r < 0‬ﻣﻰ‬
‫‪P1 P‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪= −r .‬‬
‫‪PP2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(2‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪P1 (−8,4‬‬
‫ﻭ )‪ P2 (2,−1‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ :b‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : a‬ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ ‪:a‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫=‪r‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪⋅2−8‬‬ ‫‪(−1) + 4‬‬
‫‪rx + x‬‬ ‫‪− 20‬‬ ‫‪ry + y‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪= 3‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= −4 , y = 2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪= 3‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=2‬‬
‫‪1+ r‬‬ ‫‪1+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1+ r‬‬ ‫‪1+‬‬‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪312‬‬
 ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴــﺒﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (−4,2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ :b‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ P‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪r=−‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬
‫‪( )⋅2−8‬‬ ‫‪( )(−1) + 4‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪= −28 , y = 3‬‬ ‫‪= 14‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1−‬‬ ‫‪1−‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻄﻰ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴــﺒﺖ ﺗﻘﺴــﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻰ ﺑﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﺭﺕ ﺍﺯﺯ )‪ ((−28,14‬ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(4,6‬ﻭ )‪B(−2,3‬‬
‫ﻛ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ P1 P2‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ r = 1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪x +x‬‬ ‫‪y + y2‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ y= 1‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(3‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻄﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (−10,4‬ﻭ )‪(7,−5‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x +x‬‬ ‫‪− 10 + 7‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪y +y‬‬ ‫‪4−5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪=−‬‬ ‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪313‬‬
 ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ r‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ x = rx 2 + x1 , y = ry 2 + y1‬ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳــﻄﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ P1 P2‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪1+ r‬‬ ‫‪1+ r‬‬
‫‪x1 + x 2‬‬ ‫‪y1 + y 2‬‬
‫= ‪ x‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ P P‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ r‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ r‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ r‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳــﻄﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ، AB‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (2,−1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫)‪ A(−1,−3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(3,1‬ﻭ )‪ B(−2,−4‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(4,6‬ﻭ )‪B (−2,3‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :b‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : a‬ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪314‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫)‪(Slope of a straight Line‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣــﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺳــﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ θ‬ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷــﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷــﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ θ = 0‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ θ = 90°‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳــﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ )‪ (inclined plane‬ﺑــﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻴــﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ)‪ (run‬ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤــﻮﺩﻯ ) ‪ (rise‬ﺭﺍﻃﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ AB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ m‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪rise y‬‬
‫=‪m‬‬ ‫‪= = tan θ‬‬
‫‪run x‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ tan‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ 0 < θ < 90°‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ 90° < θ < 180°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ θ = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ tan 0° = 0‬ﺍﺳــﺖ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ θ = 90°‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ tan 90°‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪315‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﭼﻰ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﻴــﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷــﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄــﺔ ) ‪ P(x y‬ﻭ ) ‪ Q ( x , y‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1 1‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪y 2 − y1 y1 − y 2‬‬
‫= ‪ m = tan θ‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x 2 − x1 x1 − x 2‬‬
‫∧‬ ‫∧‬
‫‪RPQ = θ‬‬
‫‪PR = x 2 − x1‬‬
‫‪QR = y 2 − y1‬‬
‫‪QR y 2 − y1‬‬
‫= ‪m = tan θ‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪PR x 2 − x1‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳــﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪B،A‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ AB‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ BC‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ B،A‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﺭﻭﻯ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ P (2,4‬ﻭ )‪ P (6,10‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪y 2 − y1 10 − 4 6 3‬‬
‫=‪m‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= =‬
‫‪x 2 − x1‬‬ ‫‪6−2 4 2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪y1 − y 2 4 − 10 − 6 3‬‬
‫=‪m‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x1 − x 2‬‬ ‫‪2−6 −4 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(2‬ﻧﺸــﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ B(3,2) ، A(−3,6‬ﻭ )‪ C (6,0‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2−6‬‬ ‫‪−4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪AB‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫)‪3 − (−3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪316‬‬
 ‫‪0−2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪BC‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫‪6−3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﭼــﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ AB‬ﻭ ‪ BC‬ﻣﺴــﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻧــﺪ‪ .‬ﭘــﺲ ﻧﻘــﺎﻁ ‪B،A‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﺑــﺎﻻﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ t‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (−2,4‬ﻭ ) ‪ (5,1‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳــﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (7,5) ، (4,−5‬ﻭ )‪ (10,15‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ l1‬ﻭ ‪ l2‬ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷــﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ m1‬ﻭ ‪ m2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ‪ l1‬ﺑﺎ ‪ l2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪m1 = m2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ θ1 = θ2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪tan θ1 = tan θ 2‬‬
‫‪m1 = m 2‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ l1‬ﻭ ‪ l2‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ m = − 1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ . m m + 1 = 0‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪m2‬‬
‫‪ m1 ⋅ m2 = −1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﻭ ) ‪ P2 ( x2 , y2‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ‬
‫‪317‬‬
 ‫‪y 2 − y1 y1 − y 2‬‬
‫= ‪ m‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺂﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x 2 − x1 x1 − x 2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (3,−2‬ﻭ )‪ (2,7‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔــﺮ )‪ B(−4,2) ، A(8,6‬ﻭ )‪ C (−2,−6‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫــﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﺎﺷــﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻫﺮ ﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (c, a + b) ، (a,2b‬ﻭ ) ‪(2c − a,2a‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ AB‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(1,−2‬ﻭ )‪ B(2,4‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ CD‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪ C (4,1‬ﻭ )‪ D(−8,2‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - c‬ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ - b‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪ - a‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ y = 3‬ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x = 3‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - c‬ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ - b‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪ - a‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x = −1‬ﻭ ‪ x = 3‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - c‬ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ - b‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪ - a‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ y = − 3‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪∞ -d‬‬ ‫‪− 1 -c‬‬ ‫‪ -b‬ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪1 -a‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x = 0,03‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -d‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪− 1 -c‬‬ ‫‪ -b‬ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪1 -a‬‬
‫‪318‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(Equation of a straight Line‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ CD‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷــﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ y‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷــﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ‪ b‬ﺑﻨﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ y = b‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪X‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴــﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫)‪ (2,3‬ﻣﻰ ﮔــﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ y = 3 :‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪319‬‬
 ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟـﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻤــﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ Y‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ Y‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪Y‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ‪ a‬ﺑﻨﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ x = a‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ Y‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (2,3‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪ x = 2 :‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟـﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃـﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ P( x, y‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻭ )‪ C (0, b‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪y−b y−b‬‬
‫=‪m‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x −0‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ y − b = mx‬ﻳﺎ ‪y = mx + b‬‬
‫‪320‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ b = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ y = mx‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -a‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ 5‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ -b‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ ( − 6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ m = 2 :a‬ﻭ ‪b = 5‬‬
‫‪y = mx + b ⇒ y = 2 x + 5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪m =−‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬ ‫‪ :b‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ =‬
‫‪−6 6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪m1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫= ‪ m‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫= ‪b‬ﻭ‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫= ‪y = mx + b ⇒ y‬‬ ‫‪x+‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻛــﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷــﻜﺎﻝ ‪ 6 y − x = 8 ، 6 y = x + 8‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ x − 6 y + 8 = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪ m‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ Q( x1 , y1‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ p ( x, y‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ) ‪ Q( x1 , y1‬ﻭ ) ‪P( x, y‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪y − y1‬‬
‫=‪m‬‬ ‫) ‪⇒ y − y1 = m( x − x1‬‬
‫‪x − x1‬‬
‫‪321‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(4‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ )‪ (−2‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (5,1‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪y − y1 = m( x − x1‬‬
‫)‪y − 1 = −2( x − 5‬‬
‫‪y = −2 x + 11‬‬
‫‪2 x + y − 11 = 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ) ‪ Q( x1 , y1‬ﻭ ) ‪ R( x2 , y2‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ) ‪ P( x, y‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪y − y1 y − y 2 y 2 − y1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x − x1 x − x 2 x 2 − x1‬‬
‫‪y − y1 y 2 − y1‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪x − x1 x 2 − x1‬‬
‫‪y 2 − y1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫= ‪y − y1‬‬ ‫) ‪( x − x1‬‬
‫‪x 2 − x1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(5‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (−2,1‬ﻭ )‪ (6,−4‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪− 4 −1‬‬
‫= ‪y −1‬‬ ‫])‪[ x − (−2‬‬ ‫‪y1 = 1, x1 = −2 , y 2 = −4 , x 2 = 6‬‬
‫)‪6 − (−2‬‬
‫‪−5‬‬
‫= ‪y −1‬‬ ‫)‪( x + 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪5x + 8 y + 2 = 0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ :6‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ P( x, y‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‪ a‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ b‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ A(a,0‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ B(0, b‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ B ، A‬ﻭ ‪ P‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪ x = a , y = 0 x = 0 , y = b :‬ﻣﻰ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪322‬‬
 ‫‪y −y‬‬ ‫‪b−0‬‬
‫= ‪y − y1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪( x − x1 ) , y − 0‬‬ ‫) ‪( x − a ) ⇒ − ay = b( x − a‬‬
‫‪x 2 − x1‬‬ ‫‪0−a‬‬
‫‪− ay = bx − ab‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ‪ ab‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪bx + ay = ab‬‬
‫‪x y‬‬
‫‪+ =1‬‬
‫‪a b‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ)‪ :(6‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤــﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ )‪ (2,0‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫)‪ (0,−4‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ a = 2 :‬ﻭ ‪ b = −4‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x y‬‬
‫‪+ =1‬‬
‫‪a b‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪ 2 x − y − 4 = 0‬ﻳﺎ ‪= 1‬‬
‫‪2 −4‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ )‪ :(7‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ O A B‬ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪AB‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺿﻠﻊ ‪ AB‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ P(2,3‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ AB‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ AB = a − 0 = −1‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪0−a‬‬
‫‪323‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ )‪ (−1‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(2,3‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫)‪y − 3 = −1( x − 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪x+ y −5= 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ y = mx + b‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ y − y1 = m( x − x1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪y −y‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ y − y1 = 2 1 ( x − x1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪x2 − x1‬‬
‫‪x y‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪+ = 1 .‬‬
‫‪a b‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﺩﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻌﺎ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ X‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (7,−9‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :b‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (−5,3‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪ 7‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (−6,5‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :b‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (8,−3‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :c‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (−8,5‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (−5,−3‬ﻭ )‪ (9,−1‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :e‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪ − 4‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ − 9‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ )‪ B(5,4) ، A(−3,2‬ﻭ‬
‫)‪ C(3,−8‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (−4,−6‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪−3‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (11,−5‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ ( − 24‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪324‬‬
 ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺁﻳــﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧــﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﺯﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ p‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ‪ Q‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ x cosQ + y sin Q = P‬ﻳﺎ ‪x cosQ + y sin Q − P = 0‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ B‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ P( x, y‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺧﻂ ‪ AB‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ OR‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪OR = P‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ OR‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﻣﻴﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ P‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ O R A‬ﻭ ‪ O R B‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬
‫= ‪cos θ‬‬ ‫= ‪OA‬‬
‫‪OA‬‬ ‫‪cos θ‬‬
‫= ‪ OB‬ﻳﺎ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬
‫= )‪cos(90° − θ‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪OB‬‬ ‫‪cos(90o − θ) sin θ‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‪ cos( 90° − θ) = sin θ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ AB‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ )‪ (OA,0‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ )‪ (0, OB‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؛‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ AB‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪OA OB‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬
‫‪cosQ sin Q‬‬
‫‪325‬‬
 ‫‪x cosQ + y sin Q = P‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ‪ x cosQ + y sin Q = P‬ﻳــﺎ ‪ x cosQ + y sin Q − P = 0‬ﻋﺒــﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ )‪ :(1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺴــﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ 5‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ )ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ( ‪ 120°‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ l‬ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ Q = 120° :‬ﻭ ‪ P = 5‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x cos120° + y sin 120° = 5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪− x+‬‬ ‫‪y=5‬‬ ‫‪(cos120° = −‬‬ ‫= ‪, sin 120°‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪x − 3y + 10 = 0‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ l‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ y = mx + b‬ﻣﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 10‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ (0,‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ m = 1 ،l‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ‪ 10‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 30°‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪(General equation of a straight Line):‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ ax + by + c = 0‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﻭﻣﺘﺤﻮﻝ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ b ،a‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ a .‬ﻭ‪ b‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪ x = −‬ﻳﺎ ‪ax + c = 0‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a ≠ 0‬ﻭ ‪ b = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪326‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ −‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪y=−‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a = 0‬ﻭ ‪ b ≠ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ by + c = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪−c‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ a ≠ 0‬ﻭ ‪ b ≠ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪−a‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫= ‪ y‬ﻳﺎ ‪by = −ax − c‬‬ ‫‪x − = mx + b‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫‪−c‬‬ ‫‪−a‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫= ‪ m‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ‪ ax + by + c = 0‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ y = − a x − c = mx + b‬ﻳﺎ ‪by = −ax − c‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫‪−c‬‬ ‫‪−a‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫= ‪ m‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ‪ :2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 5x − 12 y + 39 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷــﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻴــﺎﺭﻯ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪12 y = 5x + 39‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪x+‬‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ = ‪ m‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪327‬‬
 ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ ax + by + c = 0‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪ − a‬ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺁﻥ )‪ ( − c ,0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫‪−a‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪−a‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫) ‪(x +‬‬ ‫= ‪m = tan θ‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 5x − 12 y + 39 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 5x − 12 y + 39 = 0‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ ( − 39 ,0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻴﻞ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ‬
‫) ‪y − y1 = m( x − x1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫= ‪y−0‬‬ ‫‪(x + ) ⇒ y = x +‬‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪−c‬‬ ‫‪−c‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ ax + by + c = 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ ( ,0‬ﻭ ) ‪ (0,‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪−c‬‬ ‫‪−c‬‬
‫‪y1 = 0‬‬ ‫= ‪x1‬‬ ‫= ‪y2‬‬ ‫‪x2 = 0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫‪y 2 − y1‬‬
‫= ‪y − y1‬‬ ‫) ‪( x − x1‬‬
‫‪x 2 − x1‬‬
‫‪−c‬‬ ‫‪−c‬‬
‫‪−0‬‬
‫‪y−0 = b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫= ) ‪(x +‬‬ ‫) ‪b (x + c ) = − c ⋅ a (x + c‬‬
‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b c‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪0+‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪−a‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫) ‪(x +‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(4‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 5x − 12 y + 39 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ‬
‫‪328‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺧﻂ ‪ 5x − 12 y + 39 = 0‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ) ‪ P2 (0, 39‬ﻭ )‪ P1 ( − 39 ,0‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪y 2 − y1‬‬ ‫‪ y − y1 = y 2 − y1‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫= ‪y − y1‬‬ ‫) ‪( x − x1‬‬ ‫‪x − x1 x 2 − x1‬‬
‫‪x 2 − x1‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪−0‬‬
‫‪y−0‬‬
‫‪= 12‬‬
‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫‪x+‬‬ ‫‪0+‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ax + by + c = 0‬‬
‫‪ax + by = −c‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ )‪ (−c‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ax by‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪−c −c‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪−c −c‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(5‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ 5x − 12 y + 39 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5x − 12 y = −39‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ‪ − 39‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪5x 12 y‬‬
‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪− 39 − 39‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪39 39‬‬
‫‪−‬‬
‫‪5 12‬‬
‫‪329‬‬
 ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫‪(0,‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (− ,0‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻂ ‪ 3x − 2 y = 6‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ، Y‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :5‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ‪ x cos θ + y sin θ = P‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ ax + by + c = 0‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ax + by = −c‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺸــﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﻨﺪ؛ ﭘﺲ ﻧﺴــﺒﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪−c‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ K‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=k‬‬
‫‪cos θ sin θ P‬‬
‫‪P cos θ sin θ‬‬ ‫‪cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪−c‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ‪cos 2 θ sin 2 θ cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ :‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪a 2 + b2‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫= ‪ cos θ‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫= ‪ sin θ‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ‪ x cos θ + y sin θ = P = 0‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ sin Q‬ﻭ ‪ cosQ‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ax‬‬ ‫‪by‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪=0‬‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2 ± a 2 + b2 ± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫‪ax + by‬‬ ‫‪−c‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2 ± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪=k ,‬‬ ‫‪=k‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪sin θ‬‬ ‫‪cos θ‬‬
‫‪330‬‬
 ‫ﭘﺲ‪k 2 cos 2 θ = a 2 ، k sin Q = b ، k cosQ = a ، k sin Q = b :‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪k 2 cos 2 θ + k 2 sin 2 θ = a 2 + b 2‬‬
‫‪k 2 (cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ) = a 2 + b 2‬‬
‫‪k = ± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ ax + by = −c‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ K‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ax + by + c‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪= 0‬‬ ‫‪x+‬‬ ‫‪y=−‬‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ p‬ﻫﺮﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ‪ c‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ c = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ b‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(6‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 2x − 3y + 6 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣــﻞ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ‪ 2 2 + (−32 ) = ± 13‬ﺗﻘﺴــﻴﻢ ﻣــﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ‪ 13‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪x+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪−‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪=0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪2 x − 3y + 6‬‬
‫‪=0‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪− 13‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ‪ Q‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﺎﺗﻰ '‪θ = 123o 40‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪x cos123o 40'+ y sin 123o 40'−‬‬ ‫‪=0‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪ 2x − 3y + 6 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ x cosQ + y sin Q − p = 0‬ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ ax + by + c = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪331‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ax‬‬ ‫‪by‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪=0‬‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x cos 60° + y sin 60° − 7 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻂ ﻘ‬ ‫ﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ --11‬ﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x cos 225° + y sin 225° − 6 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪15y − 8x + 3 = 0‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪2x + 5y − 2 = 0‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪2x + 4 y + 7 = 0‬‬
‫‪332‬‬
 ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫)‪Distance of a point from a‬‬
‫‪(line‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (2,2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ‬
‫ﻛــﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ x + y = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔــﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠــﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ‪ d ، AB‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ‪AB‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺧﻂ ‪ AB‬ﻧﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺧﻂ '‪ A' B‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ‪ AB‬ﺭﺳــﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ‪AB‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪x cosQ + y sin Q − p = 0‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ '‪ A' B‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ AB‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ '‪A' B‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ x cos θ + y sin θ − (p + d ) = 0‬ﻳﺎ ‪d = x cosQ + y sin Q − p‬‬
‫ﭼــﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P( x1 , y1‬ﺭﻭﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ '‪ A' B‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻮﺽ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪y‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ x1‬ﻭ ‪ y1‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪d = x1 cos θ + y1 sin θ − P‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ‪AB‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ AB‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪AB‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ )‪(ax + by + c = 0‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪333‬‬
 ‫‪−c‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫= ‪ P‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫= ‪ cos θ‬ﻭ‬ ‫= ‪, sin θ‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ AB‬ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ax1 + by1 + c‬‬
‫=‪d‬‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﻭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻂ ‪ AB‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ d‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺷــﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ p‬ﻭ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ AB‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ d‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ) .‬ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ‪ c‬ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(−2,8‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 4x + 3y − 11 = 0‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣـﻞ‪ b = 3 ، a = 4 :‬ﻭ ‪ c = −11‬ﭼــﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣــﻪ ‪ c‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣــﻪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ax1 + by1 + c‬‬ ‫‪4(−2) + 3(8) − 11‬‬ ‫‪− 8 + 24 − 11‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫=‪d‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪(4) 2 + (3) 2‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (5,8‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 3x − 2 y + 7 = 0‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ) ‪:(Distance between two parallel lines‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠــﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣــﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑــﺎﻻﻯ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ)‪ :(2‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ‪ 2 x − 5 y + 13 = 0‬ﻭ ‪2 x − 5 y + 6 = 0‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ؛ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫‪2 x − 5 y + 13 = 0‬‬
‫‪ x = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ y = 3‬ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (1,3‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪2 x − 5 y + 6 = 0‬‬
‫‪334‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ‪ d = ax1 + by1 + c‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪± a +b‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2(1) − 5(3) + 6‬‬ ‫‪2 − 15 + 6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫=‪d‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪(2) 2 + (−5) 2‬‬ ‫‪4 + 25‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ax + by + c = 0‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ )‪ (0,0‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪a 2 + b2‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ‪ 3x + 2 y = 10‬ﻭ ‪ y = − x + 7‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :3‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ‪ 2x + y + 2 = 0‬ﻭ ‪ 6x + 3y − 8 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ x = 0 ، 2x + y + 2 = 0‬ﺷــﻮﺩ ‪ y = −2‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫)‪ (0,−2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 6x + 3y − 8 = 0‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ax1 + by1 + c‬‬ ‫‪6(0) + 3(−2) − 8‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬
‫=‪d‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪a 2 + b2‬‬ ‫‪36 + 9‬‬ ‫‪3 5‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P( x , y‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ‪d = x cos θ + y sin θ − p‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ‪ax1 + by1 + c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫‪335‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 3x − 4 y + 7 = 0‬ﻭ ‪3x − 4 y + 3 = 0‬‬
‫‪ 12x + 5 y + 13 = 0‬ﻭ ‪12 x + 5 y − 6 = 0‬‬
‫‪ 2x + 4 y = 1‬ﻭ ‪x + 2 y − 5 = 0‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(6,−1‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ‪ 6 x − 4 y + 9 = 0‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ‪ 3x + 6 y − 8 = 0‬ﻭ ‪ 2 x + 4 y + 5 = 0‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫)‪b‬‬ ‫‪c)6 5‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ ) ‪d‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6 5‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (1,2‬ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 3 x − 4 y + 2 = 0‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a: 2‬‬ ‫‪b: 1‬‬ ‫‪c: 3‬‬ ‫‪d:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (−2,7‬ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 24x + 7 y − 2 = 0‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪a : 0,04‬‬ ‫‪b:‬‬ ‫‪c : 4 x10 −2‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪d :‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪336‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ)‪(Circle‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳــﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛــﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ )‪ (Center‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ )‪ (Radius‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪ :(Equation of a circle‬ﺍﮔﺮ ) ‪ C (h, k‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪ r ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ) ‪ P( x, y‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪(CP) 2 = (x − h) 2 + (y − k) 2‬‬
‫‪(x − h)2 + ( y − k)2 = r 2‬‬ ‫) ‪(CP = r‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ h = k = 0‬ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﺒــﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ ( x − 0) 2 + ( y − 0) 2 = r 2‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪y−k‬‬
‫‪ x 2 + y 2 = r 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x−h‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ r = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﻮﻯ‬
‫)‪ (Point circle‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪337‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ )‪ (−3,5‬ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷــﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ )‪ (7‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ k = 5 , r = 7 :‬ﻭ ‪h = −3‬‬
‫‪( x + 3) 2 + ( y − 5) 2 = 7 2‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y 2 + 6 x − 10 y − 15 = 0‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴــﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻭ ﺷــﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪:(General form of an equation of a circle‬‬
‫‪( x − h) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2‬‬
‫‪x 2 − 2hx + h 2 + y 2 − 2ky + k 2 − r 2 = 0‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y 2 − 2hx − 2ky + h 2 + k 2 − r 2 = 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ − h = g ، − k = f‬ﻭ ‪ h 2 + k 2 − r 2 = c‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0‬‬ ‫‪( x + g )2 + ( y + f )2 = g 2 + f 2 − c‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ) ‪ (− g ,− f‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ r = g 2 + f 2 − c‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g 2 + f 2 − c > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g 2 + f 2 − c = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﻮﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ g 2 + f 2 − c < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ‪x 2 + y 2 − 2hx − 2ky + h 2 + k 2 − r 2 = 0‬‬
‫‪ − 2k = b ، − 2h = a‬ﻭ ‪ h 2 + k 2 − r 2 = c‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻰ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪Ax 2 + By 2 + Dx + Ey − F = 0‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ ﻛﻪ ‪ A = B‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪338‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﮔــﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ ( x − h ) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ h = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ x 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔــﺮ ‪ k = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣﺮﻛــﺰ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﻩ ﺑــﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤــﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗــﻊ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ ( x − h) 2 + y 2 = r 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ k = r‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪( x − h) 2 + ( y − r ) 2 = r 2 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ h = r‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪( x − r ) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ‪h 2 + k 2 = r 2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 6‬ﻳــﻚ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑــﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ( x − r ) 2 + ( y − r ) 2 = r 2 ،‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :2‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪ x 2 + ( y − 5) 2 = 10‬ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪ ( x − 1) 2 + ( y − 5) 2 = 25‬ﺑﺎﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪ ( x + 3) 2 + y 2 = 9‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪Y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻣﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺳﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ )‪ :(3‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﻴــﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ )‪ (−2,3‬ﻭ ﺷــﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪6‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪( x + 2) 2 + ( y − 3) 2 = 6 2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − 6 y − 23 = 0‬‬
‫‪339‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(4‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ 5x 2 + 5y 2 + 24 x + 36 y + 10 = 0‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y2 +‬‬ ‫‪x+ y+2=0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫= ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c = 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ‪، g = :‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪− 12 − 18‬‬
‫( = ) ‪( −g,−f‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ( )‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪144 324‬‬ ‫‪418‬‬ ‫‪418‬‬
‫= ‪r = g2 + f 2 − c‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫= ‪−2‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫‪25 25‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ ‪ :5‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳــﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﺓ ‪ x 2 + y 2 − 8 x + 4 = 0‬ﻣﺘﺤﺪﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫)‪ (Concentric‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ‪ x + 2 y + 6 = 0‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪x 2 + y 2 − 8 x + 4 = 0‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ C1 (−g,−f‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫‪: x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0‬‬
‫‪2g = −8 ⇒ g = −4 ⇒ − g = 4‬‬
‫‪2f = 0 ⇒ f = 0‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ C1 (4,0‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ‪ C1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ ( x − h) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪( x − 4) 2 + ( y − 0) 2 = r 2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ C2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪x + 2 y + 6 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (4,0‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4(1) + 2(0) + 6‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬
‫=‪d=r‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫= ‪r2‬‬ ‫‪= 20‬‬
‫‪12 + 2 2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪340‬‬
 ‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ‪ ( x − 4) 2 + y 2 = 20‬ﻳﺎ ‪ x 2 + y 2 − 8 x − 4 = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ‪ :6‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛــﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ B(6,5‬ﻭ )‪ A(4,1‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 4x + y − 16 = 0‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ) ‪ C(h, k‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ( x − h ) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ 4x + y − 16 = 0‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪ 4h + k = 16‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ( x − h ) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ AC = BC‬ﻭ ‪ AC 2 = BC 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(h − 4) 2 + (k − 1) 2 = (h − 6) 2 + (k − 5) 2‬‬
‫‪4h + 8k = 44‬‬
‫‪4 h + k = 16‬‬
‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬
‫‪7 k = 28‬‬
‫‪k=4‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪h =3‬‬
‫‪r 2 = (3 − 4) 2 + (4 − 1) 2 = 10‬‬
‫‪( x − 3) 2 + ( y − 4) 2 = 10‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 8 y + 15 = 0‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (0,0‬ﻭ )‪ (2,0‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪y − 1 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ x + y − 4x + 4 y − 9 = 0‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y 2 − 4x + 4 y − 9 = 0‬‬
‫‪x 2 − 4x + y 2 + 4 y − 9 = 0‬‬
‫‪x 2 − 4 x + (−2 2 ) − (−2 2 ) + y 2 + 4 y + 2 2 − 2 − 9 = 0‬‬
‫‪( x − 2) 2 + ( y + 2) 2 = 17‬‬
‫‪341‬‬
 ‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪ (2,−2‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ r = 17‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪x 2 + y 2 = r 2‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ) ‪(h, k‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ ( x − h ) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2‬ﻳﺎ ‪x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ )‪ (5,−2‬ﻭ ‪ r = 4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :b‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ ( 2, − 3 3‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ‪ r = 2 2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :c‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ )‪ (0,0‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (1,2‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺁﻥ )‪ (0,0‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (−3,−4‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :e‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ )‪ (8,−6‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y 2 + 12x − 10 y = 0‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪5x 2 + 5 y 2 + 14x + 12 y = 0‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 4 y + 13 = 0‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪3x 2 + 3y 2 − 2 x + 4 y − 1 = 0‬‬
‫‪a ( x 2 + y 2 ) + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0‬‬
‫‪342‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ 3x − 4 y + 20 = 0‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪x 2 + y 2 = 25‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪ x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳــﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ Δ = b 2 − 4ac > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = b 2 − 4ac = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = b 2 − 4ac < 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 2 x = y + 7‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ x 2 + y 2 − 8x − 2 y + 12 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ y = 2 x − 7‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 2 + (2 x − 7) 2 − 8x − 2(2 x − 7) + 12 = 0‬‬
‫‪5x 2 − 40x + 75 = 0‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪x 2 − 8x + 15 = 0‬‬
‫‪Δ = b 2 − 4ac = (−8) 2 − 4 ⋅15 = 64 − 60 = 4 > 0‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪343‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪− b ± b 2 − 4ac 8 ± 4‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪2a‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪x1 = 5 , x 2 = 3‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ y‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x1 = 5‬ﻭ ‪ x2 = 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪y1 = 2 x1 − 7 = 2 ⋅ 5 − 7 = 3‬‬
‫‪y 2 = 2 x 2 − 7 = 2 ⋅ 3 − 7 = −1‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (3,−1‬ﻭ )‪ (5,3‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ)‪ :(2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x + 3 y − 5 = 0‬ﺑــﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 4 y − 5 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ؟‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x = 5 − 3 y‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪(5 − 3 y ) 2 + y 2 − 2(5 − 3 y ) + 4 y − 5 = 0‬‬
‫‪y2 − 2 y +1 = 0‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ Δ = (−2) 2 − 4 ⋅1 = 0‬ﭘــﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪2± 0‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪x = 5 − 3 ⋅1 = 2‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (2,1‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x − y + 1 = 0‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪ x 2 + y 2 + 5 = 0‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪344‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(−3,−2‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ x 2 + y 2 = 13‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ C (h, k‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪k − y1 :‬‬
‫=‪m‬‬
‫‪h − x1‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪h − x1‬‬
‫‪−‬‬
‫‪k − y1‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪ − h − x1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪k − y1‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ‪ y − y1 = m( x − x1‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪h − x1‬‬
‫‪y − y1 = −‬‬ ‫) ‪( x − x1‬‬
‫‪k − y1‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ h = k = 0‬ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪x1‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪yy1 + xx1 = x12 + y12‬‬ ‫‪y − y1 = −‬‬ ‫) ‪( x − x1‬‬
‫‪y1‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ x12 + y12 = r 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ‪ yy1 + xx1 = r 2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪345‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (3,4‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ x 2 + y 2 = 25‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣـﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﻛــﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒــﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪y ⋅ 4 + x ⋅ 3 = 25 .‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪3x + 4 y = 25‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 3x + 4 y − 25 = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ)‪ :(2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄــﻪ )‪ P(3,5‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ‬
‫)‪ (1,2‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪h =1‬‬ ‫‪k=2‬‬
‫‪x1 = 3‬‬ ‫‪y1 = 5‬‬
‫‪h − x1‬‬
‫‪y − y1 = −‬‬ ‫) ‪( x − x1‬‬
‫‪k − y1‬‬
‫‪1− 3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪m=−‬‬ ‫‪=−‬‬
‫‪2−5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪y − 5 = − ( x − 3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2 x + 3y = 21‬‬
‫‪2 x + 3y − 21 = 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔــﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P1 (x1 , y1‬ﻛــﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ (x − h) 2 + (y − k) 2 = r 2‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ‪ P1T‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ )‪ (T‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ )‪ (C‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ P1 T C‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﻀﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺙ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪(P1 C) 2 = (P1 T ) 2 + (CT) 2‬‬
‫‪346‬‬
‫‪(P1 T) 2 = (P1 C) 2 − (CT)2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ (P1 C) 2 = (x1 − h) 2 + (y1 − k) 2 :‬ﻭ ‪ CT = r‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪P1T = ( x1 − h) 2 + ( y1 − k ) 2 − r 2 :‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ)‪ :(3‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (−5,10‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪5x 2 + 5 y 2 + 14x + 12 y − 10 = 0‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y2 +‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‪x + y − 2 = 0 :‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ = (−5) 2 + (10) 2 − 14 + 24 − 2 = 133‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(−2,2‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪ x 2 + y 2 − 6x + 8y = 0‬ﺭﺳــﻢ ﺷــﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ Δ > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ < 0‬ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪347‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ) ‪ P ( x , y‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ (h, k‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪h − x1‬‬
‫‪y − y1 = −‬‬ ‫) ‪( x − x1‬‬
‫‪k − y1‬‬
‫ﺍﮔــﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ‪ yy1 + xx1 = x1 + y1‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ yy1 + xx1 = r 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ‪ PT‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ P( x, y‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ) ‪ (h, k‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪PT = ( x − h ) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 − r 2‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪x 2 + y 2 − 4x − y − 3 = 0‬‬ ‫‪3x − 2 y + 3 = 0‬‬
‫‪2( x 2 + y 2 ) − 3x + 2 y − 6 = 0‬‬ ‫‪x − y −1 = 0‬‬
‫‪x 2 + y 2 − x − 9 y + 14 = 0‬‬ ‫‪5x − y = 1‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (2,−3‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪x 2 + y 2 − 2 x + 4 y + 3 = 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (−5,4‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪ 5x 2 + 5y 2 − 10x + 15y − 131 = 0‬ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ (−2,5‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ‪ x 2 + y 2 + 8 x + 5 y = 7‬ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪348‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺴــﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴــﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫــﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ )‪ (3,2) ، (−3,6‬ﻭ )‪(6,0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ P2 ، P1‬ﻭ ‪ P3‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ X‬ﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ‪ P2 C ، P1 A‬ﻭ ‪ P3 B‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺫﻭ ﺫﻧﻘﻪ ‪ + P3 BCP2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺫﻭ ﺫﻧﻘﻪ ‪=( P1 ABP3‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪P1 P2 P3‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺫﻭﺫﻧﻘﻪ ‪− P1 ACP2‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺫﻭﺫﻧﻘﻪ )ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ( )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ(‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ‪:‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪ = ( P1 A + P3 B ) ( AB ) + ( P3 B + P2 C )( BC‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪P1P2 P3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪− ( P1A + P2 C )( AC‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫]) ‪= [( y1 + y 3 )( x 3 − x1 )] + [( y 3 + y 2 )( x 2 − x 3 )] − [( y1 + y 2 )( x 2 − x1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪( x 3 y1 + x 3 y 3 − x1 y1 − x1 y 3 + x 2 y 3 + x 2 y 2 − x 3 y 3 − x 3 y 2 − x 2 y1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫) ‪− x 2 y 2 + x1 y1 + x1 y 2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫]) ‪= [ x1 ( y 2 − y 3 ) + x 2 ( y 3 − y1 ) + x 3 ( y1 − y 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ)‪ :(1‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ B(5,−6) ، A(4,−5‬ﻭ )‪ C (3,1‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﺎﺷــﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪349‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪x1 = 4 , y1 = −5 , x 2 = 5 , y 2 = −6 x 3 = 3 y 3 = 1 :‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫]) ‪ = [x1 (y 2 − y 3 )+ x 2 (y 3 − y1 )+ x 3 (y1 − y 2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ABC‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫]) ‪= [4(− 6 − 1)+ 5(1 + 5)+ 3(− 5 + 6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫(‬‫‪− 28 + 30 + 3) = ⋅ 5 = = 2.5‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Δ‬‬
‫ﻣﺴــﺎﺣﺖ ﻳــﻚ ﻣﺜﻠــﺚ ‪ P1 P 2 P3‬ﻛــﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫــﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ P2 ( x 2 , y 2 ) ، P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪ P3 ( x 3 , y 3‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ]) ‪[ x1 ( y 2 − y 3 ) + x 2 ( y 3 − y1 ) + x 3 ( y1 − y 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ )‪ B(8,6) ، A(0,0‬ﻭ )‪ C(12,4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ )‪ B(−4,0) ، A(4,0‬ﻭ )‪ C(0,3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ )‪C (8,6) ، B(6,2) ، A(1,0‬‬
‫ﻭ )‪ D(2,4‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪350‬‬
 ‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪
t‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴــﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴــﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧــﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ y‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ‪ x‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ) ‪ P( x1 , y1‬ﻭ ) ‪ Q( x2 , y2‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ d = ( x 2 − x1 ) 2 + ( y 2 − y1 ) 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ r‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪rx 2 + x1‬‬ ‫‪ry 2 + y1‬‬
‫= ‪ x‬ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻰ ﺧﻂ ‪ P1 P2‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪1+ r‬‬ ‫‪1+ r‬‬
‫‪ x = x1 + x 2 ، y = y1 + y 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ p‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ r‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ r‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ r‬ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄــﻪ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﻭ ) ‪ P2 ( x2 , y2‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ m = y 2 − y1 = y1 − y 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪x 2 − x1 x1 − x 2‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺧــﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛــﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄــﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃــﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤــﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ y = mx + b‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ y − y1 = m( x − x1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪y2 − y1‬‬
‫= ‪ y − y1‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛــﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄــﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ) ‪( x − x1‬‬
‫‪x2 − x1‬‬
‫‪y − y1 y 2 − y1‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺧــﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛــﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑــﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪x−x‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬‫‪x − x1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪y‬‬‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ + = 1‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a b‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ x cosQ + y sin Q − p = 0‬ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻰ‬
‫‪351‬‬
 ‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ ax + by + c = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P ( x1 , y1‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ‪d = x cos Q + y sin Q − P‬‬
‫‪ax1 + by1 + c‬‬
‫= ‪ d‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪± a 2 + b2‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪x 2 + y 2 = r 2‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ) ‪ (h, k‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪( x − h ) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 = r 2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ x 2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﺑــﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳــﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳــﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ Δ > 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Δ < 0‬ﺧﻂ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ (h, k‬ﺍﺳــﺖ‬
‫‪h − x1‬‬
‫‪y − y1 = −‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪( x − x1 ) :‬‬
‫‪k − y1‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻛــﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﻣﺒﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻤﻴــﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ‪ yy1 + xx1 = x12 + y12‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ yy1 + xx1 = r 2‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ‪ PT‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ‪ P( x1 , y1‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ) ‪ (h, k‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪PT = ( x − h ) 2 + ( y − k ) 2 − r 2 :‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﺴــﺎﺣﺖ ﻳــﻚ ﻣﺜﻠــﺚ ‪ P1 P 2 P3‬ﻛــﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫــﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ P2 ( x2 , y2 ) ، P1 ( x1 , y1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪ P3 ( x3 , y3‬ﺑﺎﺷــﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ]) ‪ [ x ( y − y ) + x ( y − y ) + x ( y − y‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪352‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻨﺼﻴﻒ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪A(3,1) , B(−2,−4) ,‬‬ ‫‪A(−8,3) ,‬‬ ‫)‪B(2,−1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪A(− 5 ,− ) , B(−3 5 ,5‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﮔــﺮ )‪ B(0,2) ، A( 3 ,−1‬ﻭ )‪ C (h,−2‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪﻭ‬
‫∧‬
‫‪ A = 90°‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ )‪ (h‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 3‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(1,4‬ﻭ )‪B (5,6‬‬
‫‪AP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪= 2‬‬
‫‪PB‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ )‪ (−2‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ x = 7‬ﻭ ‪ y = − 7‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 6‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) − 1‬‬ ‫‪b) 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫∞)‪d‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 7‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ = ‪ m‬ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬
‫)‪a‬‬ ‫‪b) −‬‬ ‫)‪c‬‬ ‫)‪d‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ - 8‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5,11‬ﻭ )‪(−2,4‬‬ ‫)‪ (2,7‬ﻭ )‪(3,−2‬‬ ‫)‪ (4,8‬ﻭ )‪(4,6‬‬
‫‪ - 9‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 4 x − y + 2 = 0‬ﻭ ‪ 12x − 3y + 1 = 0‬ﺑﺎﻫﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﻧﺪ )‪a‬‬ ‫ﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ )‪ c‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪ )‪b‬‬
‫‪ - 10‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 3x − 4 y + 3 = 0‬ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 3x − 4 y + 7 = 0‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪353‬‬
 ‫‪ - 11‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛــﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (−4,7‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ 2 x − 7 y + 4 = 0‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 12‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪ P(6,−1‬ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 6 x − 4 y + 9 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 13‬ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ P1 P2‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪P1 (2,−5‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ )‪ P2 (6,3‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ - 14‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2x + 5y − 2 = 0‬‬ ‫‪2 y − 6x + 4 = 0‬‬ ‫‪2 x − 3y + 6 = 0‬‬
‫‪ - 15‬ﻣﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (4,0‬ﻭ )‪ (−4,0‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a) 1‬‬ ‫‪b) − 1‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫∞ )‪d‬‬
‫‪ - 16‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ‪ 10‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ 30°‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 17‬ﻣﺴــﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜــﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴــﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫــﺎﻯ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ )‪ B(−1,1) ، A(2,3‬ﻭ )‪C (4,−5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 18‬ﻣﺴــﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ )‪ B(2,−3) ، A(1,4‬ﻭ )‪ C(3,−10‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a )1‬‬ ‫‪b) 2‬‬ ‫‪c) 0‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ ) ‪d‬‬
‫ﺑــﺎ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ - 19‬ﻛﻤﻴــﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴــﺔ ﻧﻘﻄــﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃــﻊ ﺧــﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪x + 2 y = 6‬‬
‫‪ x 2 + y 2 − 2 x − 2 y + 1 = 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 20‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ B(2,−1) , A(1,1‬ﻭ )‪C (3,−2‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 21‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴــﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ B(0,1) ، A(3,−1‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻯ ﺧﻂ ‪ 4 x − 3 y − 3 = 0‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 22‬ﻛﻤﻴــﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴــﺔ ﻣﺮﻛــﺰ ﻭ ﻃــﻮﻝ ﺷــﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳــﺮﻩ ﻳــﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴــﺪ ﻛــﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ 4x 2 + 4 y 2 − 8x + 12 y − 25 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪354‬‬
‫‪ - 23‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛــﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(4,1‬ﻭ )‪ B(6,5‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ 4 x + y − 16 = 0‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ - 24‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ )‪ B(−3,5) ، A(5,−6‬ﻭ )‪ C (−1,2‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ c‬ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ b‬ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)‪a‬‬
‫‪ - 25‬ﺍﮔــﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫــﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ )‪ (4,10) ، (5,4‬ﻭ )‪ (7,8‬ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ c‬ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻗﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ b‬ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)‪a‬‬
‫‪ - 26‬ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ P(−8,4‬ﻭ )‪ Q(2,−1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ PQ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ - 27‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ‪ x 2 + y 2 = 5‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x − y + 1 = 0‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 28‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ x + ay − 5 = 0‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ‪ x 2 + y 2 − 2x + 4 y = 0‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ a‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 29‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟــﺔ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (0,0‬ﻭ )‪ (2,0‬ﻣﻴﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ‪ y − 1 = 0‬ﻣﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪a ) x 2 + y 2 − 4x = 0‬‬ ‫‪b) x 2 + y 2 − 2 x = 0‬‬ ‫‪c) x 2 + y 2 + 2 x = 0‬‬
‫‪ - 30‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ x 2 + y 2 − 6x + 4 y + 14 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ)‪a‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻮﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪b‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪c‬‬
‫‪ - 31‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ x 2 + y 2 + 2 x − 4 y + 5 = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪a‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻮﻯ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪b‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ)‪c‬‬
‫‪ - 32‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠــﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ A(4,−3‬ﻭ )‪ B(−2,−5‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻴــﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻨﺼﻴﻒ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ AB‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 33‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ )‪ B(3,−5) ، A(−6,3‬ﻭ )‪ C (−1,5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 34‬ﻧﺸــﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪﻛﻪ )‪ C (0, b) ، B(a,0) ، A(0,0‬ﻭ )‪ D(a, b‬ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪355‬‬
 ‫‪ - 35‬ﻧﺸــﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ B(6,2) ، A(3,1‬ﻭ )‪ C (9,3‬ﺭﻭﻯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴــﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 36‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(5,8‬‬ ‫)‪(1,2‬‬ ‫)‪(3,5‬‬ ‫)‪(8,15‬‬
‫)‪(−1,−3‬‬ ‫)‪(2,−1) (−2,−1‬‬ ‫)‪(3,−4‬‬
‫)‪(0,3‬‬ ‫)‪(5,0‬‬ ‫)‪(0,2‬‬ ‫)‪(−2,0‬‬
‫‪ - 37‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (5,8‬ﻭ )‪ (−1,10‬ﻣﻰ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪a: y = − x+9‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪b: y = − +9‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬
‫‪c: y = − x+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪d:‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪356‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‬
‫اﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﻪ‬
 ‫ﮔﺮاف ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﮐﺜﺮت‬
‫)‪(Frequency Polygon graph‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴــﺎﺣﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷــﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣــﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴــﺎﺣﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻯ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪xi‬‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ‪f i‬‬
‫‪10-13‬‬ ‫‪11.5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪13-16‬‬ ‫‪14.5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪16-19‬‬ ‫‪17.5‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪19-22‬‬ ‫‪20.5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﺔ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪
t‬ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟‬
‫‪
t‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (8.5 , 0‬ﻭ )‪ (23.5 , 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻜﺠﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪359‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻭ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﻰ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻯ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )‪ ( x1 − c , 0‬ﻭ )‪ ( xn + c , 0‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ‪ c‬ﻭﺳﻌﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻨﻒ )ﺳﺮﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻣﻨﻔﻰ ﺳﺮﺣﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻰ ﺻﻨﻒ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻰ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﻯ )‪(Data‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ = CL‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪11-16 16-21‬‬ ‫‪21-26‬‬ ‫‪26-31‬‬ ‫‪31-36‬‬
‫‪ = f i‬ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ = X i‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪13.5‬‬ ‫‪18.5‬‬ ‫‪23.5‬‬ ‫‪28.5‬‬ ‫‪33.5‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺳﻌﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ c = 5‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫)‪( x1 − 5 , 0) = (13.5 − 5 , 0) = (8.5 , 0‬‬
‫)‪( x n + 5 , 0) = (33.5 + 5 , 0) = (38.5 , 0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (8.5 ,0‬ﻭ )‪ (38.5 , 0‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ‬
‫‪360‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻰ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻫﺎﻯ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺎﺑﻴﻨﻰ ﺿﻠﻊ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻰ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﻰ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )‪ (data‬ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪361‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻗﺪ ‪ 24‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩ ﺻﻨﻒ ﻧﻬﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻫﻢ )ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ ﻣﺘﺮ(ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪138‬‬ ‫‪107‬‬ ‫‪136‬‬ ‫‪128‬‬ ‫‪148‬‬ ‫‪118‬‬
‫‪142‬‬ ‫‪129‬‬ ‫‪115‬‬ ‫‪123‬‬ ‫‪133‬‬ ‫‪123‬‬
‫‪121‬‬ ‫‪128‬‬ ‫‪122‬‬ ‫‪144‬‬ ‫‪126‬‬ ‫‪135‬‬
‫‪152‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬ ‫‪117‬‬ ‫‪153‬‬ ‫‪141‬‬ ‫‪126‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﻯ )‪ (data‬ﻓﻮﻕ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺘﺎ)‪ (data‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )‪(data‬ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻠﻌﻰ ﻛﺜﺮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪362‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻗﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮگ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺩﻧﻴﺎﻳﻰ ﺍﺯﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻀﻮﻯ ﺍﺯﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﻫﻢ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻗﺪ ‪ 20‬ﻧﻮﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻰ )ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬
‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺩﻳﺘﺎﻯ )‪(data‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 4‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫)‪40 + (0,2,3,3,3,3,5,5,5,6,6,7,7,7,8,8,9,9,9,9‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪363‬‬
 ‫‪ t‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺩﻳﺘﺎ)‪ (data‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﻮﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻗﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮگ‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 9 0‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )‪ (data‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ 37‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻗﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ﺑﺮگ‪ 7‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻗﺔ ﻭ ﺑﺮگ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )‪ (data‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )‪ (data‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻰ ﺍﺯ ‪ 20‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻗﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮگ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )‪ (data‬ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬
‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪57‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )‪ (Data‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 5,4,3,2,1‬ﻭ ‪ 6‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺳﺎﻗﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻗﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮگ‬
‫‪1 0 1 5‬‬
‫‪2 3 7 8‬‬
‫‪3 8 8 9 9‬‬
‫‪4 0 1 4 5 6 6‬‬
‫‪5 2 7 8‬‬
‫‪6 5‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ‪) 90°‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪364‬‬
 ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪9 5‬‬
‫‪3 5 8 9 4 8‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﺮﺕ‬